Owner’s Handbook

LIFT CANTER
OWNER’S HANDBOOK
<MFTE>

English manuscript

Pub. No. MH995716

The following documents are fabricated based on
this document (EO; 4L0503).
MH995723 (DUTCH)
MH995724 (FRENCH)
MH995725 (GERMAN)
MH995720 (ENGLISH)
MH995721 (SPANISH)
MH995722 (DANISH)
MH995726 (POLISH)
MH995718 (ITALIAN)
MH995717 (PORTUGUESE)
MH995719 (GREECE)
MH995727 (FINNISH)

<COVER PAGE>
 Foreword
Thank you for purchasing a Mitsubishi Fuso CANTER.
This Owner’s Handbook explains proper vehicle handling and simple maintenance practices to
ensure that you are able to drive your vehicle safely and comfortably.
As improper use of the vehicle may result in a breakdown or cause an accident, we urge you to
read this handbook thoroughly before operating the vehicle.
Periodical lubrication and maintenance are essential to obtain maximum performance and
extended service life from your vehicle. The separate “Service Booklet” contains a periodical
maintenance schedule. You are strongly recommended to perform the lubrication and mainte-
nance as specified in the schedule.

MITSUBISHI FUSO TRUCK & BUS CORPORATION

© 2015 Mitsubishi Fuso Truck & Bus Corporation
 Reading the handbook
Please be acquainted with the model name and other specifics of your vehicle so that you will be able to
read the applicable descriptions that are identified by vehicle type, model or engine model in this hand-
book.
Illustrations and instructions in this manual apply to left-hand-drive vehicles. The locations of certain com-
ponents in a right-hand-drive vehicle are symmetrically opposite those in a left-hand-drive vehicle, but
handling methods are basically the same for left-hand-drive vehicles and right-hand-drive vehicles. How-
ever, additional information is given for right hand drive vehicles when operation of the two types of vehi-
cles is different.
Because of differences in specifications and improvements that may be added after preparation of this
manual, some of the explanations and illustrations in this handbook may not apply to your vehicle.
The following symbols are used throughout this handbook:
: optional equipment
LHD: left-hand-drive vehicles
RHD: right-hand-drive vehicles
: requests that reader refer to the page of the number indicated.
This manual contains important cautionary instructions and supplementary information under the follow-
ing four headings which identify the nature of the instructions and information:

Precautions that should be taken in handling potentially dangerous

DANGER substances, such as battery fluid and coolant additives.

Precautionary instructions, which if not observed, could result in

WARNING serious injury or death.
Precautionary instructions, which if not observed, could result in
CAUTION damage to or destruction of equipment or parts.

NOTE: Suggestions or supplementary information for more efficient use of

equipment or better understanding.
 CONTENTS

1. Recommendation to drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
4. Seat and steering wheel adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
5. Switches and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
6. Instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7. Starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
8. Handling special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9. Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
10. Interior equipment and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11. In cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
12. Simple inspection and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
13. Useful advice for emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14. Service data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
15. Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Each chapter has a table of contents on its first page.

 1-1

1. Recommendation to drivers

Vehicle identification number and engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Handling vehicles with a BlueTec® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Handling the new vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Preventing problems and accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Handling of vehicles equipped with 12-volt and 24-volt power circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Driving in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-2 Recommendation to drivers

Vehicle identification number and

engine number

If presented at the time of repair or parts order, the

vehicle identification number and engine number
will facilitate the quick and smooth processing of
your requests.

1 Vehicle identification number (V.I.N.)

The vehicle identification number is indicated on the
right frame, near the front wheel.

Example:
TYB FEB01BLD T0 0001
Serial No.
Model Code*
T: 2005~
Plant
D: MFTE
Vehicle Model
>
A: Right-Hand Drive
B: Left-Hand Drive
Europe, Portugal,
Mitsubishi Fuso Truck
Europe S.A.
*: This code will be changed due to model change.

2 Engine number
The engine number is indicated on the front side of
the cylinder head.

Example: 4P10 -
Engine number
Engine model
 1-3

Nameplate

A nameplate is located inside the cab.

'VI[GEFQSHIP"

>

The nameplate shows the following.

Whole vehicle type-approval number

Vehicle identification number
Maximum permitted laden mass of the vehicle
Maximum permitted laden mass of the
combination
 Maximum permitted load mass for 1st axle
Maximum permitted load mass for 2nd axle

>

Maintenance

Checking your vehicle at regular intervals is very

important for maximizing performance and extend-
ing service life. It is recommended that you make a
habit of performing the following inspections.

1 Pre-operational check
Make a habit of checking your vehicle at the start of
every day’s operation. This will ensure safe and
comfortable operation. P. 12-13
1-4 Recommendation to drivers

2 Periodic inspection
• Periodic inspection is based on either the dis-
tance traveled (odometer reading) or period of
use (months/years).
Always have the recommended inspection and
services performed as scheduled in accordance
with the separate “Service Booklet”.
• Mitsubishi gives a list of parts (brake hoses, fuel
hoses, oil seals in brake related components,
etc.) that should be replaced at regular intervals
Z01367 in order to ensure safe operation.
Though they have a direct bearing on safe vehi-
cle operation, it is difficult to detect deterioration
of these parts through ordinary inspections.
Rubber hoses in particular, for the brake system
or fuel system, should be regularly inspected
and serviced. Since they are liable to swell,
chafe or crack over time, it is necessary that
they be inspected by technicians according to
the “Periodic inspection schedule” section, and
that they be replaced at regular intervals for
safety’s sake. The hoses must be replaced
immediately whenever they are worn or broken.
For further details, refer to the “Service Booklet”.
If your vehicle is operated frequently under
strenuous conditions (unpaved roads, coastal
regions, deserts, hilly or mountainous regions,
cold regions, etc.), the intervals between inspec-
tions should be shortened accordingly.

Fuels

1 Fuels
• Be sure to use diesel fuel that complies with the
diesel fuel standard “EN590” specified by the
Committee European de Normalization (CEN).
• In cold regions, use diesel fuel with properties
appropriate for the temperature predominant in
the area.
• Avoid storing your vehicle for a long time with
bio-diesel fuel in the fuel tank.

WARNING
• Never use a mixture of diesel fuel with
gasoline or alcohol or any fuel other than
proper diesel fuel. Using other fuel could
cause a fire or an explosion. If you acci-
dentally use gasoline or alcohol when
refueling the vehicle remove all of it from
the fuel system.
• The engine must be stopped when refuel-
ing. Never fail to put out your cigarette
before refueling if you are smoking.
 1-5

CAUTION
• Never use an alternative fuel or a mixture of
diesel fuel and kerosene. Such fuel has infe-
rior lubricating properties. Using it would
cause a malfunction.
• Never add any antifreezing agent or other
additive to the fuel as a damaged fuel injec-
tion system could result.
• If the fuel tank breather (air hole) become so
dirty that the breather gets blocked the fuel
tank may deform and the fuel injection sys-
tem may fail. Be sure to clean them regularly.

NOTE:
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, air will enter the fuel
system. Simply refueling the vehicle will not make
the engine startable; the air must be bled out of the
fuel system. P. 13-37

2 Refueling your vehicle

CAUTION
• Be careful not to allow dirt to enter the fuel
tank when you refuel the vehicle.
• Tighten the cap firmly after refueling.

Fuel tank capacity

FEA, 70 litres
FEB0 100 litres <option>

FEB7, 100 litres

FEC, FG 70 litres spare fuel tank <option>
1-6 Recommendation to drivers

1. Open the cover .

2. Insert the starter key into the lock and turn the
key counterclockwise.

3. Remove the cap by rotating it in the direction

of the arrow (counterclockwise).
Refit the cap by reversing these steps. Tighten it
firmly.

Handling vehicles with

a BlueTec® system

• In accordance with Emission regulations, vehi-

cles must use the specified AdBlue ®, and must
be refilled the tank with the AdBlue ® before it is
empty.
• Driving a vehicle in a condition such that the
urea tank is empty (AdBlue® is not consumed)
may constitute a serious breach of the law. Also
any favourable conditions for the purchase or
operation of the vehicle obtained in the country
of registration or other country in which the vehi-
cle is used may become invalid.
• When the quantity of AdBlue® in the tank
becomes too low, or the BlueTec® exhaust gas
aftertreatment is not operate properly, the warn-
ing is displayed and the engine power is
restricted. P. 5-70

AdBlue®

<Vehicles with a BlueTec® system>

AdBlue ® is injected into the exhaust gas inside the
muffler in order to break down NOx (oxides of nitro-
gen) in the exhaust gas into water and nitrogen, and
thus reduces the amount of NOx.
P. 5-62
 1-7

WARNING
AdBlue® is a colourless transparent odor-
less and harmless water solution (urea
32.5% water 67.5%; Freezing temperature -
11°C) so no problem will occur if you get it
on your skin. However some persons with
delicate skin may in very rare cases get a
rash so carry out the following procedure.
• If AdBlue® gets on your skin wash it off
with water. If there is any change in your
skin or it is painful promptly see a doctor
to receive treatment.
• In the event that you accidentally ingest
AdBlue® drink one to two cupfuls of water
or milk and promptly see a doctor to
receive treatment.
• If AdBlue® gets into your eyes immedi-
ately wash your eyes with a copious
amount of water then see a doctor to
receive treatment.

AdBlue® : Registered trademark of the Verband der

Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)

1 AdBlue® used
Be sure to use AdBlue® that conforms to ISO
22241.
ISO: International Organization for Standardization.

CAUTION
Do not carry out the following when using
AdBlue® because this may cause damage to the
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment.
• Do not dilute the AdBlue®.
• Do not mix the AdBlue® with another
reagent.
• Do not use AdBlue® that does not conform
to ISO 22241.
1-8 Recommendation to drivers

2 Replenishing AdBlue ®

WARNING
Do not pour anything other than AdBlue®
into the urea tank. Particularly never pour
diesel fuel or gasoline into the urea tank
because this may cause a fire or damage the
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment.
If you accidentally fill the urea tank with any
fluid other than AdBlue® immediately turn
the starter switch to the “LOCK” position
and contact an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer to have the incorrectly
added fluid drained off and the vehicle
inspected.

CAUTION
Do not rest your foot on the urea tank or step on
it because this may damage the tank and/or the
sensors on it.
NOTE:
• AdBlue ® consumption is approximately 2 to 4 %
of fuel consumption, although it depends on the
driving conditions.
• Replenish the AdBlue® well before it is used up.
>
• It is recommended that you obtain portable
AdBlue ® for use in the event that the urea tank
becomes empty.
• You can obtain AdBlue® from an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

Urea tank capacity 12 litres

1. Turn the starter switch to the “LOCK” position to

stop the engine.
2. Wipe away dirt, mud, or other contamination in
the vicinity of the replenishment port.
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise and remove it.
4. While observing the level gauge , replenish
the AdBlue® to the FULL line on the tank.

CAUTION
• Do not use a steel container to hold
AdBlue®. AdBlue ® reacts with steel and pro-
duces a corrosive material. If the tank is
refilled with AdBlue® containing this corro-
> sive material the BlueTec® exhaust gas
aftertreatment will be damaged.
• Containers and appliances used to handle
AdBlue® must not have been used for other
purposes. Impurities that may remain in
them could adversely affect the quality of
AdBlue® and prevent the engine from start-
ing.
 1-9

5. Install the cap securely by turning it clockwise.

NOTE:
If you spill the AdBlue® during replenishment, wipe
it away with a cloth, or the like, and then wash the
area with water.

3 Method for canceling the driving restric-

tion that has engaged due to an empty
the urea tank
If the urea tank becomes empty, a driving
restriction automatically engages, so the vehicle
can be driven only slowly. In the event of a driv-
ing restriction, replenish AdBlue® and then dis-
engage the restriction as follows.
1. Refilling the tank with AdBlue®. P. 1-8
2. Turn the starter switch from “LOCK” to “ON”,
>  and wait until the following changes in state
have completed.
• The (red) warning, the warning lamp and
the urea level warning lamp go out.
• The urea level indicator lamp stops flashing.
• Do not turn the starter switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position before all the above changes
have completed.

NOTE:
• It may take a while after placing the starter
switch to “ON” for the warning lamp to go out.
• Perform the driving restriction canceling proce-
dure immediately after refilling the tank with
AdBlue® in cold weather. The freeze of AdBlue®
prevents the driving restriction from being can-
celed.

4 Storing the AdBlue®

• Seal the AdBlue® container, and store it indoors
in a well-ventilated place away from direct sun-
light.
The temperature of the storage place should be
between –5°C and 25°C.

WARNING
Do not store AdBlue® in a high temperature
location.
If the temperature is high AdBlue® may
release ammonia which is toxic. When stor-
ing the container seal it. Also open it out-
doors in a well-ventilated area. If a pungent
odor is emitted from the container do not
carelessly go near it.

NOTE:
• You can use frozen AdBlue® after allowing it to
thaw, without loss of quality.
• If you seal the container so as to prevent the
water from evaporating, the quality of the
AdBlue® will not change.
1-10 Recommendation to drivers

• Although AdBlue® is a non-flammable liquid, it

may emit a pungent odor if it is heated due to a
fire, for example. In the event that a fire breaks
out, promptly move the container to a safe
place.
• It is strongly recommended to store or carry
AdBlue ® in the original container in which it was
sold. You can also use a polypropylene tank
usually used for drinking water or the like
instead if unavoidable, but you must ensure that
it contains absolutely no water or other impuri-
ties, and clean it by using AdBlue ® before use.

CAUTION
Do not store AdBlue® in a non-specified con-
tainer. If AdBlue® is stored in a steel container
and then used for replenishing corrosive mate-
rial produced by chemical reactions will damage
the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment.

• AdBlue ® must be handled as industrial waste

when discarding it.

CAUTION
Do not discard AdBlue® in a lake or marsh in
the sea or in a river because this may cause
environmental destruction.
 1-11

Handling the new vehicle

The way the vehicle is handled when new greatly

affects its subsequent performance and service life.
Observe the following precautions when handling
the new vehicle.

1 Maximum engine speed during run-in

period
To avoid overburdening a new engine, limit engine
RPM to that listed below for the first 1,000 km (600
miles).
Then, run in your vehicle step by step at various
speeds, beginning with low gears.

Maximum engine
speed during run-in 2,800 rpm
period

Preventing problems and accidents

• Replace oils at regular intervals. Prolonged use

of contaminated oil may cause bearing seizure
or other major problems. Use only the oil and
grease recommended in this manual. Use of
any other oil and grease could cause malfunc-
tions and other problems.
• Replace or clean filters or filter elements at reg-
ular intervals. Clogged or damaged filters or fil-
ter elements could diminish performance or
cause engine malfunction.
• Always use only MITSUBISHI genuine parts as
replacements. You can trust them, as their qual-
ity is guaranteed by Mitsubishi Fuso Truck &
Bus Corporation.
All MITSUBISHI genuine parts are identified by
the illustrated mark or are contained in a carton
bearing the same mark.

CAUTION
Z10153 Due to the great number of accessory parts as
well as spare parts of different manufacturers
available on the market neither MITSUBISHI
FUSO TRUCK & BUS CORPORATION (hereinaf-
ter referred to as MFTBC) nor the importer can
check if the driving safety of your MITSUBISHI
vehicle is impaired by installation of such parts.
Even if the quality of the parts is approved offi-
cially or if the installation of such parts is per-
mitted by an official automobile testing
organization you may not assume that the driv-
ing safety of your vehicle is not impaired.
Please keep in mind that neither the certifier nor
1-12 Recommendation to drivers

the authorities in question are bound by warran-

ties.
Only the MITSUBISHI Genuine Parts or MITSU-
BISHI accessories installed by a MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer can provide optimum
safety. The same is valid if standard vehicles are
modified. For your own safety the modification
should be performed only by a MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer according to MFTBC
recommendation.

• Avoid stepping in the wheel cover when getting

in or out of the vehicle.
• Never turn over the starter continuously for
more than 15 seconds. Doing so could result in
rundown battery or burnt out starter.
• With a manual transmission vehicle, engage the
clutch slowly when starting out. Engaging the
clutch too quickly could shorten the life of the
power train.
• With a manual transmission vehicle, never drive
with your foot on the clutch pedal. Such a prac-
tice will result not only in loss of power but also
in shortened life of the clutch disc due to prema-
ture wear.
• When driving on rough roads, reduce speed suf-
ficiently and avoid bumps and potholes as far as
Z01369 possible.
• Do not continue spinning the wheels after trac-
tion is lost. Put a rag or some other object under
the tyres to give sufficient traction to move for-
ward.
• While the vehicle is in motion, do not try to dis-
engage the clutch or shift the gear into neutral
(manual transmission vehicles) or do not push
the gearshift lever into the “N” position (vehicles
with a DUONIC® system). Also, never operate
the vehicle with engine switched off.

WARNING
If the engine is stopped while the vehicle is in
motion the brakes will become dangerously
ineffective. Further steering will become
dangerously sluggish

• If strange noises, smells or vibrations are noted,

stop as soon as it is safe to do so and check the
vehicle for possible causes.
• When climbing or descending slopes, be cau-
tious of engine overrevving which may occur
upon downshifting or when the vehicle speed is
excessive.
• Try to take maximum advantage of engine brak-
ing and exhaust brake features when descend-
ing a slope.
• If the warning indication or red warning lamp
comes on, the buzzer sounds, or the vehicle
behaves abnormally, stop the vehicle in the
nearest safe place and investigate the cause.
P. 6-19, P. 6-26
 1-13

• During cold weather, be sure to use oil of a

proper viscosity for the outside temperature.
Also check for proper coolant and windshield
washer fluid additive concentration, battery elec-
trolyte specific gravity, etc.
• Do not carry containers of fuel or spray cans in
the cabin.

WARNING
Carrying fuel in the cabin is extremely dan-
gerous because an increase in the cabin tem-
perature could cause fuel vapor to catch fire
or cause the container to rupture.

• Do not attach any decorative panel or similar

item to the windshield.

WARNING
Attaching a decorative panel or similar item
to the windshield could impede driving and
visibility. In addition any suction cup on
such an item could cause a fire by acting as a
lens.

• Do not exceed the maximum loading capacity.

Overloading puts excessive stress on vehicle
parts, shortening their service life. Also, avoid
loading the vehicle improperly. Improperly
loaded cargo not only is unstable but also may
result in uneven weight distribution which could
damage the cargo deck and frame.

WARNING
• When roping up cargo or covering it with a
trap make sure that neither the rope nor
the end of the trap hang down between the
cab and the cargo deck as a loosely hang-
ing rope or trap could catch fire from the
engine heat.
• Avoid placing wooden boards or the like in
the gap between the cargo deck and
frame; the heat of the exhaust pipe could
set them on fire.
• When spreading the trap take care not to
let it cover or be drawn into the engine air
intake duct.
• When loading heavy cargo take adequate
measures to stop it from slipping. Also
use wire to secure it.
1-14 Recommendation to drivers

CAUTION
If you park your vehicle on a road to load/unload
cargo and more than half of the tail lamps turn
signal lamps and the rear reflectors are hidden
by the moving parts of the rear body (tail gate or
the like) be sure to use a warning triangle or
other appropriate tool recommended by the
local regulation to notice other road users of
your vehicle.

• When either of the front wheels is pressed

against a curbstone or other object and is thus
immovable, do not attempt to turn the steering
wheel by force. By doing so, you could cause
the steering gear to malfunction.
• Do not keep the steering wheel turned fully to
either side for more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause the power steering system to mal-
function.
• Never attempt to tune the engine yourself.
The engine has been optimally tuned before
shipment from the factory. Improper adjustments
not only hurt engine performance, but also
worsen exhaust emissions and increase
exhaust noise.
• The vehicle uses electronic devices that are suf-
ficiently protected against radio wave interfer-
ence. However, you should consult your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if you wish to install radio transmitting
equipment or other strong radio wave generat-
ing devices, since they could adversely affect
the performance of the vehicle’s electronic
equipment.
NOTE:
The power supply of your vehicle is rated 12-volts.
Use a 12-volt radio equipment.
• Do not attempt to install electrical wiring your-
self. Instead, have it done by your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

WARNING
If wiring is improperly installed upon install-
ing some separately purchased electric
device originally installed equipment may
malfunction and could possibly cause a fire
due to overheating of the electrical circuit.

• If a lifting magnet is used to unload cargo, its

magnetism may cause sensors to malfunction. If
the vehicle is to be used in a special environ-
ment, please consult the nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
 1-15

• When installing a roof deck, drag foiler or other

equipment on the cab roof, use the holes pro-
vided in the roof for that purpose. The installed
equipment including the luggage on it must be
less than 50 kg in weight.
The bolts (M8 x 1.25), washers, rubber packings
and other parts used for installing the equipment
must be of the specified material.
After installation, the periphery of the bolts
should be completely sealed with a sealant.
For further information, please contact your
Z01850 nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.
• Do not attempt to modify the vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s performance and functionality could deteri-
orate, and newly fitted parts may not comply
with legal regulations. If you wish to fit any
accessory, please consult the nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

Handling of vehicles equipped with

12-volt and 24-volt power circuits

<Vehicles with a battery equaliser>

If there is a battery equaliser , your vehicle is
equipped with 12-volt and 24-volt circuits. The 12-
volt power supply is used by the equipment in the
cab and the 24-volt power supply by the equipment
to be installed on the vehicle body. Refer to the sec-
Z22224 tion “When a fuse has blown” on page 13-9.

CAUTION
Consult an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer before installing electrical
equipment. If you carry out wiring by yourself to
install commercially available electrical equip-
ment the equipment may malfunction or the
wiring overheat which could cause a fire in the
worst case.

NOTE:
• If the battery has run down, use a vehicle with a
12-volt power source to jump-start the engine.
Do not use a vehicle with a 24-volt power
source. Refer to the section “When the battery
has run down” on page 13-34.
• When replacing the battery, follow the procedure
given in this handbook.
Refer to the section “Battery – check” on page
12-89.
1-16 Recommendation to drivers

Driving in foreign countries

It is important to point out to our valued customers

that different countries throughout the world have
vehicles designed to be more suited to the condi-
tions that exist in a particular country.
If you are concerned in any way, please contact
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distrib-
utor or dealer for information on the country you will
be visiting before your departure.
Local conditions or regulations may change for par-
ticular countries in the following way:
• Local conditions and regulations covering fuels
and lubricants may not be suitable for use in
your vehicle. Damage may occur to your vehicle
if the wrong fuels or lubricants are used.
• Due to local regulations or different driving con-
ditions, modification of your vehicle may be
required in some cases.
• The proper customer service for your particular
vehicle may not be available due to the fact that
the importer may not distribute our entire model
line-up. Therefore, certain parts of your vehicle
may not be available.
Because such situations could inconvenience you,
you should discuss them with your nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer
before your departure to foreign countries.

Environmental protection

Taking-Back of End-of-life Vehicles

At the end of your vehicle’s service life, we will take
back your Canter for environmentally-friendly dis-
posal in accordance with the EU’s directive for End-
of-life Vehicles and any applicable national statutory
provisions.
Of course, there’s a long way to go until then.
In accordance with national legislation, scrapped
vehicles with a permissible maximum weight of up
to 3.5 tons must be taken back. The Canter has
been manufactured in accordance with legal
requirements for component recycling and re-use
for a number of years. A network of take-back cen-
tres and disassembly workshops will ensure that
your vehicle is recycled un an environmentally-
friendly way. Methods for re-using vehicles and
vehicle components are developing and improving
all the time, so much so that the Canter is on sched-
ule to meet the increased recycling quotas required
by law in the future.
Further information can be obtained at www.mitsu-
bishifuso.com or of from your MITSUBISHI FUSO
dealer.
 2-1

2. Warning labels

Locations in cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Locations outside cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2 Warning labels

• The caution and warning labels show important

information. Be sure to read them before using
the vehicle.
• If any label has peeled making it difficult to read,
is scratched or otherwise damaged, or has
peeled off completely, please inform an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
The warning and caution labels apply only to the
vehicle itself, not to any equipment mounted on
the vehicle. For information on caution and
warning labels that apply to equipment mounted
on the vehicle, please refer to the owner’s hand-
book supplied by the manufacturer of the equip-
ment.
• The locations of these labels and the informa-
tion on them may vary with the vehicle model.
Check the information on each label on your
vehicle.
 2-3

Locations in cab

1 Around the driver’s seat

 

Location Category Information Ref. page

WARNING Handling of driver’s seat SRS air bag* 4-10
WARNING Handling of DPF system with regeneration control 5-54, 5-63
CAUTION Handling of idling stop & start (ISS) system 5-13
CAUTION Handling of AdBlue® * 1-6
WARNING Handling of assistant driver’s seat SRS air bag 4-10
Speed limit by speed limitation device
CAUTION 5-54
<Vehicles with a speed limitation device>
WARNING Handling of DPF indicator lamp 5-54, 5-63
WARNING Inspection of engine oil level 12-22
WARNING Use of specified fuse 13-9
CAUTION Handling of assistant driver’s seat SRS air bag 4-10
How to drive on downhill roads
WARNING <Vehicles with GVW over 7,500 kg> 7-8

*: Although these labels are always affixed in the indicated locations, the corresponding equipment may
not be installed according to the specifications of your vehicle.
2-4 Warning labels

2 Door

>

Location Category Information Ref. page

CAUTION Handling of PTO 8-2
® DUONIC®
WARNING Handling of DUONIC <Vehicles with a system> 5-21
CAUTION Handling of 4WD system <FG> 8-5
CAUTION Handling of selector switch for high - low gear <FG> 8-5
Handling of vehicles equipped with 12-volt and
CAUTION 24-volt power circuits 1-15
<Vehicles with a battery equaliser>
 2-5

3 Driver’s door pillar rear of assistant

driver’s seat and rear seat

'VI[GEFQSHIPW&IPS[FSXXSQWIEX"

>

Location Category Information Ref. page

Standard value Tyre pressure 12-69
WARNING Handling of limited slip differential 12-77
WARNING Handling of jack 12-72
CAUTION Handling of rear air conditioner 4-5
2-6 Warning labels

Locations outside cab

1 On the frame and exterior equipment

>

Location Category Information Ref. page

CAUTION Use of diesel fuel 1-4
CAUTION Fuel tank capacity 6-4
CAUTION Handling of fuel filter 12-41
Prohibition against standing on urea tank
CAUTION 1-6
<Vehicles with a BlueTec® system>
CAUTION Handling of AdBlue® <Vehicles with a BlueTec® system> 1-6
Oil to use for LSD (limited slip differential)
CAUTION <Vehicles with an LSD> 12-31

DANGER Handling of battery 12-89

Handling of vehicles equipped with 12-volt and
CAUTION 24-volt power circuits 1-15
<Vehicles with a battery equaliser>
WARNING Use of specified fuse 13-9
 2-7

2 On the cab exterior and engine

>

Location Category Information Ref. page

Handling of cab tilt function
WARNING <Vehicles except Crew-cab models> 12-8

WARNING Handling of pressure cap 12-58

CAUTION Inspection and replacement of engine oil 12-22
Oil to use for clutch and transmission
CAUTION 12-27
<Vehicles with a DUONIC® system>
 3-1

3. Opening and closing

Starter key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Engine immobiliser (theft prevention device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Entering and leaving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Door window glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-2 Opening and closing

Starter key

• Two identical starter keys are provided.

You can use either of these starter keys for lock-
ing/unlocking the doors and starting/stopping
the engine.
• Please make a note of the starter key number
Z20927
.
You can purchase more starter keys if you
inform an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer of this number.
 3-3

Engine immobiliser
(theft prevention device)

1 Engine immobiliser
• The engine immobiliser is a theft prevention
device. It prevents the engine from being started
unless an engine immobiliser starter key that
has been registered to it is used.
• The engine immobiliser automatically starts
operating as soon as the starter switch is turned
to the “ACC” or “LOCK”. Once the engine immo-
biliser is activated, it prevents the engine from
being started.
Z21327 • The engine immobiliser starter key sends a sig-
nal to the vehicle, thereby canceling the engine
immobiliser such that the engine can be started.
NOTE:
In the circumstances detailed below, it is possible
that the vehicle cannot receive a signal from the
immobiliser starter key, meaning that the engine
cannot be started, even if the starter switch is
turned to the “START” position. If this happens,
remove any keys and other metallic objects that are
touching the immobiliser starter key, return the
starter switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and
try starting the engine again.
If you still cannot start the engine, have the vehicle
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.

• A metallic ring is on top of the handle of the

engine immobiliser starter key.

Z20929

• The handle of the engine immobiliser starter key

is in contact with a metallic part of another key.

Z20930
3-4 Opening and closing

• The engine immobiliser starter key is placed on

top of or near to another vehicle’s engine immo-
biliser starter key.
• A key holder that emits radio waves or the
remote control switch of the keyless entry sys-
tem is placed on top of or near the engine immo-
biliser starter key.
• A card with an embedded IC chip or a mobile
phone is held together with the engine immobil-
iser starter key.
Z20931

The engine immobiliser starter key is an electronic

device containing a signal transmitter. Bear in mind
the following cautions:
• Do not bend the engine immobiliser starter key
or subject it to strong shocks.
• Do not leave the engine immobiliser starter key
in any part of the cab where it could be exposed
to direct sunlight and get extremely hot (60 C or
higher).
• Do not store the engine immobiliser starter key
near a magnet or any other source of magne-
tism.
• Do not disassemble or modify the engine immo-
biliser starter key.
• Keep magnetic keyrings and other magnetic
items away from the engine immobiliser starter
key.
• Do not place the engine immobiliser starter key
near an audio player, personal computer, televi-
sion set, or other device that is a source of mag-
netism.
• Do not clean the engine immobiliser starter key
using an ultrasonic cleaner.
In the event that you lose an engine immobiliser
starter key or wish to have a new one made, contact
an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer. (A maximum of six engine immobiliser
starter keys can be registered with a single vehicle.)
You will need to take to the authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer all the engine immobil-
iser starter keys that you have at the time. When
registering new engine immobiliser starter keys,
please note the following:
• When having the registration of a starter key
deleted by an authorised dealer, also take to the
dealer all the starter keys for which you do not
wish to delete the registration.
• If you lose all of the starter key(s), additional
registration or registration deletion of engine
immobiliser starter keys is not possible; you
must purchase a new immobiliser control unit
and a new starter key.
 3-5

Doors

WARNING
• To help prevent accidents always check
for vehicles and pedestrians approaching
from behind before opening the doors.
• Driving with a door ajar can be very dan-
gerous. Make sure the doors are com-
pletely closed before starting.
• Exercise caution when opening a door in
strong wind. Otherwise the wind could
catch the door and suddenly blow it open.
• Exercise caution when opening a door on
a downward slope. Otherwise the inclina-
tion of the vehicle could cause the door to
suddenly fall open.
• When leaving the vehicle take with you
any child who was riding in the cab. Never
leave a child in the cab. A child left in the
cab could interfere with the vehicle caus-
ing it to move or catch fire. Also the cab
gets extremely hot in sunshine and in hot
weather; therefore a child left in the cab
could suffer heatstroke.
• When closing a door be careful not to trap
your hand or anything else.

CAUTION
• Do not swing on any of the doors. Doing so
could break the door.
• Avoid applying undue force to a door when
opening or closing it otherwise the door
could be damaged.
3-6 Opening and closing

1 From the outside

• To open, pull the outer handle toward you.
• Use the starter key to lock or unlock the door.
• It is possible to lock each door without using the
starter key. With the driver’s door or assistant
driver’s door, push the lock knob toward the
front of the vehicle, then pull the outer handle
and keep it pulled as you close the door. With a
rear door, push the lock knob down then pull
the outer handle and keep it pulled as you close
Z21328 the door.

NOTE:
• Locking or unlocking the driver’s door using the
starter key or lock knob also causes the assis-
tant driver’s door and rear doors (Crew-cab
models) to automatically lock or unlock.
• When you leave your vehicle, be sure to remove
the starter key from the starter switch to prevent
theft.
• Be careful not to lock the doors with the starter
key inside the vehicle.

<Rear doors: Crew-cab models>

Z10731

2 From the inside

• To close, use the door waist bar . Close the
door completely.
• To lock the driver’s door or assistant driver’s
door, push the lock knob toward the front of
the vehicle. To lock a rear door, push the lock
knob down.
• To unlock and open the driver’s door or assist-
ant driver’s door, push the lock knob toward the
rear of the vehicle then pull the inner handle .
To unlock and open a rear door, pull up the lock
<Rear doors: Crew-cab models> knob, then pull the inner handle .

CAUTION
Closing the door by pulling any part other than
the door waist bar could damage the door
mechanism.

Z10732
 3-7

Keyless entry system

1 Declaration of Conformity in wireless transmitter (remote control switch) and wireless

receiver

U-SHIN Ltd. hereby declares that this transmitter, model/type Tx:H7080, and receiver, model/type Rx:H7077,
comply with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
3-8 Opening and closing

2 Keyless entry system

The keyless entry system allows you to lock/unlock
the doors of the driver’s seat, passenger’s seat and
the rear seats (double cab models) by operating the
remote-control switch .

WARNING
If you carry the keyless entry remote control
switch with you when traveling on an air-
Z21332 plane avoid pressing any button on the
switch. If you keep the switch in a suit pocket
or somewhere like a bag prevent the switch
buttons from being accidentally pressed
since the radio-wave signals emitted from the
switch could interfere with normal operation
of the airplane.

CAUTION
• Do not expose the remote control switch to
water disassemble it or apply shock by
dropping it.
• Do not leave the remote control switch in a
place that is exposed to direct sunlight or
where the temperature rises to 60 C or
above. Doing so will shorten the life or cause
failure of the remote control switch.
• Do not remove the cover from the remote
control switch unless you replace the bat-
tery. Removing it for no reason could lead to
a remote control switch malfunction.
3 How to operate the remote control
switch
• Point the remote control switch toward the cen-
tre of the cabin.
• Operate the remote control switch within 3 m
from the centre of the cabin.
• Press the button to lock the doors.
• Press the button to unlock the doors.
• When you press the buttons, be sure to press
them for at least one second. If a button does
not work after one press, press the button again
after one or two seconds.
• After locking the doors with the remote control
switch, always check that the doors are locked
by lifting the outside handle of a door.
• You can check the locking/unlocking of the
doors by the flashing of the emergency lamp
and the room lamp. Leave the switch of the
room lamp “ ”.
When the doors are locked, the room lamp and
the emergency lamp flash twice.
When the doors are unlocked, the emergency
lamp flashes once and the room lamp lights up
for about 10 seconds.
• The remote control switch does not work under
the following conditions:
Z11389 • A door is open or incompletely closed.
• When the starter key is in the starter switch.
 3-9

NOTE:
• The range in which you can operate the remote
control varies somewhat depending on the sur-
roundings, such as proximity to a TV antenna,
power station, broadcasting station, etc.
• If you do not open a door within 30 seconds
after unlocking with the remote control switch,
the doors will automatically be locked again.
• If you lose the remote control switch or the
switch does not work, please contact an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer to
obtain a spare remote control switch.
• You cannot lock the doors using the lock knob at
the driver’s seat if the starter key is inserted in
the starter switch.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the starter key left
inside the vehicle after locking the door with the
remote control switch. When you leave the vehi-
cle, carry the starter key as well as the remote
control switch with you, otherwise the remaining
key could encourage theft.
• You may order up to one spare remote control
switch. If you need a spare remote control switch,
request it from an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer.

4 Replacing the battery

If the remote control switch does not lock or unlock
the doors upon pressing a button, the battery has
probably run down. Replace it with a new one.

WARNING
• Keep the batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. If a child swallows a battery visit a
doctor immediately.
• Do not disassemble heat or drop the bat-
tery in water. Doing so could cause a fire
or explosion.
3-10 Opening and closing

CAUTION
• Use the designated standard type of battery.
If the battery is replaced with an incorrect
type the battery could explode.
• Attach the battery with the “+” mark facing
upward.
• Do not use a metal tool such as tweezers to
replace the battery. Doing so could cause a
short circuit.
• Dispose of used batteries in accordance with
local regulations. Inconsiderate disposal
could adversely affect the environment. For
disposal wrap the battery with tape vinyl
sheet etc. for insulation so that the battery
cannot contact other metal objects or be
exposed to water.
• Do not expose the inside of the remote con-
trol switch to water and keep it away from
dirt and dust. Otherwise the switch could
fail.

Designated Battery Quantity

Lithium Battery CR2032 1

1. Use a crosshead screwdriver to turn the

screw and remove the cover .

Z20939

2. Place a new battery with the “+” mark facing

upward.
3. Reattach the cover and the screw.
4. Operate the switch and check that the remote
control works.

Z20940
 3-11

Entering and leaving the vehicle

WARNING
• Always use the step to climb into or down
from the vehicle. Never put your foot on
the wheel wheel cover or tyre since it
could easily slip off.
• The step can become slippery in rain or
snow. Firmly hold the grip while climbing
into or down from the vehicle. Holding the
grip is particularly important when snow
has settled and frozen on the step.
• If the soles of your shoes are oily or
greasy you could slip when climbing
down from the vehicle or when operating
the brake or clutch pedal.
Wipe any oil and grease off the soles of
your shoes before entering or leaving the
vehicle.
• Do not hold luggage or other items in your
hands when entering or leaving the vehi-
cle since this can be dangerous.
• Do not jump down from the vehicle. Jump-
ing down from the vehicle could cause you
to fall or sustain an injury.
• Take care when entering or leaving the
vehicle on a slope or in a strong wind
since the door could open or close sud-
denly.
3-12 Opening and closing

*)" *+"

6IEVHSSVW'VI[GEFQSHIPW" 6IEVHSSVWSJ*+'VI[GEFQSHIPW"

>

CAUTION
• Hold onto the grip when entering or leaving
the vehicle. Do not grasp any other part of
the vehicle since it could break.
• When entering or leaving an FG model vehi-
cle do not place your feet or hands on the
overfender . The overfender could suffer
damage. Also the overfender can be danger-
ously slippery.

When climbing into and out of the cab, support your

body by at least three points at a time by firmly grip-
ping the handle and fully placing your feet on the
steps .
 3-13

Door window glass

WARNING
Do not allow a child to put his/her hands or
head out of a window. The child’s head or
hands could hit an object outside the vehicle
and the child could be seriously injured in
the event of hard braking.

1 Window regulator handle

<Rear doors of Crew-cab models>
Turn the window regulator handle to open or
close the window.
Open
Close

Z13211

2 Power window switches

WARNING
• Always make sure that no one has their
head or hands out of the window when
closing it. A body part could be injured if
caught in a closing window.
Never allow a child to open or close the
window.
• Do not allow a child to operate the power
windows. Otherwise the child may acci-
dentally operate the power window switch
and get his/her hands or head trapped.

The power window switches function only when the

starter switch is in the “ON” position.
On the driver’s door, there are two switches: switch
for controlling the driver’s window and switch
for controlling the assistant driver’s window.
Switch for assistant driver’s window
Press the switch to open the window.
Raise the switch to close the window.

CAUTION
Do not keep any door or window open in rainy
weather and be careful not to spill a drink on
any of the window switches. If water or any
other liquid gets on a window switch it can
cause a malfunction.

>
 4-1

4. Seat and steering wheel adjustments

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) – air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-2 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

Seats

WARNING
• Adjusting the seat while the vehicle is in
motion is dangerous as the seat may
move more than you intend. Be sure to
stop the vehicle and set the parking brake
before performing any adjustment of the
seat.
• After you have adjusted the seat gently
move or rock the seat to ensure that it is
locked in the desired position.
• When adjusting the seat keep your hands
away from the bottom of the seat and from
moving parts of the seat. Otherwise you
could suffer an injury by getting your
hands and fingers trapped.
• When adjusting the angle of the seatback
keep your back or hand pressed against it.
Otherwise the seatback could suddenly
return to its foremost position and injure
you by hitting your face or other body
parts.

CAUTION
• Do not try to repair or remove/reinstall the
seat yourself. Have it done by your nearest
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Every time you ride in the vehicle and sit on
the seat check that the seat is firmly locked.
If the seat has play or is otherwise out of
order ask a MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer to inspect it.
• If you find play or any other seat failure or if
your vehicle is involved in an accident for
safety always have the seats inspected and
the affected parts replaced by a MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
• To avoid wear in the seat sliding and reclin-
ing mechanisms get into the habit of operat-
ing the control levers to their full extent.
• Do not place any sharp items or heavy
edged articles on seats to avoid damaging
them.
• The maximum weight of a person who can
sit on the suspension seat is 130 kg. If a per-
son exceeding this weight sits on it the seat
will not only give an uncomfortable ride but
also could break.
• Seat anchorages and locking mechanisms
have to be checked frequently.
• Defective parts have to be repaired or
exchanged immediately.
NOTE:
• For cleaning the seat, use only a slightly damp-
ened cloth without strong solvents.
• Do not let the upholstery cover get wet.
 4-3

1 Driver’s seat
1.1 Correct driving position

WARNING
Adjust the seat and steering wheel in order to
ensure that you assume the correct driving
posture. An incorrect posture while driving
can result in serious accidents. Furthermore
in the case of vehicles equipped with an SRS
> air bag you could be seriously injured by a
deploying air bag if sitting too close to the
steering wheel.

• Before driving the vehicle, adjust the seat with

reference to the following points:
Your back must touch the seatback.
You must be able to see the warning lamps
and meters.
You must be able to reach and firmly press
the pedals.
You must be able to operate the steering
wheel and switches with ease.
You must be able to operate the shift lever
with ease.
You must be able to fasten the seatbelt cor-
rectly.
• Adjust the steering wheel to a position at which
you can operate it comfortably with your arms
slightly bent.
4-4 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

1.2 Making adjustments

• Slide seat forward or backward while holding
slide adjustment lever raised. After making
the adjustment, release the lever and move the
seat back and forth slightly to lock it in position.
• To adjust the angle of the seatback , raise
reclining lever .
The seatback can be swung forward and down,
providing access to the tool stowage space.
• Lower the armrest (optional) to use it. To
adjust the height of the armrest , raise it a little
and turn the armrest wheel .

Up
Down

• Turn the lumber support knob to adjust the

hardness of the hip support area.
• Turn the suspension seat knob (optional) so
the scale indicates your weight (Adjustable
between 50 and 130 kg). You will then enjoy a
comfortable ride and a correct seated position.
Heavier
> Lighter

NOTE:
Unless the seat is adjusted to suit your weight, ride
comfort may deteriorate on certain roads.

Z13378
 4-5

2 Assistant driver’s seat

Assistant driver’s seat
Centre seat

• Pulling the seatback lever allows the seat-

back to be tipped forward. Use this function
when you wish to access the tool stowage
space. After returning the seatback to its original
position, gently rock it to make sure it is locked
in place.
• Adjust the height of the head restraint so that
its centre will support the back of your head.
<Centre seat>

>

3 Rear seat – Crew-cab models

Storage compartments are located under the rear
seat. The rear seat cushion can be folded up for
access to them. When you wish to stow or remove
something from these compartments, release the
clamps at the base of the seat and raise the seat
cushion . To retain the seat cushion, use the sup-
port strap(s) that are attached to the seatback. Fit
the loop at the end of each retaining band over
the corresponding hook on the seat cushion.
There is one support strap on standard cab models,
while there are two straps on wide cab models in
Z12933 which the rear seat is divided into two parts.
After using this storage, return the rear seat to the
original position and lock it by fully fastening the
clamps.

WARNING
The vicinity of the heater unit may be hot.
Be careful not to get burned.

CAUTION
If your vehicle has a rear air conditioner do not
stow anything in the storage compartment that
contains the unit . Any object placed there
could damage the unit. Also any rags or similar
items placed there could cover the unit’s air
inlet and thus reduce the functionality of the air
conditioner.
4-6 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

Seat belts

Before the vehicle is driven, each occupant must

fasten his/her seat belt in accordance with the fol-
lowing instructions and warnings:
Position yourself as far back as possible in your
seat, and sit up straight. Adjust the seat to the
Z10757 correct position.
Make sure the seat belt passes across your
shoulder (not across your neck or arm).
Make sure the seat belt is not twisted.
Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as
possible across your hips.

WARNING
• Be sure that everyone in the cab has fas-
tened their seat belts before driving the
vehicle. Unless you fasten your seat belt
you could be seriously hurt in the event of
hard braking or a collision.
• Never use a single seat belt for more than
one person.
• When fastening your seat belt position
yourself as far back as possible in your
seat and sit up straight. Unless you are
correctly positioned the seat belt may not
be fully effective.
• Do not drive with your seatback tipped
back further than necessary. In the event
of a collision you could move such that
the belt presses against your neck seri-
ously hurting you.
• Position the lap portion of the seat belt
across your hips. Wearing it across the
abdomen is dangerous because it may
apply great pressure in the event of an
accident. Also it is dangerous to position
the shoulder portion of the belt across
your neck. Adjust the seat such that the
shoulder portion of the belt passes across
your shoulder.
• Make sure your seat belt is not twisted
when you fasten it. A twisted portion of a
seat belt is narrower than normal so it can
apply dangerously high pressure to a
small area.
• Replace any seat belt that is cut or frayed
or has a buckle that does not work prop-
erly.
• Replace any seat belt that has been sub-
jected to shock (in a collision for example)
even if it appears normal. If any seat belt is
subjected to any shock however light
have it inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
 4-7

WARNING
• Do not put foreign objects in any seat
belt’s buckle or retractor. Also do not
modify or remove any seat belt. Unless
each seat belt is completely normal it may
not be fully effective in the event of a colli-
sion.
• Expecting mothers and sick people must
wear seat belts correctly in case of a mis-
hap. In the case of an expecting mother
the seat belt could if not worn properly
dig into the abdomen in the event of hard
braking or a collision possibly inflicting
serious injuries on the expecting mother
and unborn child and in the worst possi-
ble case causing death. Even when worn
correctly however a seat belt can apply
great pressure to certain parts of the body
so an expecting mother should consult a
physician before using one.
• An expecting mother should wear her seat
belt in basically the same way as other
people. However she should place the lap
belt as low as possible below the abdo-
men. Also she should position the shoul-
der belt so it passes across her chest
and not across the abdomen.
• Do not allow carriage of children up to
12 years old or up to 1.5m tall.
• Clean dirty seat belts using a neutral
detergent. Do not use benzene gasoline
>
or any other organic solvent and do not
bleach or dye any seat belt. Doing so
could reduce the seat belt’s performance
and prevent the seat belt from being fully
effective.
• It is dangerous to fasten or unfasten your
seat belt while driving since the momen-
tary diversion of your attention could lead
to a serious accident. Be sure to fasten
and unfasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is stationary.
4-8 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

1 Seat belt care

Periodically inspect the webbing, buckles, and
tongues, as well as emergency locking retractor
(ELR) operation.
Replace seat belt if there is any sign of damage.
• Replace seat belts that have undergone shocks
as a result of a collision.
• Keep sharp edged or potentially damaging
objects away from webbing and other parts of
the seat belts.
• Always keep the belts clean and dry. Use a mild
soap and lukewarm water to clean seat belts.
Use of solvents like gasoline and thinner can
greatly weaken the seat belts.
• Never attempt to bleach or dye the seat belts, as
this could weaken them considerably.

2 3-point seat belts with emergency lock-

ing retractor (ELR)

NOTE:
It is not necessary to adjust the length of these seat
belts.
An ELR seat belt extends and retracts automatically
as its wearer moves but locks automatically for pro-
tection in the event of a sudden stop or shock.
The belt’s tightness should be adjusted automati-
cally.
If there is any looseness, lift the belt gently and the
mechanism will take up the slack. With the belt
properly tightened, the risk of it slipping off in a colli-
sion is reduced.

• Fastening
1. Hold tongue and gently extend the belt. If the
belt locks or is difficult to extend, let it retract and
pull it gently again.
2. Taking care that the belt does not become
twisted, insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear a click.
3. Pull on the tongue to confirm that it is locked in.
4. Adjust the belt so it is across your hips and
shoulder.
Z10760

• Unfastening
1. Press the red button to unlock the buckle.
2. The belt automatically retracts when unlocked.
To prevent the tongue causing damage or injury,
hold it while the belt retracts.
 4-9

2.1 Seat belt anchor

<Driver’s seat>

WARNING
The shoulder belt can be dangerous if worn
across the neck. Adjust its position so that it
does not cross over the neck.

Adjust the seat belt anchor upward or downward

Z08772 to ensure that the belt passes across your shoulder.
You will need to keep the lock button pulled while
moving the seat belt anchor downward. When the
seat belt anchor has reached the desired position,
release the lock button and jiggle the seat belt
anchor up and down to make sure it is locked in
place.

3 2-point seat belt

• Fastening
1. Taking care that the belt does not become
twisted, insert the tongue into the buckle
until you hear a click.
2. Pull on the tongue to confirm that it is locked in.
3. Adjust the belt so it is low across your hips.
4. To adjust the belt’s length, hold the tongue at
90 to the belt.
Pull the belt end to shorten the belt or the
Z08774 tongue to lengthen it.
To lengthen
To shorten

WARNING
For maximum protection in the event of an
accident the belt must not be loose. A loose
belt could even aggravate injuries.

• Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle to separate
the tongue and buckle.
4-10 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)

– air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner
system

1 SRS air bag at driver’s seat and assis-

tant driver’s seat
The SRS air bags at the driver’s seat and assistant
driver’s seat reduce the impact on the head of the
driver and assistant driver and complement the seat
belt pre-tensioner system in case of a strong shock
from the front that could seriously injure the driver
and assistant driver when the starter switch is “ON”.
SRS stands for Supplemental Restraint System.

WARNING
• An SRS air bag is not a substitute for a
seat belt. A seat belt must be worn by
every occupant of the vehicle.
If you do not wear your seat belt you may
be thrown forward in the event of a colli-
sion or emergency braking. If the air bag
inflates at the same time the powerful
shock may cause fatal injuries. Be sure to
wear the seat belt for the following rea-
sons:
• The seat belt keeps you properly posi-
tioned when the SRS air bag inflates.
• The seat belt can reduce the risk of
injury in a collision that does not cause
the SRS air bag to inflate.
• The seat belt reduces the risk of your
being thrown from the vehicle.
• Adjust the position of the seat correctly.
Sit upright with your back against the seat-
back.
Do not sit too close to the SRS air bag or
lean toward it. Inflation of the SRS air bag
takes place extremely quickly so it could
fatally injure you if the distance between
you and the air bag is too short.
• After the SRS air bag has inflated its com-
ponents and items in its vicinity will be
hot. Do not touch them or you could be
burned.
• Do not splash water or apply shock to the
computer of the SRS air bag near the
left side of the driver’s feet. Otherwise the
SRS air bag may malfunction or may not
function correctly in a collision and could
cause serious injuries.

Z22127
 4-11

WARNING
• If you find damage or cracks around where
the SRS air bag at driver’s seat and at
assistant driver’s seat is installed
arrange for it to be inspected at an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer. Otherwise you may be injured in a
collision because of incorrect function of
the SRS air bag.
> • Do not replace the steering wheel attach
stickers to the SRS air bag storage area or
put a cover over the SRS air bag deploy-
ment area. Doing so could increase the
risk of serious injuries by preventing nor-
mal operation of the SRS air bag.
• Because the SRS air bag inflates very rap-
idly contact with the SRS air bag could
cause a wound or bruising.

NOTE:
• When the SRS air bag inflates, it will make a
> very loud sound and emit white smoke, but this
is not a fire and will not harm the human body.
However, a person with a weak respiratory sys-
tem or sensitive skin may feel irritation in the
throat or on the skin temporarily. If residue such
as sediment adheres to your body, such as the
eyes and skin, wash it off with water as soon as
possible. A person with sensitive skin may feel
irritation in rare cases.
• The inflated SRS air bag will shrink immediately
and will not obstruct the view.
• The SRS air bag cannot be used again after it
has inflated once. Have the SRS air bag compo-
nents replaced at an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer. Also, if the air bag
did not inflate itself in a collision, have it
inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer.
• The windshield may be broken by shock or by
inflation of the assistant driver’s SRS air bag.

2 SRS air bag at driver’s seat

The SRS air bag at driver’s seat is installed in the
steering wheel.

>
4-12 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

3 SRS air bag at assistant driver’s seat

The assistant driver’s SRS air bag is located in the
instrument panel.
Even when the assistant driver’s seat is not occu-
pied, the assistant driver’s SRS air bag operates at
the same time as the driver’s SRS air bag.

>

WARNING
• Do not place any objects on top of the
instrument panel and do not place an
umbrella etc. against the panel. Also do
not attach any accessories to the wind-
shield. Any such items could inhibit proper
inflation of the assistant driver’s SRS air
bag and inflation of the assistant driver’s
SRS air bag could propel them toward
occupants causing serious injuries.
• Do not allow any person sitting on the
>
assistant driver’s seat to sit on the front
edge of the seat place his/her hands or
feet on the instrument panel or sit with
his/her face or chest near the instrument
panel. Also do not allow any child to stand
in front of the instrument panel or be held
on the lap of a person sitting on the assis-
tant driver’s seat. Otherwise inflation of
the assistant driver’s SRS air bag could
cause life-threatening injuries.
• Do not allow any person sitting on the
assistant driver’s seat to hold a bag or
other item of luggage in his/her arms or
place such an item on his/her lap. Other-
wise inflation of the assistant driver’s SRS
air bag could cause serious injuries.

Z22470
 4-13

4 SRS air bag warning lamp

If the warning lamp comes on, the SRS air bag
is faulty. Have it inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

WARNING
If you continue to drive with a faulty SRS air
bag incorrect functioning of the SRS air bag
could cause serious injuries.
>

5 Operational conditions of SRS air bag at

driver’s seat and assistant driver’s seat
5.1 When the SRS air bag functions
When a strong shock that could seriously injure a
passenger is received from the front of the vehicle
Range of air bag functions
NOTE:
• In some cases the SRS air bag does not func-
tion when the shock of collision is not severe,
Z21582 depending on the situation, even if the vehicle
suffers heavy deformation or damage in the col-
lision.
• As the SRS air bag reduces shock to the head
by supplementing the function of the seat belt, it
will not immediately function in case of a colli-
sion in which the driver is wearing the seat belt
correctly and there is no possibility of serious
injury.

5.2 Cases in which the SRS air bag does not

function
In some cases there will be no large shock to the
passengers even if the front of the vehicle is largely
deformed or damaged by the collision. In such
cases, the deformation and damage to the vehicle
may not correspond to the function of the SRS air
bag.
• When the vehicle collides head-on with a narrow
object, such as a utility pole or tree

Z05516
4-14 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

• When the vehicle collides obliquely at the front

Z05517

• When the vehicle collides with the rear deck of a

vehicle, such as a truck, at the height of the
windshield

Z05655

• When the vehicle collides with a hard object,

such as one made of concrete, at a speed of
about 25 km/h (16 mph) or lower

Z05514

• When the vehicle collides head-on with a parked

vehicle of similar weight at a speed of about 50
km/h (31 mph) or lower
NOTE:
The SRS air bag will deploy at a higher speed if the
vehicle collides with an object that absorbs shock
(such as a vehicle or guard rail that deforms or
moves).

Z08541
 4-15

5.3 When the SRS air bag does not have the
intended effects
In the following cases, the SRS air bag may func-
tion, but will not protect passengers even when it
inflates:

• When the vehicle is struck from the rear

Z05518

• When the vehicle rolls or turns over

Z05520

• When the vehicle is struck from the side

Z05519

5.4 Cases in which the SRS air bag functions

The SRS air bag may function if the vehicle
receives a strong shock at the lower part of the
chassis during driving.

• When the vehicle strikes a median strip or curb-

stone

Z05509
4-16 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

• When the vehicle jumps and hits the ground

Z05511

• When the vehicle falls into a deep hole or ditch

Z05510

6 Notes on handling

WARNING
• Consult an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer before servicing or
modifying the following sections. Faulty
service or modification may cause incor-
rect functioning of the SRS air bag result-
ing in serious injuries.
• Service around the steering wheel
• Service of the instrument panel
• Service around the lower panel in front
of the assistant driver’s seat
• Installation of audio equipment
• Repair or modification around the
front of the vehicle
• Repair or modification of the suspen-
sion
• When scrapping the vehicle please con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer. Otherwise the SRS air
bag may unexpectedly function and
cause injuries.
• Do not diagnose the circuit of the SRS air
bag with an electrical tester. It may cause
the SRS air bag to malfunction.
• Do not strike or apply undue force to the
steering wheel pad or any other item in
the SRS airbag storage area. Doing so
could increase the risk of cause serious
injuries by preventing normal operation of
the SRS airbag.
 4-17

NOTE:
If you sell the vehicle, please explain that the vehi-
cle is equipped with an SRS air bag and ensure the
instructions are provided with the vehicle.

7 Seat belt pre-tensioner system

• The driver’s seat belt and assistant driver’s seat
belt in a vehicle that has SRS air bags each
have a pre-tensioner that instantaneously tight-
ens the belt in the event of a strong frontal
impact.
• By securely restraining the driver and assistant
driver, the pre-tensioners boost the effective-
ness of the seat belts and SRS air bags.

>
WARNING
• Observe the following to ensure the seat
belt pre-tensioner system is fully effec-
tive.
Wear the seat belt correctly.
Adjust the seat belt to the proper position.
• Do not attach remove or disassemble the
seat belt pre-tensioner system. If the seat
belt pre-tensioner system requires repair
please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer. Handling with-
out care may cause the seat belt pre-ten-
sioner system to malfunction resulting in
injuries.
• When scrapping the vehicle please con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer. Otherwise the seat belt
pre-tensioner system may malfunction
unexpectedly resulting in injuries.

NOTE:
The seat belt pre-tensioner system cannot be used
again if it has functioned once. Have it replaced at
an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
4-18 Seat and steering wheel adjustments

Steering wheel

WARNING
• After every adjustment try to move the
steering wheel back and forth to make
sure that it is securely locked. Unless the
lever returns to its original position the
steering wheel may move while the vehicle
is in motion and cause an accident.
• Make adjustments with the vehicle station-
ary. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving is dangerous since it could detract
from your concentration or cause the
steering wheel to move more than desired.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to the preferred

height and tilted forward/backward. Adjust the
steering wheel and the seat to the best positions for
easy safe driving.
• Pull the lock lever then adjust the steering
wheel to the height and angle that are most
comfortable for you.
• Push the lock lever back in to securely retain the
steering wheel.
Adjust
Retain

Z21339
 5-1

5. Switches and controls

Arrangement of switches and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Idling stop and start (ISS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Gearshift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
DUONIC® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Hazard warning lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Front fog lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Rear fog lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Headlamp leveling switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Rearview mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Mirror heater switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Speed limitation devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Regeneration controlling DPF system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
BlueTec® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5-2 Switches and controls

0,(" Arrangement of switches and con-

trols

Starter switch
Accelerator pedal
Brake pedal
Clutch pedal
Gearshift lever
Parking brake lever
Hazard warning lamp switch
Combination switch
(wiper and washer switch, exhaust brake switch)
Combination switch
(lighting switch, passing/dimmer switch, turn sig-
nal switch)
(932-'’ZILMGPIW" ECO mode switch
<Vehicles with a DUONIC ® system>
HIGH-LOW selector switch
<FG models> P. 8-5
Front drive switch <FG models> P. 8-5
Cruise control main switch
= <Vehicles with a cruise control>
Front fog lamp switch
<Vehicles with a front fog lamp>
Rear fog lamp switch
PTO switch <Vehicles with a PTO>
P. 8-2
ESP® cutoff switch <Vehicles with an ESP®>
P. 8-12
DPF cleaning switch
Mirror heater switch <option>
ISS cutoff switch
Headlamp leveling switch
Cruise control SET/RESUME switch
<Vehicles with a cruise control>
Lane departure warning system cutoff switch
P. 8-17

6,("

(932-'’ZILMGPIW"

=
 5-3

Starter switch

1 Starter switch position

WARNING
Never turn the starter switch to any position
other than the “ON” position while driving
the vehicle. Turning the starter switch to the
“ACC” position would be dangerous because
the engine would stop and the following
problems would occur:
• The braking force reduces extremely.
• The power steering system would stop
working so the steering action would
become extremely heavy.
• The fuel injection system suffer a failure.
• The electric circuits for the warning lamps
and meters would stop working and elec-
tric parts could fail.
When the starter key is removed from the
starter switch the steering wheel locks mak-
ing steering impossible.

CAUTION
• Do not turn the starter switch to the “START”
position while the engine is running. Doing
so could damage the starter.
• The starter key cannot be turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK” position
unless it is pressed in. Do not attempt to turn
it by force. Keep the key pressed in while
turning it from the “ACC” position to the
“LOCK” position.
• Get into the habit of always removing the
starter key after stopping the engine. Leav-
ing the key in the “LOCK” “ON” or “ACC”
position for a long period could run down
the battery making the engine impossible to
start.
• Avoid using the “ON” or “ACC” position for
long periods; for example for listening to
the optional radio as the battery could be
completely discharged.
5-4 Switches and controls

• LOCK
The starter key can be inserted and removed
in this position only. To place the key in the
“LOCK” position, turn it to the “ACC” position
then press it in. Keep it pressed in while turning
it to the “LOCK” position. When the key is
removed, the steering wheel locks.
The lighting switch, hazard warning lamps, inte-
rior lamp, horn, central door locks and turn sig-
nal lamps can be used.
• ACC
The engine is made to stop or is not running in
this position.
The optional radio and cigarette lighter can be
used.
• ON
The engine is running in this position.
All electrical circuits are operable.
• START
The engine is turned over and started in this
position.
Once the engine is running, release the key and
Z21965
the switch will automatically return to the “ON”
position.
NOTE:
• Turn the key only after inserting it fully in the
starter switch.
• If you are unable to turn the key, gently turn the
steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise
as you turn the key.

2 Starter key reminder alarm

A buzzer sounds if you open the door with the
engine shut down and the key left in the starter
switch. Remove the starter key from the switch and
keep it with you whenever leaving the vehicle.
 5-5

Starting the engine

WARNING
• Do not start or warm up the engine in a
garage or other closed area. When starting
the engine or entering or leaving a garage
do not run the engine for longer than is
necessary as the accumulation of exhaust
gas in closed areas is very dangerous.
Exhaust emissions contain carbon monox-
ide (CO) which if breathed can cause
unconsciousness or death.
• If you smell exhaust gases inside the cab
inspect the exhaust pipe and check
Z12784 whether exhaust gases are leaking
through holes or cracks caused by corro-
sion or damage. If exhaust gases are leak-
ing have the exhaust pipe inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor
or dealer.
If exhaust gases that have leaked from the
exhaust pipe come into the cab ventilate
the cab with fresh air by opening the win-
dows fully or by opening the doors.
• Make sure that there are no flammables
under or in the rear of the parked vehicle
especially close to the exhaust pipe. A fire
could be started by the heat from the
engine or exhaust pipe.
• When you start the engine be sure to sit in
the correct position on the driver’s seat to
wait for the engine to warm up. If you are
leaning out of the door window or other-
wise incorrectly seated and the vehicle
suddenly moves a serious accident could
occur.
• Never attempt to push-start the engine.
Doing so will make braking sluggish and
steering actions extremely heavy which
could lead to a serious accident. On vehi-
cles with a DUONIC® system it is impossi-
ble to push-start the engine and attempting
to do so could damage the transmission.
• On vehicles with a DUONIC ® system the
engine can be started when the gearshift
lever is in the “P” or “N” position. How-
ever for safety you should start the engine
with the lever in the “P” position. Avoid
starting the engine with the lever in the
“N” position except in an emergency such
as when the engine has stopped on a rail-
road crossing.
5-6 Switches and controls

NOTE:
• After the engine has started, let it warm up for 1
to 2 minutes.
• Do not continue operating the starter for more
than 15 seconds, as this could damage it or dis-
charge the battery.
• If you operate the starter continuously for 10
seconds and the engine still does not start, turn
the starter switch to the “ACC” position and wait
about 30 seconds for the battery to recover
before performing the starting procedure again.
• Do not repeatedly operate the starter with only
short gaps between operations. If you need to
operate the starter two or more times to start the
engine, wait at least three seconds between
operations. Otherwise, you may damage the
engine and starter and/or cause them to work
poorly.
• On a vehicle that has not been operated for a
week or more, or after replacement of engine oil
or engine oil filter element, be sure to crank the
engine before starting it. P. 5-7
• In a cold region, using a high-capacity battery
improves engine startability.

1 Pre-starting steps
1. Pull parking brake lever to fully apply the parking
brake.
2. Manual transmission vehicles:
Place gearshift lever in the neutral position.
Vehicles with a DUONIC ® system:
Place the gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
3. Depress the brake pedal fully.

 CAUTION
For safety keep the brake pedal depressed until
the engine has started.

2 Starting procedure
For the method of starting the engine on a vehicle
with a DUONIC ® system, refer to the following
page. P. 5-25
1. Turn the starter switch to the “ON” position.

Z21163
 5-7

2. Check whether the indicator lamp illumi-

nates or not.

Z21164

• If the indicator lamp does not illuminate,

hold down the brake pedal (on a vehicle with a
DUONIC® system) or the clutch pedal (on a
manual transmission vehicle), and turn the
starter switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.

Z21165

• If the indicator lamp illuminates, wait until it

goes off. After the lamp has gone off, hold down
the brake pedal (on a vehicle with a DUONIC®
system) or the clutch pedal (on a manual trans-
mission vehicle), and turn the starter switch to
the “START” position to start the engine.
NOTE:
If the engine is difficult to start after the indicator
lamp has gone out, there may be a problem with the
engine preheating system. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.

3. Release the starter switch when the engine has

started.
If you are not going to start the vehicle immedi-
ately, release the pedal.
4. After the engine has started, let it warm up for 1
to 2 minutes. P. 5-9

Engine idling speed

650 rpm

NOTE:
In cold months, the engine may operate at an idling
speed higher than usual just after its start. The
engine speed, however, will drop to a normal speed
as the coolant warms up.

3 Starting the engine when vehicle has

been parked over an extended period
When the vehicle is not used for a week or more or
the engine oil and oil filter are replaced, the engine
becomes starved of oil. Before the engine is started,
5-8 Switches and controls

therefore, it must be cranked in accordance with the

following procedure to distribute oil to its various
components.

CAUTION
• To ensure maximum safety be sure to fully
apply the parking brake and block the
wheels with chocks.
• Performing the cranking is of essential
importance in terms of protecting the turbo-
charger.

1. Pull the parking brake lever to fully apply the

parking brake.
2. Manual transmission vehicles:
Place gearshift lever in the neutral position.
Vehicles with a DUONIC ® system:
Place the gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
3. Start the engine in the normal way, but you do
not have to wait until the indicator lamp
goes out.
4. Without pressing the accelerator pedal, place
the starter switch in the “START” position and
crank the engine for roughly 15 seconds.
If the engine starts, release the starter key and
refrain from pressing the accelerator pedal for
roughly 15 seconds.

4 Starting the engine with the cab tilted

When you need to start the engine with the cab
tilted for inspection or servicing purposes, be sure
to observe the following safety precautions:
• Set the parking brake firmly and chock the
wheels.
• Make sure that the gearshift lever is in the neu-
tral position (on a manual transmission vehicle)
or that the gearshift lever is in the “P” position
and the gear position indicator is showing “P”
(on a vehicle with a DUONIC ® system).
• Make sure nobody is near the engine compart-
ment, then place the starter switch in the
“START” position to start the engine.

 5-9

Warming up the engine

Let the engine warm up for 1 to 2 minutes before

starting the vehicle.

WARNING
• Do not warm up the engine in a garage or
other closed area. When starting the
engine or entering or leaving a garage do
not run the engine for longer than is nec-
essary as the accumulation of exhaust
gas in closed areas is very dangerous.
Exhaust emissions contain carbon monox-
ide (CO) which if breathed can cause
unconsciousness or death.
• If you smell exhaust gases inside the cab
inspect the exhaust pipe and check
Z12784 whether exhaust gases are leaking
through holes or cracks caused by corro-
sion or damage. If exhaust gases are leak-
ing have the exhaust pipe inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor
or dealer.
If exhaust gases that have leaked from the
exhaust pipe come into the cab ventilate
the cab with fresh air by opening the win-
dows fully or by opening the doors.
• Make sure that there are no flammables
under or in the rear of the parked vehicle
especially close to the exhaust pipe. A fire
could be started by the heat from the
engine or exhaust pipe.

CAUTION
If you do not allow the engine to warm up ade-
quately you may encounter the following or
other problems.
• If driving is started or the engine is raced
cylinders and pistons may wear severely
which may lead to an engine breakdown
because the oil has not yet distributed suffi-
ciently throughout the engine.
• The turbocharger may fail because it will
start rotating at a high speed before suffi-
cient oil reaches the turbocharger shaft.
• On vehicles with a DUONIC® system it may
take time to shift gears if you do not allow
the engine to warm up sufficiently.
5-10 Switches and controls

NOTE:
• Idling the engine for long time wastes fuel, and
is therefore detrimental to environmental protec-
tion and resource conservation. So shut down
the engine whenever you leave the vehicle,
even for a short period.
If you start to drive immediately after starting the
engine (while the engine is still cold), you will
encounter the following problems:
• In a cold region, the extreme coldness of the
engine will cause poor ignition of fuel, mak-
ing the engine prone to knocking.
• You may encounter any or all of the following
conditions. They are due to the actions particu-
lar to oxidation catalysts in the muffler, and do
not indicate any abnormalities.
• White smoke from the exhaust pipe when
setting the vehicle in motion after idling the
engine for a relatively long-time or when
accelerating the vehicle.
• White smoke from the exhaust pipe when
the vehicle starts off immediately after the
engine is started.
• The exhaust smells irritating (with a vinegar-
like odor).
• In cold months, the engine may operate at an
idling speed higher than usual just after its start.
The engine speed, however, will drop to a nor-
mal speed as the coolant warms up.

1. Let the engine warm up for 1 to 2 minutes.

2. The engine idling speed will drop to a normal
speed as the coolant warms up.

Engine idling speed

650 rpm
 5-11

Stopping the engine

WARNING
• Never allow the vehicle to coast with the
engine stopped as braking may be dan-
gerously sluggish and extremely difficult
steering may result. This may also cause a
failure of the fuel injection system.
• The engine and exhaust pipe are
extremely hot just after stopping the vehi-
cle. Avoid parking the vehicle where there
are flammables such as dry grass.
• Do not stop the engine for parking with the
steering wheel fully turned to either direc-
tion. This will cause the power steering
system pressure to drop thus causing the
steering wheel to return rapidly possibly
injuring you.
• Do not park on a slope. A vehicle parked
on a slope can move uncontrollably and
cause an accident.
If it is unavoidable to park the vehicle on a
slope do the following: Firmly apply the
parking brake place the gearshift lever in
the “P” position (vehicles with a DUONIC®
system) chock the wheels and turn the
steering wheel toward an obstruction (like
a curb stone) for increased safety in case
the vehicle moves.
• With vehicles with a DUONIC® system do
not park the vehicle only with the gearshift
lever placed in the “P” position; always
firmly engage the parking brake. If you
park the vehicle on a steep slope only by
placing the gearshift lever in the “P” posi-
tion without also engaging the parking
brake the gearshift lever will become
extremely difficult to move or in the worst
case it may be impossible to release the
transmission from the locked state. If this
happens shift the gearshift lever into the
“N” position and then after making sure
the gear position indicator shows “N”
move the lever to the “D” position.

CAUTION
• If you stop the engine immediately after
uphill or high-speed driving the oil supplied
to the rotor shaft of the turbocharger will rise
to an abnormally high temperature and the
rotor shafts could seize up. To avoid this run
the engine at idle for at least 3 minutes
instead of stopping it immediately.
• The engine should only be stopped from an
idle state. Stopping it at a high RPM could
result in engine malfunction.
5-12 Switches and controls

1. Hold down the brake pedal and apply the park-

ing brake.
2. Manual transmission vehicles:
Place gearshift lever in the neutral position.
Vehicles with a DUONIC ® system:
Place the gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
Confirm that “P” is shown on the gear position
indicator.

3. Allow the engine to idle for more than 3 minutes

before stopping it.
When the vehicle is in motion, engine parts
become extremely hot. This is particularly true
during uphill or high-speed driving. Therefore,
let the engine cool down sufficiently by allowing
it to idle for a time before stopping it.

Z16069

4. Turn the starter switch to the “ACC” position to

stop the engine.

Z21168
 5-13

Idling stop and start (ISS) system

The idling stop and start (ISS) system is intended to

improve fuel consumption and reduce exhaust
emissions by automatically stopping the engine
when the vehicle is stopped and automatically start-
ing the engine when the vehicle is started.

WARNING
Do not coast down a hill with the engine
stopped automatically. Doing so will make
steering actions heavy and braking
extremely sluggish which could lead to a
serious accident.

CAUTION
• Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed
while the engine has been automatically
stopped. Otherwise the vehicle could start
moving causing an unexpected accident.
• When leaving the driver’s seat place the
starter switch in the “LOCK” position and
securely apply the parking brake. Otherwise
the vehicle may start moving causing an
unexpected accident.
• In places where a strong magnetic field
exists such as near a magnet crane press
the ISS cutoff switch to disable the ISS func-
tions. Otherwise the system may malfunc-
tion causing an unexpected accident.
• When inspecting the vehicle press the ISS
cutoff switch to disable the ISS functions. If
the system malfunctions during the inspec-
tion an unexpected accident may result.

NOTE:
• If the engine is going to be stopped for a long
time, be sure to place the starter switch to the
“LOCK” position to prevent the deterioration of
battery performance.
• ISS stands for idling start and stop.
5-14 Switches and controls

1 Controls and indicators

0,(" ISS cutoff switch

Used to disable the ISS functions.
indicator lamp
This lamp flashes or illuminates when the ISS is
operating. If the lamp remains lit, there is a prob-
lem in the ISS.
The indicator lamp flashes or illuminates
depending on the state of ISS operation, as
shown below:

> Operation state indicator lamp

Preparing for automatic Fast flashing
6,(" engine stop (0.5-second interval)
Automatic engine stop in Slow flashing
progress (2-second interval)
• Automatic engine start
is cancelled. (Door is
opened during auto- Illuminated
matic engine stop.)
• ISS failure

>
2 Operation of the ISS system
2.1 Conditions under which the ISS does not
work
• The ISS cutoff switch is pressed to disable the
ISS functions.
• PTO is being used <Vehicles with PTO>.
• The battery is insufficiently charged.
• The coolant temperature indicator shows the 4th
mark or below or the 9th mark or above on the
scale.
• The cab is raised.
• The indicator lamp is illuminated.
• Automatic or parked DPF regeneration is in
operation.
• The driver’s door or assistant driver’s door is
open.
• The turn signal switch is operating or the hazard
warning lamp switch is pressed. <Vehicles with
a DUONIC ® system>
NOTE:
Even if the coolant temperature rises and stabilizes,
ISS may stop temporarily when the engine ECU
measures and processes the air flow volume.

2.2 ISS cutoff switch

If you press the ISS cutoff switch , the ISS func-
tions are disabled. To cancel the ISS cutoff function,
press the switch again.
The indicator lamp on the switch is illuminated
while the ISS functions are disabled.
NOTE:
Even if you have pressed the ISS cutoff switch to
disable the ISS functions, the ISS functions will be
automatically enabled once you place the starter
switch to the “LOCK” position.
>
 5-15

2.3 Vehicles with a DUONIC ® system

• Automatic engine stop

CAUTION
• Do not allow the engine to be automatically
stopped with the vehicle stopped and the
steering wheel fully turned to either direc-
tion. This will cause the power steering sys-
tem pressure to drop thus causing the
steering wheel to return rapidly possibly
injuring you.
• When the engine is automatically stopped
firmly depress the brake pedal and make
sure that the vehicle has properly stopped.
Also on slopes be sure to use the parking
brake to properly stop the vehicle. Insuffi-
cient braking power might cause the vehicle
to move resulting in unexpected accidents.
The ISS functions are enabled once the vehicle
speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 miles).
1. Firmly depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi-
cle.
In a few seconds after the vehicle has stopped,
the indicator lamp will flash rapidly. When it
starts flashing slowly, the engine is automatically
stopped.
2. Keep the brake pedal depressed while the
engine has been automatically stopped.
The indicator lamp flashes slowly (2-sec-
ond interval) while the engine has been auto-
matically stopped.
3. On slopes, be sure to use the parking brake to
properly stop the vehicle.
NOTE:
• If you leave the gear shift lever in the “D” posi-
tion when you stop the vehicle or while the
engine has been automatically stopped, a func-
tion operates to hold the braking power for sev-
eral seconds until creeping phenomenon occurs
even after the brake pedal is released when you
start moving. But because there is no function to
aid starting to move on a slope, be sure to use
the parking brake when you start moving on a
Z21172
slope.
• Braking power is not held when the vehicle is
stopped with the gear shift lever in the “N” posi-
tion, or the gear shift lever is put in the “N” posi-
tion while the engine has been automatically
stopped. On slopes, be sure to use the parking
brake when you start moving.
• The engine will not be automatically stopped if
you open the driver’s door or assistant driver’s
door before the automatic engine stop operation
is completed. Close the door to automatically
stop the engine.
• If the ISS is activated and the engine is stopped
while the headlamps (low beam) or fog lamps
<vehicles with fog lamps> are illuminated, the
headlamps (low beam) or fog lamps <vehicles
with fog lamps> are automatically turned off.
5-16 Switches and controls

When the engine is started automatically, the

lamps will automatically come on.
• After the ISS is activated and the engine is auto-
matically stopped, the air conditioner <vehicles
with an air conditioner> will operate the fan for 1
minute.
If the engine has been automatically stopped for
a long time and you wish to turn on the air condi-
tioner, press the ISS cutoff switch to disable the
ISS functions, then place the gearshift lever in
the “P” position and start the engine using the
starter switch.

• Automatic engine start

1. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed.
2. If the gearshift lever is in the “D” or “N” position,
the engine will start automatically when you
release the brake pedal.

Z21173

If the gearshift lever has been placed in the “N”

or “P” position while the engine has been auto-
matically stopped, the engine will start automati-
cally when you place the lever in the “D” or “R”
position while keeping the brake pedal
depressed.
If the gearshift lever is in the “D” position, the
engine will start automatically when you place
the gearshift lever in the manual mode position
while keeping the brake pedal depressed.
3. On slopes, be sure to use the parking brake
 when you start moving.

NOTE:
• While the engine has been automatically
stopped, a buzzer sounds when the driver’s
door or assistant driver’s door is opened without
applying the parking brake. The buzzer stops if
you apply the parking brake.
• If the system has been deactivated by opening
the driver’s door or assistant driver’s door while
the engine has been automatically stopped,
start the engine with the starter switch after plac-
ing the gearshift lever in the “P” position.

2.4 Manual transmission vehicles

• Automatic engine stop

CAUTION
• Do not allow the engine to be automatically
stopped with the vehicle stopped and the
steering wheel fully turned to either direc-
tion. This will cause the power steering sys-
tem pressure to drop thus causing the
 5-17

steering wheel to return rapidly possibly

injuring you.
• When the engine is automatically stopped
firmly depress the brake pedal and make
sure that the vehicle has properly stopped.
Also on slopes be sure to use the parking
brake to properly stop the vehicle. Insuffi-
cient braking power might cause the vehicle
to move resulting in unexpected accidents.

The ISS functions are enabled once the vehicle

speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 miles).
1. Firmly depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi-
cle, and put the gear shift lever in the neutral
position. Release the clutch pedal. Then, the
indicator lamp will flash rapidly. When it
starts flashing slowly, the engine is automatically
stopped.
2. Keep the brake pedal depressed while the
engine has been automatically stopped. The
indicator lamp flashes slowly (2-second
interval) while the engine has been automati-
cally stopped.
3. On slopes, be sure to use the parking brake to
properly stop the vehicle.

NOTE:
• The engine will not be automatically stopped if
you open the driver’s door or assistant driver’s
door before the automatic engine stop operation
is completed. Close the door to automatically
stop the engine.
• If the ISS is activated and the engine is stopped
while the headlamps (low beam) or fog lamps
are illuminated, the headlamps (low beam) or
> fog lamps <vehicles with fog lamps> are auto-
matically turned off. When the engine is started
automatically, the lamps will automatically come
on.
• After the ISS is activated and the engine is auto-
matically stopped, the air conditioner <vehicles
with an air conditioner> will operate the fan for 1
minute.
If the engine has been automatically stopped for
a long time and you wish to turn on the air condi-
tioner, press the ISS cutoff switch to disable the
ISS functions, then start the engine using the
starter switch.

• Automatic engine start

1. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed.
2. If the gearshift lever is in the neutral position, the
engine will start automatically when you depress
the clutch pedal. At the same time, indica-
tor lamp will go out.
3. If the engine will not restart automatically, keep
the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the gearshift lever is in the neu-
tral position, depress the clutch pedal, then start
the engine with the starter switch.
4. On slopes, be sure to use the parking brake
> when you start moving.
5-18 Switches and controls

NOTE:
• While the engine has been automatically
stopped, a buzzer sounds when the driver’s
door or assistant driver’s door is opened without
applying the parking brake. The buzzer stops if
you apply the parking brake.
• If the system has been deactivated by opening
the driver’s door while the engine has been
automatically stopped, start the engine with the
starter switch after depressing the clutch pedal.
• When the engine has stalled, the engine will not
start automatically by depressing the clutch
pedal. Start the engine using the starter switch
after depressing the clutch pedal.
• If the gearshift lever is moved to any position
other than the neutral position immediately after
depressing the clutch pedal, the engine may not
start automatically. In this case, return the gear-
shift lever to the neutral position, then release
and depress the clutch pedal again.
• If you depress the clutch pedal immediately after
the engine has stopped automatically, there may
be a slight delay in automatic engine start.

Pedals

1 Accelerator pedal

WARNING
If you use a floor mat be sure to use a Mitsu-
bishi Fuso genuine floor mat and lay it cor-
rectly. Do not lay the floor mat over the
accelerator pedal or accelerator pedal stop-
per. Do not lay a floor mat over another floor
mat. Failure to observe these instructions
would be dangerous because the accelerator
Z20978
pedal could be prevented from returning
when released.

Racing the engine also increases fuel consumption.

NOTE:
Depressing the brake pedal while depressing the
accelerator pedal will increase safety, as this dis-
ables the accelerator pedal.

2 Brake pedal

WARNING
Do not allow empty beverage cans or other
objects to get under the brake pedal as they
may hinder the brake pedal operation lead-
ing to an extremely dangerous situation.
Keep the floor clear of empty beverage cans
and other objects.
 5-19

CAUTION
On a vehicle with a DUONIC® system always
depress the brake pedal with your right foot.
Operating the brake with your left foot may slow
your response to an emergency resulting in an
unexpected accident. Depress the accelerator
pedal and brake pedal to confirm their positions
before starting the engine.

• If your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes and

you notice squealing during braking, the disc
brake pads have worn to the limit and must be
replaced. Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
• Use the brake pedal correctly. P. 7-7

3 Clutch pedal
<Manual transmission vehicles>
• Do not operate the vehicle with your foot on the
clutch pedal as doing so can shorten the service
life of the clutch. Driving with your foot on the
clutch pedal could prevent engine braking and
exhaust braking from taking place.
• Press the clutch pedal fully when changing gear.
If you do not press the clutch pedal far enough,
the clutch will slip, possibly damaging the clutch
discs.

4 Foot rest <vehicles with a foot rest>

5-20 Switches and controls

Gearshift lever

<Manual transmission vehicles>

WARNING
Do not keep your hand on the gearshift lever
in the neutral position while applying a for-
ward or backward force to the lever. This is
dangerous as the vehicle could start moving
and cause an accident. In addition it may
damage the transmission. Also note that if
you attach a commercially available exten-
sion to the lever only a gentle force will
move the lever.

CAUTION
• Shifting from a forward gear to the reverse
gear or vice versa should be done only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
When backing up always double check to
make sure that there is nothing in your path.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully whenever
changing gear. If you do not depress the
pedal completely the clutch will slip and the
clutch disc will be damaged which could
lead to an accident.

• The gear pattern is inscribed on the top of the

gear-shift lever. The “ ” marks in the illustration
indicate the neutral position.
• Fully depress the clutch pedal when shifting
gears.
• When the gearshift lever is placed in the reverse
(R) position, the backup lamps light up and the
backup buzzer sounds simultaneously. If your
vehicle is equipped with a backup buzzer at the
rear, it also sounds.
• Observe the following when shifting into
>
reverse.
• The engine must be running at an idling
speed.
• Move the gearshift lever to the reverse (R)
position not immediately but 3 to 5 seconds
after fully depressing the clutch pedal.
• For vehicles with a DUONIC® system, see page
5-21.

NOTE:
For reasons of fuel economy, it is recommended
that when the vehicle is unladen, 2nd gear should
be used to pull away on level surfaces.
 5-21

DUONIC ®

<Vehicles with a DUONIC® system>

The DUONIC® system combines the controls of the
clutch, transmission and engine into a single sys-
tem to achieve automatic clutch engagement/disen-
gagement and gear shifting during start-out and
driving.
The clutch mechanism incorporates two clutch sys-
tems (called a “dual-clutch”), allowing the DUONIC®
system to provide smooth gear shifting with mini-
mum shock.
NOTE:
DUONIC® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

1 What you should know before you can

safely and properly operate your vehicle
1.1 Before starting the engine
Before starting the engine, step on the accelerator
pedal and brake pedal with your right foot to check
and get a feel for their locations.

1.2 Creep
Creep refers to a very slow vehicle movement that
occurs when the gearshift lever is placed in a driv-
ing position and the accelerator pedal is released.
This occurs due to the power transmitted from an
idling engine.

CAUTION
• To prevent creep keep the brake pedal firmly
pressed when moving the gearshift lever to
the “R” or “D” position. Do not release the
parking brake until you have finished the
shift operation.
• Continue depressing the brake pedal fully
while the position indication on the gear
position indicator is still flashing. This is
especially important when starting on an
uphill road. As the gear is not yet engaged
and thus the creep effect is not available
while the display is flashing the vehicle may
move backward if the brake pedal is
released which could cause an accident.

1.3 Brake pedal operation

CAUTION
Get into the habit of always using the right foot
to depress the brake pedal. If you use the left
foot the pedal-pressing action will not be fully
responsive which could lead to an accident
especially in the case of emergency braking.
Before starting the engine step on the accelera-
tor pedal and brake pedal with your right foot to
confirm the locations of these pedals.
5-22 Switches and controls

1.4 Leaving the vehicle with the engine

running
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied, the gearshift lever is in the
“P” position, and the gear position indicator is show-
ing “P”. If you open the door with the engine running
and the gearshift lever in the “D” position, a buzzer
will sound continuously to warn you.
If you place the gearshift lever in the “R” position
with the engine running, the buzzer will sound inter-
mittently.

1.5 Parking
Park the vehicle on a level, flat surface if possible.
When parking the vehicle, do the following:
While keeping the brake pedal depressed, firmly
apply the parking brake and then place the gearshift
lever in the “P” position.
If it is unavoidable to park the vehicle on a slope,
firmly engage the parking brake while keeping the
brake pedal depressed, and then place the gearshift
lever in the “P” position. In addition, chock the
wheels.

1.6 Selecting the “R” (reverse) position

Bring the vehicle to a complete stop before placing
the gearshift lever in the “R” position. The “R” posi-
tion cannot be selected while the vehicle is moving.

1.7 Towing
If it becomes necessary to tow the vehicle, observe
the following. Doing otherwise could damage the
DUONIC ® system. Never attempt to push-start the
engine.
• On FE model vehicle, disconnect the propeller
shaft or get the towing vehicle to raise the rear
wheels before towing the vehicle.
• On FG models vehicle, raise the front wheels
and disconnect the propeller shaft at the rear
before towing the vehicle.

1.8 Driving on a slippery road

WARNING
Use the manual shift mode when driving on
slippery surfaces (such as a wet or frozen
road). Using the automatic shift mode on
slippery roads could cause an accident for
the following reasons:
Skidding is more likely to be caused by auto-
matic shift-downs that take place normally
when driving in the automatic shift mode.
Skidding also may occur easily due to auto-
matic shift-downs following full or quick
operation of the accelerator pedal.
Even while driving using the manual shift
mode the vehicle is likely to skid if you sud-
denly depress the accelerator pedal or
quickly shift down the gear.
 5-23

1.9 Starting on uphill roads

The vehicle may move backward when starting on
an uphill road even though the creep effect helps to
reduce backward movement. If the vehicle seems
likely to move backward, be sure to also use the
parking brake.

2 Controls and indicators

0,("
Gearshift lever
Used to control the operation of the DUONIC® sys-
tem. Move the lever until it completely engages in
each position.
Gear position indicator
Indicates the selected gear of the transmission.
Automatic shift mode indicator
This indication appears while driving in the auto-
matic shift mode.
> ECO mode switch
When this switch is turned on, the economy mode
works to make early up-shifts to improve fuel econ-
6,("
omy.
This switch is usable when driving in the automatic
shift mode.
ECO mode indicator
This indication appears when the economy mode is
activated.
Warnings
If there is a problem with the DUONIC® system, one
of the following warnings appears on the multi-infor-
mation display.
>
• (red)
Indicates that the DUONIC® system is faulty.
• (red)
Indicates that the clutch control fluid or the
clutch temperature is abnormally high.
• (amber)
Indicates that the DUONIC® system is faulty
(but the vehicle may be driven if automatic or
manual gear shifting is possible).
5-24 Switches and controls

3 Gearshift lever
This lever is used to control the operation of the
DUONIC ® system. Move the lever until it completely
engages in each position.

3.1 How to operate the gearshift lever

• To switch from the automatic shift mode to the
manual shift mode, use either of the following
methods with the gearshift lever in the “D” posi-
tion:
• Move the gearshift lever to the “+” or “–”
position.
• Push the gearshift lever into the “A/M” posi-
tion.
The indication “ ” on the multi-information
display disappears when the manual shift mode
is engaged.
• To switch from the manual shift mode back to
%1 the automatic shift mode, push the gearshift
lever into the “A/M” position from the “D” posi-
tion. The automatic shift indicator shows “ ”
when the automatic shift mode is engaged.
• When you release the gearshift lever after mov-
 ing it to the “+”, “–” or “A/M” position, it will return
to the “D” position.
NOTE:
• Unless the engine is started, operating the gear-
shift lever has no effect on the DUONIC® sys-
tem.
• The following gearshift lever movements are
possible only while the brake pedal is
depressed: “P” to “N”; “N” to “P”; and “N” to “R”.

• If the battery runs down, the gearshift lever will

stay locked and cannot be operated even if the
brake pedal is depressed. At this time, if the
gearshift lever is in the “P” position, the vehicle
cannot be moved.
Restore the battery by any of the following meth-
ods:
• Charge the battery.
• Replace the battery. P. 12-92
• Connect the dead battery to the booster bat-
tery of another vehicle with booster cables.
P. 13-34

3.2 Gearshift positions

P: Parking
• Use this position when starting or warming up
the engine of a stopped or parked vehicle.
• The starter key can be removed when the gear-
shift lever is in this position.
• Use this position when using the PTO.
N: Neutral
• No power is transmitted to the wheels.
• Although you can also use this position when
starting the engine, we strongly recommend
using the “P” position for increased safety.
D: Drive
• This is the position for driving.
 5-25

• In the automatic shift mode, gearshifts take

place automatically as shown below in accor-
dance with the vehicle loading and speed.

Gear change scheme

1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE:
The DUONIC® system automatically selects the
starting gear according to the steepness of the
slope and the vehicle loading. It selects 2nd on a
level or downhill road and 1st on an uphill road.
• Moving the gearshift lever from “D” position to
the “A/M”, “+”, or “–” position causes the manual
shift mode to be selected.
A/M: Automatic/manual shift mode
Each time you push the gearshift lever into this
position, the gearshift mode switches between the
automatic shift mode and manual shift mode.
+: Upshift
• Use this position for manual upshifts.
• The gear shifts up by one gear each time you
move the gearshift lever to this position from the
“D” position.
–: Downshift
• Use this position for manual downshifts.
• The gear shifts down by one gear each time you
move the gearshift lever to this position from the
“D” position.
R: Reverse
• Use this position to reverse the vehicle.
• The backup lamps come on and a buzzer
sounds simultaneously when the gearshift lever
is in this position.

4 ECO mode switch

You can use the ECO mode switch only while driv-
ing in the automatic shift mode.
When the ECO mode is turned on using this switch,
the DUONIC® system applies the following control:
• Makes upshifts earlier than when the ECO mode
is off.
• Makes the gear less likely to shift down when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The ECO mode is activated when the “ON” side
Z21535 of this switch is pressed. The multi-informa-
tion display will then indicate “ECO” on the
screen. Press the “OFF” side of the switch to
deselect the ECO mode.
NOTE:
• The ECO mode should be used when the vehi-
cle is zero- to half-loaded and driven on rela-
tively level roads.
• Turn off the ECO mode switch when the vehicle
is fully loaded or is driven on uphill or downhill
roads.

5 When starting the engine

On a vehicle with a DUONIC® system, start the
engine as follows.
5-26 Switches and controls

CAUTION
Always depress the brake pedal with your right
foot. Operating the brake with your left foot may
slow your response to an emergency resulting
in an unexpected accident. Depress the acceler-
ator pedal and brake pedal with your right foot
to confirm their positions before starting the
engine.

1. Confirm the following:

• The parking brake is securely applied.
• The gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal.

CAUTION
For safety keep the brake pedal depressed until
the engine starts.

3. Turn the starter switch to the “ON” position.

4. Check if the indicator lamp illuminates.
If the indicator lamp illuminates, wait until it
goes out.

Z21297

5. Check that the gear position indicator is showing

“P”.

>

6. Turn the starter switch to the “START” position

to start the engine. When the engine has
started, release the brake pedal. P. 5-5
7. Warm up the engine for 1 to 2 minutes before
starting the vehicle. P. 5-9

NOTE:
Warm up the engine sufficiently. If you do not allow
the engine to warm up sufficiently, it may take time
to shift gears.
 5-27

6 Driving tips

WARNING
• When you start the vehicle never operate
the gearshift lever while stepping on the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle will sud-
denly lurch forward and could cause a
serious accident. Be sure to depress the
brake pedal whenever operating the gear-
shift lever while starting the vehicle.
• Never race the engine when the vehicle is
stopped. If the gearshift lever happens to
have been placed in any position other
than “P” or “N” the vehicle will suddenly
lurch and could cause a serious accident.

CAUTION
• Always fully depress the brake pedal when
moving the gearshift lever to the “D” or “R”
position. Otherwise the vehicle will creep
and could cause an accident.
• To start the vehicle on downhill slopes place
the gearshift lever in the “D” position or
select a gear in the manual mode. If you start
the vehicle with the gearshift lever in the “N”
position engine braking does not work
which could cause an unexpected accident.
• If there are steps or other sharp changes in
height on the surface in front of the vehicle
depress the accelerator pedal carefully when
starting the vehicle. Recklessly stepping on
the accelerator pedal is dangerous as the
vehicle could move unexpectedly quickly.
• Do not pump the accelerator pedal when
starting the vehicle as this will increase the
chance of damaging the transmission.
• When starting the vehicle especially on a
slope do not use a forward gear if the vehi-
cle is moving backward or do not place the
gearshift lever in the “R” position if the vehi-
cle is moving forward. Such actions will
increase the chance of damaging the trans-
mission.
• On an uphill road avoid stopping the vehicle
by only using the accelerator pedal. Other-
wise a slipping or broken clutch may result.
Be sure to stop the vehicle using the brake
pedal on an uphill road.
• Do not operate the accelerator pedal when
the gearshift lever is in the “D” or “R” posi-
tion and the service brakes or parking brake
are applied. Failure to follow this instruction
will damage the transmission.
• Do not move the vehicle very slowly repeat-
edly to drive over a high step or curb. Other-
wise a slipping or broken clutch may result.
5-28 Switches and controls

6.1 Starting
• Automatic shift mode
1. While keeping the brake pedal fully depressed,
place the gearshift lever into the “D” position.



2. Check that the multi-information display is show-

ing “ ” and that the gear position indicator is
showing “1” or “2”.

Z21300
NOTE:
• The DUONIC® system selects the starting gear
automatically according to the steepness of the
slope and the vehicle loading. It selects 2nd on
a level or downhill road and 1st on an uphill
road.
• Start the vehicle only when the gear position
indicator indicates “1” or “2”. On a vehicle with
an ABS, when starting after the ABS has been
activated, the system may take longer than
usual to engage the starting gear.
• The starting gear engagement is still in progress
while the indication on the gear position indica-
tor is flashing. Do not release the brake pedal at
this time.

3. Release the parking brake. Gradually release

the brake pedal and then slowly depress the
accelerator pedal to start the vehicle.

Z21537
 5-29

• Manual shift mode

You can select 1st, 2nd or 3rd as the starting gear.

CAUTION
• Except when starting on a downhill road do
not select 3rd gear. Selecting 3rd gear when
starting in any other condition could cause a
transmission failure. While starting the sys-
tem automatically prevents the 4th and
higher gears from being selected.
• Start the vehicle only when the gear position
indicator indicates “1” “2” or “3”. On a vehi-
cle with an ABS when starting after the ABS
has been activated the system may take
longer than usual to engage the starting
gear.

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.

2. Move the gearshift lever from the “D” position to
the “+” or “–”position.
• The gear shifts up by one gear each time you
move the lever to “+”.
 • The gear shifts down by one gear each time you
move the lever to “–”.


>

The “ ” indication on the multi-information dis-

play disappears when the manual shift mode is
engaged.

Z22151

The gearshift mode also can be changed between

“manual” and “automatic” each time you push the
%1 gearshift lever from the “D” position into the “A/M”
position.
NOTE:
The starting gear engagement is still in progress
while the indication on the gear position indicator is
flashing. Do not release the brake pedal at this time.
5-30 Switches and controls

3. Make sure the gear position indicator is showing

the desired gear.
4. Release the parking brake. Slowly depress the
accelerator pedal while gradually releasing the
brake pedal to start the vehicle.

Z21537
6.2 Reversing
1. While holding the brake pedal fully depressed,
place the gearshift lever into the “R” position.
2. Check that the gear position indicator shows
“R”.
NOTE:
• While the vehicle is moving, the reverse gear
does not engage even if you place the gearshift
lever into the “R” position. Always place the
gearshift lever into the “R” position when the
vehicle is stopped.
> • Reverse gear engagement is still in progress
when the indication on the gear position indica-
tor is flashing. Do not release the brake pedal at
this time.
3. Release the parking brake. Slowly depress the
accelerator pedal while gradually releasing the
brake pedal to reverse the vehicle.

7 Driving
It is recommended to use the automatic shift mode
for ordinary driving to reduce your workload.

CAUTION
• Never place the gearshift lever into the “N”
position while driving. This could result in an
accident as engine braking is not available
and could damage the transmission.
• Use the manual shift mode when driving on
slippery surfaces (such as a wet or frozen
road). Using the automatic shift mode on
slippery roads could cause an accident for
the following reasons:
Skidding is more likely to be caused by auto-
matic shift-downs that take place normally
when driving in the automatic shift mode.
Skidding also may occur easily due to auto-
matic shift-downs following full or quick
operation of the accelerator pedal.
Even while driving using the manual shift
mode the vehicle is likely to skid if you sud-
denly depress the accelerator pedal or
quickly shift down the gear.
 5-31

NOTE:
• In cold weather when the temperature of the
transmission oil is low, you may experience
slower automatic shift-downs from 3rd to 2nd
and from 2nd to 1st than usual. This does not
indicate any problem; shifting will return to nor-
mal speed as the oil temperature rises.
• There could be an instance when gear engage-
ment is rather slow and you notice a delay in
gear shifting. If this happens repeatedly, please
have the vehicle inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

7.1 Driving in automatic shift mode

If you pull away and drive in the automatic shift
mode, gearshifts will take place automatically as
shown below in accordance with the accelerator-
pedal position and vehicle speed. The automatic
shift mode indicator will be shown.
Gear change scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6

NOTE:
 The starting gear is automatically selected accord-
ing to the steepness of the slope and the vehicle
loading. The vehicle will start in 2nd on level and
downhill roads and in 1st on uphill roads.

7.2 Driving in manual shift mode

Move the gearshift lever from the “D” position to the
“A/M” position to switch from the automatic shift
%1 mode to the manual shift mode. You can also switch
to the manual shift mode by moving the gearshift
lever in the “+” or “–” direction.
The manual shift mode will then be set and the
automatic shift indicator “ ” will disappear from
the multi-information display.

In the manual shift mode, the gear is fixed at the

presently selected one even when the vehicle
 speed changes. So you should change the gear
appropriately according to the vehicle speed.
• The gear shifts up by one gear each time you
move the gearshift lever to the “+” position.
• The gear shifts down by one gear each time you
move the gearshift lever to the “–” position.
 • If the gearshift lever is moved to the “+” or “–”
position multiple times, the gear will change
upward or downward as long as the engine is
> operating within the normal rpm range.
5-32 Switches and controls

NOTE:
• If the system judges that a manual upshift or
downshift would put the engine speed out of the
normal rpm range, the gearshift does not take
place. If the gear does not change when you
operate the gearshift lever, first adjust the vehi-
cle speed using the accelerator or brakes and
then operate the gearshift lever again.
• In cold weather when the temperature of the
transmission oil is low, shifting down may be
prohibited. If the gear does not change when
you operate the gearshift lever, first reduce the
vehicle speed using the accelerator or brakes
and then operate the gearshift lever to downshift
again.

Push the gearshift lever into the “A/M” position if

you want to change the gearshift mode from the
%1 manual shift mode to the automatic shift mode.

8 Moving out of mud snow or sand

WARNING
Be sure to check safety around the vehicle
before moving the vehicle by using fore-and-
aft rocking motion. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.

CAUTION
Do not try to free a stuck vehicle for more than 5
minutes. Prolonged rocking motion will damage
the transmission as the transmission oil
quickly heats up to a dangerous temperature.

Move the gearshift lever between the “D” and “N”

positions to rock the vehicle and thereby get it out of
the mud, snow, or sand.

Z16687
 5-33

9 Short stops

WARNING
Never race the engine when the vehicle is
stopped. If the gearshift lever happens to
have been placed in any position other than
“P” or “N” the vehicle will suddenly lurch
and could cause a serious accident.

CAUTION
On an uphill road avoid stopping the vehicle by
only using the accelerator pedal as this could
cause slipping or a broken clutch. Always use
the brake pedal to stop the vehicle on an uphill
road.

When you stop the vehicle to wait at signals or in a

traffic jam, the clutch automatically disengages as
the vehicle slows down and an automatic gear
change takes place as follows:
• When driving in the automatic shift mode, the
2nd gear will be automatically engaged. On
uphill roads, the 1st gear may be engaged
depending on the steepness of the slope and
the vehicle loading.
• When driving in the manual shift mode, the 2nd
gear will be automatically engaged if 3rd or
higher gear was selected before stopping. On
uphill roads, the 1st gear may be engaged
depending on the steepness of the slope and
the vehicle loading.
• Keep the brake pedal fully depressed while
stopped.
• In the case of a prolonged stop, you can release
the brake pedal after engaging the parking
brake and placing the gearshift lever in the “P”
position.
• In a vehicle with an ISS system, if you keep the
gearshift lever in the “D” position while the vehi-
cle is stopped, braking power will be retained for
a few seconds after you release the brake pedal
to start the vehicle until creeping starts to occur.
Braking power will not be retained if you stop the
vehicle with the gearshift lever in the “N” position
or if you place the gearshift lever in the “N” posi-
tion after the engine has been automatically
stopped.
• See page 5-13 for details on the ISS system.
5-34 Switches and controls

10 Parking

WARNING
• Avoid parking on slopes. The vehicle may
start moving while it is parked causing an
unexpected accident. When you cannot
avoid parking on a slope securely apply
the parking brake. On a vehicle with a
DUONIC ® system place the gearshift lever
in the “P” position and apply chocks to the
wheels. You can further improve safety by
leaving the steering wheel turned so the
vehicle will roll toward an obstacle (for
example a curbstone) in the unlikely event
of movement.
• Do not park the vehicle by only placing the
gearshift lever in the “P” position. If you
park the vehicle on a steep slope by only
placing the gearshift lever in the “P” posi-
tion the gearshift lever will become hard
to move and in some cases it may
become impossible to release the lever. In
such a case first place the gearshift lever
in the “N” position. Then after checking
that the gearshift position indicator is
showing “N” place the lever in the “D”
position.

1. Stop the vehicle on the flattest available surface.

2. While keeping the brake pedal depressed, pull
the parking brake lever to fully apply the parking
brake.

Z15224

3. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position.

When the gearshift position indicator shows “P”,
release the brake pedal.

>
 5-35

4. Let the engine idle for about 3 minutes to allow it

cool down.
Engine parts are particularly hot immediately
after the vehicle has been driven uphill or on an
expressway. Let the engine idle for at least 3
minutes.

Z16069

5. Turn the starter switch to the “ACC” position to

stop the engine.

Z21168

6. When you leave the vehicle, remove the starter

key and lock the doors.
NOTE:
A buzzer sounds continuously if the driver’s door or
assistant driver’s door is opened while the engine is
running and the gearshift lever is in the “D” position.
The buzzer stops if the gearshift lever is moved to
the “P” or “N” position, the engine is stopped, or the
door is closed.
If the gearshift lever is moved to the “R” position
while the engine is running, the buzzer sounds
intermittently.
Always stop the engine with the gearshift lever in
the “P” position.

11 Leaving the vehicle with the engine

running
Leave the vehicle after confirming the following:
1. The parking brake is firmly applied.
2. The gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
3. The gear position indicator is showing “P”.
NOTE:
A buzzer sounds continuously if the driver’s door or
assistant driver’s door is opened while the engine is
running and the gearshift lever is in the “D” position.
The buzzer stops if the gearshift lever is moved to
the “P” or “N” position, the engine is stopped, or the
door is closed. If the gearshift lever is moved to the
“R” position while the engine is running, the buzzer
sounds intermittently. Always stop the engine with
the gearshift lever in the “P” position.
5-36 Switches and controls

12 If a transmission system warning is

displayed
The multi-information display indicates a warning if
there is a problem with the DUONIC ® system. If a
transmission system warning is displayed, take nec-
essary action according to the following instruc-
tions.

12.1 warning (red)

• If this warning appears while driving:

Immediately slow down by braking and stop the
vehicle in a safe place.
(Red)

Z21309

• Actions to take after stopping the vehicle

1. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position and
shut off the engine.
2. Restart the engine. If the engine cannot be
started, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
3. If the warning (red) is not indicated after the
engine is started, you may continue to drive the
vehicle. If the warning is indicated again, do not
continue to drive but contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer imme-
diately.

12.2 warning (amber)

• If this warning appears while driving:
• You may continue to drive if automatic gear
(Amber) shifting is possible in the automatic shift mode.
However, have the vehicle inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer as soon as possible.
• If automatic gear shifting does not work in the
automatic shift mode, stop the vehicle in a safe
place.

Z21309
 5-37

• Actions to take after stopping the vehicle

1. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position and
shut off the engine.
2. Restart the engine. If the engine cannot be
started, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
3. If the warning (amber) is not indicated after
the engine is started, you may continue to drive
the vehicle. If the warning is indicated again,
operate the gearshift lever in the manual shift
mode. You may continue to drive if manual gear
shifting is possible. However, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer as soon as possible. If man-
ual gear shifting is impossible, do not continue
to drive but contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

12.3 warning
• If the warning appears and the buzzer
sounds three times:
This warning is displayed when the clutch control
fluid or the clutch temperature is too high. If this
indication appears, do the following:
• The warning appears and the buzzer sounds
three times (when the clutch control fluid
temperature is too high)
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and be sure to
fully apply the parking brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position.
Depress the accelerator pedal to run the engine
at a speed slightly higher than the idling speed
in order to cool down the clutch control fluid.
3. If the warning disappears, you may continue to
drive. If the warning remains on or is indicated
repeatedly, transmission oil leak age may be the
cause. Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
• The warning appears and the buzzer contin-
ues sounding (when the clutch temperature
is too high)
1. The clutch temperature is overheating because
many half clutches is used. Select a lower gear
than usual in the manual shift mode and start.
2. If the indication remains displayed, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and be sure to fully apply
the parking brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position.
Depress the accelerator pedal to run the engine
at a speed slightly higher than the idling speed
in order to cool down the clutch.
4. If the warning disappears and the buzzer stops,
you may continue to drive. If the warning or the
buzzer remains on, contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

CAUTION
Do not stop the engine without letting the trans-
mission cool down otherwise the transmission
may seize up. Stop the engine only after the
warning has disappeared from the screen.
5-38 Switches and controls

Cruise control

<Vehicles with a cruise control>

Cruise control memorizes any desired speed above
the speed indicated below and, maintains that
speed automatically without having to operate the
accelerator pedal. This is especially useful for free-
way driving when there is little chance of having to
pull over and stop.
Speeds above which cruise control functions
Approx. 30 km/h (18 mph)

NOTE:
• On vehicles with speed limitation devices, you
can set the speed up to less than 90 km/h
(56 mph).
• For the sake of safety, do not use the cruise
control in the following driving conditions:
• In heavy traffic which does not allow suffi-
cient vehicle to vehicle distance
• On roads with sharp turns or poor visibility
• On icy, snow-covered, or otherwise slippery
roads
• Steep downhill road
• The vehicle speed may become higher than the
set speed on a steep downhill road. Stop using
the cruise control if this occurs.
 5-39

1 Controls and indicator

0,("

=

6,("

= 

Main switch
This switch is used to activate and deactivate the
cruise control function. The lamp inside the switch
illuminates when the cruise control is on. The switch
returns automatically to the neutral position after
having been pressed.

WARNING
For safety turn off the main switch when the
cruise control is not in use.
5-40 Switches and controls

SET/RESUME switch
SET:
Turn this switch to set a desired speed and to
reduce the set speed as well. The switch returns
automatically to the neutral position after having
been turned.
RESUME:
Turn this switch to change the set speed to a higher
speed and to return to the previously set speed as
well. The switch returns automatically to the neutral
position after having been turned.

Cruise control indicator lamp

If the cruise control is activated, this lamp illumi-
nates during driving.

Cancel switch
Press this switch to stop cruise control operation.

2 To set a desired speed

1. Check that the exhaust brake switch is in the
“OFF” position. If the switch is in the “ON” posi-
32 tion, place it in the “OFF” position.
Press the ON side of the cruise control main
switch. The lamp inside the switch will illumi-
nate.

= 

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the desired

speed is reached.

Z21524
 5-41

3. When the desired speed is reached, turn the

RESUME/SET switch toward the “SET” side.
The indicator lamp will illuminate indicating
that the cruise control is activated. Now the
desired speed is memorized, so release the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle will run maintain-
ing that speed automatically.
NOTE:
• If you activate the cruise control while driving
with the DUONIC® system in the manual shift
mode, the DUONIC® system will switch to the
automatic shift mode. When the DUONIC® sys-
tem switches to the automatic shift mode, the
multi-information display will show “ ”.
• Before pressing the ON side of the main switch
to set a desired speed, make sure the exhaust
brake switch is in the OFF position. You will not
be able to set the speed if the exhaust brake
switch is in the ON position. When driving with
the cruise control active, exhaust braking can be
used as usual, but the cruise control function will
be deactivated while exhaust braking is being
used.
Z21525

3 To increase the set speed in cruise con-

trol mode
• By using the SET/RESUME switch
Turn the SET/RESUME switch toward the
“RESUME” side. The vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch when the desired speed is
reached. The vehicle will cruise at the new, higher
speed.

Z21527

• By using both accelerator pedal and SET/

RESUME switch
1. Use the accelerator pedal to reach the desired
speed.

Z21524

2. When the desired speed is reached, turn the

SET/RESUME switch to the “SET” side for 1
second or longer. The vehicle will then cruise at
the new, higher speed.

Z21526
5-42 Switches and controls

4 To decrease the set speed in cruise con-

trol mode
Turn the SET/RESUME switch toward the “SET”
side. The vehicle will decelerate. Release the
switch when the desired speed is reached. The
vehicle will cruise at the new, lower speed.

Z21526

5 To accelerate temporarily in cruise con-

trol mode
Depress the accelerator pedal as you do in normal
accelerating. When the pedal is released, the vehi-
cle will cruise at the set speed again.

Z21524

6 Automatic deactivation of the cruise

control
The cruise control is deactivated automatically and
the indicator lamp also goes out in the following
conditions:
• When the brake pedal is depressed
• When the exhaust brake is activated
• When the gearshift lever is moved to any posi-
tion other than “D”.
• When the vehicle speed is different more than
15 km/h (9mph) from the set speed (except at
the time of operating the SET/RESUME switch).
• When the vehicle did not return to the set speed
within 30 seconds after increasing the vehicle
speed by depressing the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION
Placing the gearshift lever in the “N” position
temporarily deactivates the cruise control. How-
ever such practice is dangerous during driving
because engine braking will no longer be possi-
ble. It will also cause malfunction of the trans-
mission.
 5-43

7 To reactivate the temporarily deacti-

vated cruise control
• To reactivate the cruise control, turn the SET/
RESUME switch toward the “RESUME” side.
The indicator lamp will illuminate again and
the vehicle will resume running at the set speed.

Z21529

• To reactivate the cruise control while altering the

set speed to a new speed, turn the SET/
RESUME switch toward the “SET” side when
the vehicle has reached the desired speed. The
indicator lamp will light up, and the vehicle
will continue running at the set speed.
NOTE:
Under any of the following conditions, you cannot
resume the set speed by performing the above
operation. In these situations, perform the speed
Z21526 setting procedure from the beginning.
• The vehicle speed is lower than 30 km/h (18
mph).

8 To deactivate the cruise control

Deactivate the cruise control by doing either of the
following:
• Press the “OFF” side of the main switch .
• Press the cancel switch .

CAUTION
When there is a problem with the engine control
system the cruise control cannot be used.
Z21528
5-44 Switches and controls

Parking brake lever

1 Operation of parking brake lever

WARNING
• Except in an emergency never apply the
parking brake while the vehicle is moving
since the vehicle could spin and/or over-
turn.
• Illumination of the warning lamp does
not necessarily indicate that the parking
brake has been fully activated. Be sure to
pull the lever all the way.

• Parking
The parking brake is activated when the parking
brake lever is fully pulled out. The warning lamp
lights up simultaneously.

• Releasing
Raise the lever slightly, press the end button , and
lower the lever with the button still pressed. Make
sure that the warning lamp goes out.

• When parking, please bear in mind the cautions

in “Parking”, Chapter 7. P. 7-11

CAUTION
• Before putting the vehicle in motion check
that the warning lamp is not illuminated.
If you were to accidently drive the vehicle
with the parking brake applied the parking
brake would wear prematurely and overheat
> leading to reduced effectiveness and the risk
of fire.
• When parking your vehicle on a slope block
the wheels with chocks for added safety.

2 Parking brake release reminder warning

If the vehicle is driven at a speed of 12 km/h (7.5
mph) or higher with the parking brake not fully
released, a buzzer starts sounding intermittently
three seconds later. If the buzzer starts sounding in
this way, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and release the parking brake.
 5-45

<LHD>
Combination switch

1 Arrangement of switches
Lighting switch
Passing/dimmer switch
Turn signal switch
Exhaust brake switch
Z21344 Wiper and washer switch

6,("

>

2 Lighting switch

WARNING
Do not touch the lenses of the headlamps
while they are lit or immediately after turning
them off as they become very hot and could
burn you.

> CAUTION
Keeping the headlamps on for a long period
without the engine running can drain the bat-
tery making the engine impossible to start.

The lighting switch can be used when the starter

switch is in the “ON” position.
Turning the knob at the end of the lever controls the
illumination of lamps as follows:

Position, tail, license

plate, end out-line
marker <vehicles with an Headlamps
end out-line marker> and
meter illumination lamps
OFF Off Off
position

position On Off

position On On
5-46 Switches and controls

NOTE:
The daytime running lamps are illuminated when
the starter switch is in the “ON” position and the
lighting switch is in the “OFF” or position. The
daytime running lamps go out when the lighting
switch is moved to the position and when the
front fog lamps <Vehicles with a front fog lamp> are
illuminated.

>

3 Passing signal/dimmer switch

• Passing signal
Pulling the lever up activates the high beams until
the lever is released. Use this to flash a signal when
overtaking another vehicle.

• Dimmer
With the headlamps illuminated, pushing the lever
down activates the headlamp high beams and pull-
ing it back to the original position reactivates the low
> beams. When the high beams are on, indicator
lamp lights up.

4 Turn signal lamp switch

• Turn signal
Moving the lever forward or backward activates the
corresponding turn signal causing it to flash. At the
same time, the corresponding indicator lamp or
flashes.
When the steering wheel is returned to the neutral
position after a right or left turn, the switch automat-
ically moves back to the neutral position and the
lamp stops flashing. After making a moderate turn,
> however, the switch will sometimes not return auto-
matically. In this case, put the switch in the neutral
position by hand.

• Lane changer
Lightly pushing the lever forward or backward
causes the corresponding turn signal lamp to flash
while the lever is held in this position.
 5-47

5 Exhaust brake switch

WARNING
• Using the exhaust brake on a wet frozen
snow-covered or otherwise slippery road
surface when the vehicle is lightly loaded
or not loaded can cause the tyres to slip
on the road surface resulting in a skid. Do
not use the exhaust brake on slippery road
surfaces.
• Reduce speed sufficiently before negotiat-
ing a curve. This is especially true if your
vehicle is equipped with ABS. When nego-
tiating a curve with the exhaust brake
applied if the tyres slip due to the slippery
road surface or a step in the road the ABS
may function causing the exhaust brake
to be temporarily released which may
result in a serious accident.

The exhaust brake enhances engine braking. Use it

as an auxiliary braking means on downhill stretches
or during high-speed driving.
NOTE:
Do not keep the exhaust brake switch in the activa-
tion position at all times. Doing so repeatedly decel-
erates and accelerates the vehicle speed due to
frequent operation of the exhaust brake, which
reduces fuel economy. Move the exhaust brake
switch between the activation and non-activation
positions as necessary according to road and traffic
conditions.

• Pushing the lever up activates the exhaust

brake. While the exhaust brake is activated,
indicator lamp stays illuminated.
Deactivated
Activated
• The exhaust brake temporarily deactivates if
• The accelerator pedal or clutch pedal <Man-
ual transmission vehicles> is pressed.
• The gearshift lever is in the neutral position
<Manual transmission vehicles>, or the
Z21348 gearshift lever is in the “N” position <Vehi-
cles with a DUONIC® system>
• The ABS is operated.
The exhaust brake reactivates if the above con-
dition is released.

6 Wiper and washer switch

WARNING
In cold weather warm the windshield using
the heater before spraying washer fluid on it.
Otherwise the washer fluid may freeze on
the windshield.
5-48 Switches and controls

CAUTION
• Operating the wipers when the windshield is
dry damages the windshield glass. If the
glass is dry be sure to squirt it with washer
fluid before operating the wipers.
• Do not operate the wipers when the rubber
parts of the wiper blades are frozen onto the
windshield or otherwise stuck to the wind-
shield. The wiper blades could get damaged
and the wiper motor could fail.
• When the wipers are not used for a long
time dust sand and other substances can
collect between the wiper blades and wind-
shield. Clean the wipers before using them.
Otherwise the windshield may get
scratched.
• Operating the washer continuously for more
than 20 seconds or when there is no fluid in
the reservoir could burn out the washer
motor.
• Do not operate the wipers while the arms are
raised. Doing so could damage the wiper
arms.
• Before operating the washer switch check
the conditions around your vehicle. Washer
fluid may splash about under certain condi-
tions.

• Rotating the grip at the end of the lever activates

the windshield wipers in one of the following
three modes:
HI
LO INT:
MIST Wipers operate intermittently. By operating the
interval control switch , the operating interval of
wipers can be varied between 3 and 12 seconds.
OFF (Faster , Slower )
INT LO:
Wipers operate at a slow speed.
Z21349 HI:
Wipers operate at a rapid speed.
MIST:
The wipers operate once when you flip up the lever
toward you.

• If the wipers chatter on the windshield or wipe

the windshield unevenly, replace the wiper
blades. P. 12-87
• While the button on is pressed, washer fluid is
sprayed onto the windshield glass and the wiper
operates several times.
• Refill the washer fluid reservoir before it is
empty. P. 12-88
Z22475
• If there is washer fluid in the reservoir but none
is sprayed when you operate the washer, the
nozzles may be blocked. Clean the nozzles
using a piece of thin wire. If fluid is still not
sprayed when you operate the washer, have the
vehicle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
 5-49

Hazard warning lamp switch

CAUTION
The battery may be discharged and the engine
impossible to restart if the hazard warning
lamps are operated for an extended period of
time.

The hazard warning lamps may be used as a warn-

<LHD> ing to other vehicles when you suddenly find it nec-
essary to stop your vehicle in emergencies.
The lamps can flash in any of the starter switch
positions.
Pressing the switch causes all turn signal lamps to
flash simultaneously. At the same time, indicator
lamps start flashing.
Pressing the switch again causes the lamps to go
out.
Z21350
5-50 Switches and controls

<LHD>
Front fog lamp switch

<Vehicles with a front fog lamp>

WARNING
Do not touch the lenses of the fog lamps
while they are lit or immediately after turning
Z21351 them off as they become very hot and could
burn you.

Use the front fog lamps when you drive in fog,

6 (" snow, or other poor visibility conditions.
The fog lamps operate only when the lighting switch
is in the or position.
When you press the front fog lamp switch , the fog
lamps come on simultaneously with the indica-
tor lamp.
To turn off the fog lamps, press the front fog lamp
switch again or turn the lighting switch to the “OFF”
position.

>

("
Rear fog lamp switch

CAUTION
Avoid using the rear fog lamps unless visibility
is poor as they may prove distracting to other
motorists during normal driving conditions.
>
Use the rear fog lamps to help prevent a tail-on col-
lision in fog, snow, and other low-visibility condi-
6 ("
tions.
With the lighting switch in the position and/or
the front fog lamps illuminated, pressing the rear fog
lamp switch causes the rear fog lamps to illumi-
nate. The indicator lamp illuminates simulta-
neously. Release the rear fog lamp switch once the
indicator lamp is illuminated. The switch will
automatically return to its original position.

> The rear fog lamps can be turned off by pressing

the rear fog lamp switch again or by moving the
lighting switch to any position other than .
When the front fog lamps are illuminated with the
lighting switch in the position, turning off the
front fog lamps also turns off the rear fog lamps.
 5-51

("
Headlamp leveling switch

The headlamps’ vertical aim varies in accordance

with the weight and position of the vehicle’s load.
Using the headlamp leveling switch, the headlamps’
aim should be set high enough to light the road
ahead without dazzling oncoming drivers. The
> headlamp beam dips more as you turn the head-
lamp leveling switch to a larger number position.

<RHD> CAUTION
Do not aim the headlamps lower than neces-
sary. If the headlamps are aimed too low they
will not provide a sufficient field of view at night.

Z20987

1 Adjusting the headlamp aim

With the vehicle loaded, adjust the headlamp level-
ing switch to achieve the headlamp beam shown in
the illustration on the left.

Z03139

Rearview mirrors

NOTE:
• When turning right or left, bear in mind the differ-
ence in tracking of the front and rear inner
wheels, and use the rearview mirrors to confirm
safety behind you.
• Pay attention to the extended rearview mirrors
when driving on narrow roads. Take particular
care to ensure that they do not hit pedestrians.
• In rainy weather, drops of water can adhere to
the mirrors, detracting from rearward visibility.
Stop the vehicle and wipe off the water to
restore visibility.
5-52 Switches and controls

1 Mirror adjustment
Before starting to drive, sit in the correct driving
position and make sure you can see behind the
vehicle, the sides of the vehicle, the periphery of
the vehicle. Also, make sure the mirror surfaces are
not dirty.

1.1 Guideline for mirror adjustment

8]TI"  CAUTION

(VMZIV WWMHI"
7MHISJ Make any necessary mirror adjustments before
XLIZILMGPI (not after) starting to drive.

Adjust the mirror as shown in the illustration by

pushing its edge up/down and left/right.

%WWMWXERXHVMZIV WWMHI"


7MHISJ
XLIZILMGPI

>

8]TI"
(VMZIV WWMHI" 
7MHISJ
XLIZILMGPI

7MHISJ
XLIZILMGPI

%WWMWXERXHVMZIV WWMHI"


7MHISJ
XLIZILMGPI

7MHISJ
XLIZILMGPI


>
 5-53

2 Retracting the rearview mirrors

The rearview mirrors can be retracted for turning a
tight corner, for passing an oncoming vehicle on a
narrow road, and for parking.

WARNING
Do not drive with the rearview mirrors
retracted. The lack of the rearward visibility
normally provided by the rearward mirrors
> could cause an accident.

Push the rearward mirrors inward by hand to retract

them. When returning each rearview mirror to its
original position, move it outward until the mirror
stay locks.

<LHD> Mirror heater switch

When the mirrors are misted up, turn ON the switch

to activate the mirror heaters. The lamp in the
switch will illuminate at this time. Turn OFF the
switch when the mirrors are clear.
The heaters are automatically turned off in about 30
minutes if the switch is left on.
Z21354

CAUTION
6,("
Do not use the mirror heaters unless the engine
is running. Otherwise the battery may become
drained making it impossible to start the
engine.

>

Horn switch

WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a driver’s
SRS air bag do not apply excessive force
such as hitting the steering pad to the stor-
> age area of the SRS air bag. It may cause
incorrect functioning of the SRS air bag and
serious injuries.

Press the horn switch pad at the centre of the

steering wheel to sound the horn.
5-54 Switches and controls

Speed limitation devices

<Vehicles with speed limitation devices>

The maximum speed of a vehicle with speed limita-
tion devices is 90 km/h (56 mph).

WARNING
• On a level or uphill road the vehicle speed
will not exceed 90 km/h (56 mph) no matter
how far the accelerator pedal is pressed.
Exercise caution when overtaking other
vehicles on expressways and other roads.
• The vehicle speed may exceed 90 km/h (56
mph) on downhill roads. Use the exhaust
brake to keep the vehicle speed within the
limit.

1 Illegal modifications
The speed limitation devices are fitted in accor-
dance with legal requirements.
To prevent illegal modifications, various parts of the
speed limitation devices are fitted with seals.

Regeneration controlling
DPF system

<Vehicle with a regeneration controlling DPF sys-

tem>
• The regeneration controlling DPF system col-
lects particulate matter (PM) in exhaust gases
with a ceramic filter located inside the muffler
and burns the PM on the filter utilizing the effect
of the front oxidation catalyst (continuous DPF
regeneration).
• Continuous filter regeneration is impossible
under certain conditions such as low-speed driv-
ing. Under these conditions, the system auto-
matically raises the exhaust temperature to burn
the PM to regenerate the filter (automatic DPF
regeneration). However, even automatic DPF
regeneration is sometimes impossible if the
vehicle is repeatedly driven very slowly and the
engine is frequently started and stopped. The
DPF must then be regenerated by burning the
PM under manual control (parked DPF regener-
ation).
 5-55

1 Controls and indicators

0,("
DPF cleaning switch
Use this switch for parked DPF regeneration to burn
PM in the DPF.
Multi-information display
The multi-information display indicates the amount
of PM in the DPF, a prompt for performing parked
DPF regeneration, the predicted time until comple-
tion of parked DPF regeneration, and warnings.
MODE switch
Use this switch for selecting and setting indications
>
on the multi-information display.
DPF indicator lamp
This lamp lights or flashes to indicate the state of
the DPF.
6,("

>

2 PM indicator
If you select the DPF monitor on the multi-informa-
tion display, you can check the amount of PM col-
lected in the DPF.
• Select the DPF monitor mode by pressing the
MODE switch to see the PM indicator .
• The PM indicator shows the amount of PM in 9
degrees. The number of segments increases or
decreases as the amount of PM changes. In
addition, the colour of the symbol changes as
follows:
Green: When the number of displayed
Z24955 segments is 1 to 6
Amber: When the number of displayed
segments is 7 to 9

3 PM indicator and warning/indicator

lamp
• The PM indicator and warning/indicator lamp
either light or flash according to the amount of
PM in the DPF.
• Perform parked DPF regeneration if prompted
by the warning/indicator lamp as well as by the
PM indicator on the multi-information display.
5-56 Switches and controls

Indication by PM indicator Warning/indicator Parked/automatic Ref.

lamp regeneration page
When the number of displayed segments is 1 to 6:

– – –

Z24956

When the number of displayed segments is 7 or 8:

Perform parked DPF

The lamp (amber) regeneration within
flashes slowly 50 km (31miles) or
(0.5-second inter- 1 hour, whichever 5-59
vals). earlier, after the
lamp starts flashing.

Z24957
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The symbol turns from green to amber.
When the number of displayed segments is 9:

The lamp (amber) Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe
flashes quickly
(0.25-second inter- place and perform 5-59
parked DPF regen-
vals).
eration.

Z24958
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The warning is displayed.
When the DPF is overloaded with PM:

Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe
place and perform
The lamp (amber) parked DPF regen-
flashes quickly eration. 5-59
(0.25-second inter- The engine power is
vals). automatically
reduced when the
warning is
displayed.
Z24959
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The warning is displayed.
 5-57

Warning/indicator Parked/automatic Ref.

Indication by PM indicator
lamp regeneration page
When automatic DPF regeneration is in progress:

• The lamp
(green) lights.
• If a prompt for
parked DPF regen-
eration has been Automatic DPF
issued following
regeneration is in 5-57
indication of 7 or progress.
more PM amount
segments, the
lamp lights in green
and amber alter-
Z24960 nately.
• The “CLEANING” message is displayed.
• PM amount segments flash.
When parked DPF regeneration is in progress:

Parked DPF
The lamp (amber)
regeneration is in 5-58
lights. progress.

Z24961
The predicted time until completion of parked DPF
regeneration is indicated.

4 Automatic DPF regeneration

• If the DPF becomes so heavily loaded with PM
that it cannot be regenerated by continuous
DPF regeneration, the system initiates auto-
matic DPF regeneration (regeneration by burn-
ing PM). The indicator lamp (green) lights
while the DPF is being regenerated by this
method. You can operate the vehicle as usual
even during automatic DPF regeneration
although the engine operating sound and idling
speed will change due to the higher exhaust
temperature.
Z21276
• If you select the DPF monitor mode on the multi-
information display during automatic DPF
regeneration, the “CLEANING” message is dis-
played above the PM indicator, and the PM indi-
cator flashes.
5-58 Switches and controls

WARNING
If the vehicle must be stopped during auto-
matic DPF regeneration do so after checking
that there are no flammable materials such
as dead grass or paper near the exhaust pipe
and muffler. As the exhaust gas as well as
the exhaust pipe and muffler are extremely
hot nearby flammable materials could ignite
and cause a fire.

NOTE:
• During automatic DPF regeneration, the engine
operating sound will change and, when the vehi-
cle is stopped, the idling speed will rise (to 800
rpm) and the exhaust valve will be activated.
These are normal conditions.
• During automatic DPF regeneration, the idling
stop and start (ISS) system does not operate.
• Automatic DPF regeneration does not take
place when the PTO is used (vehicles with a
PTO).
• When PM indicator is showing 4 or more seg-
ments, you can start the parked DPF regenera-
tion if you continue pressing the DPF cleaning
switch until the indicator lamp lights in
amber.
• No automatic DPF regeneration takes place
while the and warnings (amber) are being
displayed alternately.

5 Parked DPF regeneration (performed

following illumination of the (amber)
indicator lamp)
The system sometimes cannot automatically
remove the DPF trapped PM by burning, typically
when you drive the vehicle at very low speeds or
start and stop the engine frequently during opera-
tion. The system informs you of such a condition by
flashing the (amber) indicator lamp to prompt
you to manually remove the DPF trapped PM by
burning. The flashing interval of the indicator lamp
differs depending on the amount of the PM accumu-
lated in the DPF.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is used in any of the following condi-
tions, there will be a higher risk of automatic DPF
regeneration not working, and so the indicator lamp
will flash more frequently to prompt you to perform
parked DPF regeneration.
• The vehicle is mainly driven at 20 km (12 miles)/
h or lower speeds.
• Operation of the vehicle involves frequent start-
ing and stopping of the engine at short intervals
(less than 10 minutes).
• The vehicle is repeatedly driven for short dis-
tances (less than 10 km (6 miles)).
• The engine is used for such short times that it is
shut off before having had time to warm up.
 5-59

• Slow flashing (0.5-second interval)

You must use the DPF cleaning switch within 50
km (31 miles) or 1 hour of driving after the start
of the flashing of the indicator lamp to perform
the parked DPF regeneration in order to remove
the PM inside the DPF by burning.
When the PTO is being used, suspend the PTO
operation and perform the parked DPF regener-
ation.

Z21276

• Fast flashing (0.25-second interval)

You must bring the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place as soon as possible, then use the DPF
cleaning switch to perform the parked DPF
regeneration in order to remove the PM inside
the DPF by burning.

Z21278
CAUTION
If the (amber) indicator lamp flashes quickly
or the warning appears on the multi-informa-
tion display promptly perform parked DPF
regeneration by using the DPF cleaning switch
to remove PM in the DPF by burning. Continuing
to drive with an overloaded DPF will result in
system failure.

6 How to perform the parked DPF regener-

ation
The parked DPF regeneration steps you should fol-
low upon flashing of the relevant indicator, warning
and (amber) indicator lamp are indicated below.
The parked DPF regeneration time is shown on the
multi-information display. The parked DPF regener-
ation time is as a general rule 20 minutes although it
varies with the conditions in which the vehicle is
operated.
5-60 Switches and controls

WARNING
• Do not perform the parked DPF regenera-
tion in a poorly ventilated garage or other
closed area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is toxic and very danger-
ous.
• Avoid the following conditions or areas
when performing parked DPF regenera-
tion:
• Side gates or a tail gate is opened:
Peripheral components may be dam-
aged by the heat of the muffler.
• On painted road surfaces: Hot exhaust
gas will discolour the paint.
• Near a hedge: Vegetation may be killed
by the hot exhaust gas.
• Place with flammable materials such as
dead grass or paper: A fire may occur.
• Keep all people away from the exhaust
pipe and muffler.
• Prevent anyone from touching the exhaust
pipe and muffler or being exposed to the
exhaust gas.

NOTE:
Parked DPF regeneration is impossible in the fol-
lowing conditions:
• Within 10 seconds after starting the engine
(manual transmission vehicles)
• Within 30 seconds after starting the engine
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system)
• When the coolant indicator shows the tempera-
ture by up to 5 segments (Perform parked DPF
regeneration after warming up the engine.)
• When the PTO switch is in the “ON” position
(vehicles with a PTO)
• While the accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
being depressed
• While the vehicle is moving
• When the gearshift lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N” (vehicles with a DUONIC® system)
• While the and warnings (amber) are being
displayed alternately
• When the clutch pedal is depressed (manual
transmission vehicles)
When the (amber) indicator lamp is flashing or
during parked DPF regeneration, the idling stop and
start (ISS) system does not operate.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and warm up the

engine.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position. If your
vehicle is equipped with a DUONIC® system,
place the gearshift lever in the “P” or “N” position
and then wait for at least 30 seconds.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a PTO, make
sure the PTO is disengaged. P. 8-2

>
 5-61

4. With the engine still in operation, continuously

press the DPF cleaning switch until the
(amber) indicator lamp stops flashing and
shifts to continuous illumination. The engine will
increase its idling speed (to approx. 1,500 rpm)
to start the parked DPF regeneration. When the
parked DPF regeneration is started, the pre-
dicted time until completion of the regeneration
is indicated on the multi-information display. The
exhaust brake valve may also operate during
the parked DPF regeneration.
>

5. The predicted time indication shows a time near

0 minute, the idling speed of the engine returns
to the original idling speed (approx. 650 rpm),
and the (amber) indicator lamp goes out.
Once the parked DPF regeneration is com-
pleted, you may drive the vehicle normally.
6. If you need to suspend the parked DPF regener-
ation before completion of the sequence, do
either of the following:
• Press the DPF cleaning switch again.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmis-
sion vehicles).
NOTE:
• When you deliberately suspend the parked DPF
regeneration, complete the remaining part of the
sequence without delay by performing the
above steps again.
• When PM indicator is showing 4 or more seg-
ments, you can start the parked DPF regenera-
tion if you continue pressing the DPF cleaning
switch until the indicator lamp lights in
amber.
Z24962
5-62 Switches and controls

BlueTec® system

<Vehicles with a BlueTec® system>

Z20011

DPF muffler
Pump module
Dosing module
Muffler with SCR/Oxidation catalyst
Urea tank
Urea tube

• The BlueTec® system is a combination of the

regeneration controlling DPF system and the
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment.
• The regeneration controlling DPF system col-
lects particulate matter (PM) in exhaust gases
with a ceramic filter located inside the muffler
and burns the PM on the filter utilizing the effect
of the front oxidation catalyst (continuous DPF
regeneration).
• Continuous filter regeneration is impossible
under certain conditions such as low-speed driv-
ing. Under these conditions, the system auto-
matically raises the exhaust temperature to burn
the PM to regenerate the filter (automatic DPF
regeneration). However, even automatic DPF
regeneration is sometimes impossible if the
vehicle is repeatedly driven very slowly and the
engine is frequently started and stopped. The
DPF must then be regenerated by burning the
PM under manual control (parked DPF regener-
ation).
• The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment
reduces nitrogen oxides (NOx) by adding
(spraying) AdBlue ® to an area upstream of the
selective catalytic reduction (SCR) catalyst to
decompose NOx into water and nitrogen.
 5-63

NOTE:
• BlueTec® is a registered trademark of Daimler
AG.
• SCR stands for Selective Catalytic Reduction.
• The urea tank and urea tube are provided with a
heater to thaw AdBlue® and keep it warm in cold
weather.
• When the AdBlue® temperature is low, the idling
speed may slightly increase. When the AdBlue®
becomes warm, the idling speed returns to nor-
mal.

1 Regeneration controlling DPF system

1.1 Controls and indicators
0,("
DPF cleaning switch
Use this switch for parked DPF regeneration to burn
PM in the DPF.
Multi-information display
The multi-information display indicates the amount
of PM in the DPF, a prompt for performing parked
DPF regeneration, the predicted time until comple-
tion of parked DPF regeneration, and warnings.
MODE switch
Use this switch for selecting and setting indications
>
on the multi-information display.

DPF indicator lamp

6,(" This lamp lights or flashes to indicate the state of
the DPF.

>

1.2 PM indicator
If you select the DPF monitor on the multi-informa-
tion display, you can check the amount of PM col-
lected in the DPF.
• Select the DPF monitor mode by pressing the
MODE switch to see the PM indicator .
• The PM indicator shows the amount of PM in 9
degrees. The number of segments increases or
decreases as the amount of PM changes. In
addition, the colour of the symbol changes as
follows:
Z24955
Green: When the number of displayed
segments is 1 to 6
Amber: When the number of displayed
segments is 7 to 9
5-64 Switches and controls

1.3 PM indicator and warning/indicator lamp

• The PM indicator and warning/indicator lamp
either light or flash according to the amount of
PM in the DPF.
• Perform parked DPF regeneration if prompted
by the warning/indicator lamp as well as by the
PM indicator on the multi-information display.

Indication by Warning/indicator Parked/automatic Ref.

PM indicator lamp regeneration page
When the number of displayed segments is 1 to 6:

– – –

Z24956

When the number of displayed segments is 7 or 8:

Perform parked DPF

The lamp (amber) regeneration within
flashes slowly 50 km (31 miles) or 5-67
(0.5-second inter- 1 hour, whichever
vals). earlier, after the
lamp starts flashing.

Z24957
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The symbol turns from green to amber.
When the number of displayed segments is 9:

Immediately stop the

The lamp (amber)
flashes quickly vehicle in a safe
place and perform 5-67
(0.25-second inter-
vals). parked DPF regen-
eration.

Z24958
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The warning is displayed.
 5-65

Indication by Warning/indicator Parked/automatic Ref.

PM indicator lamp regeneration page
When the DPF is overloaded with PM:

Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe
place and perform
The lamp (amber) parked DPF regen-
flashes quickly eration.
5-67
(0.25-second inter- The engine power is
vals). automatically
reduced when the
warning is
displayed.
Z24959
• The “PUSH DPF SW” message flashes.
• The warning is displayed.
When automatic DPF regeneration is in progress:

• The lamp
(green) lights.
• If a prompt for
parked DPF regen-
eration has been
Automatic DPF
issued following
indication of 7 or regeneration is in 5-65
progress.
more PM amount
segments, the
lamp lights in green
Z24960 and amber alter-
nately.
• The “CLEANING” message is
displayed.
• PM amount segments flash.
When parked DPF regeneration is in progress:

Parked DPF regen-

The lamp (amber) eration is in 5-66
lights.
progress.

Z24961
The predicted time until completion of parked DPF
regeneration is indicated.

1.4 Automatic DPF regeneration

• If the DPF becomes so heavily loaded with PM
that it cannot be regenerated by continuous
DPF regeneration, the system initiates auto-
matic DPF regeneration (regeneration by burn-
ing PM). The indicator lamp (green) lights
while the DPF is being regenerated by this
method. You can operate the vehicle as usual
even during automatic DPF regeneration
although the engine operating sound and idling
speed will change due to the higher exhaust
Z21276 temperature.
5-66 Switches and controls

• If you select the DPF monitor mode on the multi-

information display during automatic DPF
regeneration, the “CLEANING” message is dis-
played above the PM indicator, and the PM indi-
cator flashes.

WARNING
If the vehicle must be stopped during auto-
matic DPF regeneration do so after checking
that there are no flammable materials such
as dead grass or paper near the exhaust pipe
and muffler. As the exhaust gas as well as
the exhaust pipe and muffler are extremely
hot nearby flammable materials could ignite
and cause a fire.

NOTE:
• During automatic DPF regeneration, the engine
operating sound will change and, when the vehi-
cle is stopped, the idling speed will rise (to 800
rpm) and the exhaust valve will be activated.
These are normal conditions.
• During automatic DPF regeneration, the idling
stop and start (ISS) system does not operate.
• Automatic DPF regeneration does not take
place when the PTO is used (vehicles with a
PTO).
• When PM indicator is showing 4 or more seg-
ments, you can start the parked DPF regenera-
tion if you continue pressing the DPF cleaning
switch until the indicator lamp lights in
amber.
• No automatic DPF regeneration takes place
while the and warnings (amber) are being
displayed alternately.

1.5 Parked DPF regeneration (performed fol-

lowing illumination of the (amber) indi-
cator lamp)
The system sometimes cannot automatically
remove the DPF trapped PM by burning, typically
when you drive the vehicle at very low speeds or
start and stop the engine frequently during opera-
tion. The system informs you of such a condition by
flashing the (amber) indicator lamp to prompt
you to manually remove the DPF trapped PM by
burning. The flashing interval of the indicator lamp
differs depending on the amount of the PM accumu-
lated in the DPF.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is used in any of the following condi-
tions, there will be a higher risk of automatic DPF
regeneration not working, and so the indicator lamp
will flash more frequently to prompt you to perform
parked DPF regeneration.
• The vehicle is mainly driven at 20 km (12 miles)/
h or lower speeds.
• Operation of the vehicle involves frequent start-
ing and stopping of the engine at short intervals
(less than 10 minutes).
 5-67

• The vehicle is repeatedly driven for short dis-

tances (less than 10 km (6 miles)).
• The engine is used for such short times that it is
shut off before having had time to warm up.

• Slow flashing (0.5-second interval)

You must use the DPF cleaning switch within 50
km (31 miles) or 1 hour of driving after the start
of the flashing of the indicator lamp to perform
the parked DPF regeneration in order to remove
the PM inside the DPF by burning.
When the PTO is being used, suspend the PTO
operation and perform the parked DPF regener-
ation.

Z21276

• Fast flashing (0.25-second interval)

You must bring the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place as soon as possible, then use the DPF
cleaning switch to perform the parked DPF
regeneration in order to remove the PM inside
the DPF by burning.

Z21278

CAUTION
If the (amber) indicator lamp flashes quickly
or the warning appears on the multi-informa-
tion display promptly perform parked DPF
regeneration by using the DPF cleaning switch
to remove PM in the DPF by burning. Continuing
to drive with an overloaded DPF will result in
system failure.

1.6 How to perform the parked DPF regenera-

tion
The parked DPF regeneration steps you should fol-
low upon flashing of the relevant indicator, warning
and (amber) indicator lamp are indicated below.
The parked DPF regeneration time is shown on the
multi-information display. The parked DPF regener-
ation time is as a general rule 20 minutes although it
varies with the conditions in which the vehicle is
operated.
5-68 Switches and controls

WARNING
• Do not perform the parked DPF regenera-
tion in a poorly ventilated garage or other
closed area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is toxic and very danger-
ous.
• Avoid the following conditions or areas
when performing parked DPF regenera-
tion:
• Side gates or a tail gate is opened:
Peripheral components may be dam-
aged by the heat of the muffler.
• On painted road surfaces: Hot exhaust
gas will discolour the paint.
• Near a hedge: Vegetation may be killed
by the hot exhaust gas.
• Place with flammable materials such as
dead grass or paper: A fire may occur.
• Keep all people away from the exhaust
pipe and muffler.
• Prevent anyone from touching the exhaust
pipe and muffler or being exposed to the
exhaust gas.

NOTE:
Parked DPF regeneration is impossible in the fol-
lowing conditions:
• Within 10 seconds after starting the engine
(manual transmission vehicles)
• Within 30 seconds after starting the engine
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system)
• When the coolant indicator shows the tempera-
ture by up to 5 segments (Perform parked DPF
regeneration after warming up the engine.)
• When the PTO switch is in the “ON” position
(vehicles with a PTO)
• While the accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
being depressed
• While the vehicle is moving
• When the gearshift lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N” (vehicles with a DUONIC® sys-
tem)
• When the clutch pedal is depressed (manual
transmission vehicles)
• While the and warnings (amber) are being
displayed alternately
When the (amber) indicator lamp is flashing or
during parked DPF regeneration, the idling stop and
start (ISS) system does not operate.
 5-69

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and warm up the

engine.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position. If your
vehicle is equipped with a DUONIC® system,
place the gearshift lever in the “P” or “N” position
and then wait for at least 30 seconds.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a PTO, make
sure the PTO is disengaged. P. 8-2

>

4. With the engine still in operation, continuously

press the DPF cleaning switch until the
(amber) indicator lamp stops flashing and
shifts to continuous illumination. The engine will
increase its idling speed (to approx. 1,500 rpm)
to start the parked DPF regeneration. When the
parked DPF regeneration is started, the pre-
dicted time until completion of the regeneration
is indicated on the multi-information display. The
exhaust brake valve may also operate during
the parked DPF regeneration.
>

5. The predicted time indication shows a time near

0 minute, the idling speed of the engine returns
to the original idling speed (approx. 650 rpm),
and the (amber) indicator lamp goes out.
Once the parked DPF regeneration is com-
pleted, you may drive the vehicle normally.
6. If you need to suspend the parked DPF regener-
ation before completion of the sequence, do
either of the following:
• Press the DPF cleaning switch again.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmis-
sion vehicles).
NOTE:
• When you deliberately suspend the parked DPF
regeneration, complete the remaining part of the
sequence without delay by performing the
above steps again.
• When PM indicator is showing 4 or more seg-
ments, you can start the parked DPF regenera-
tion if you continue pressing the DPF cleaning
switch until the indicator lamp lights in
amber.
Z24962
5-70 Switches and controls

2 Warnings of BlueTec® exhaust gas after-

treatment
If the system detects an excessively low AdBlue®
level, an abnormality of the quality of AdBlue ® or an
abnormality of the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-
ment, the warning lamps will light and blink, and a
drive is restricted automatically.

2.1 Warning of AdBlue® quantity

• If the quantity of AdBlue® in the tank becomes
too low, the warning lamps will light and blink,
and a drive is restricted automatically. Replenish
the AdBlue® well before it is used up.
• If the urea tank becomes empty, a drive is auto-
matically restricted so you can drive only at low
speed.

CAUTION
Do not let the urea tank become empty. If the
tank becomes empty the vehicle’s operation is
automatically restricted so you can drive only at
low speed.
 5-71

Warning 1 2 3
level
Quantity of Too low Little Empty
AdBlue®
Warning
indicator 6IH 6IH
lamp

> > >

• The urea level warning • The urea level warning • The urea level warning
lamp lights. lamp continues to lamp continues to
• The E segment of the light. light.
urea level indicator • The E segment of the • All segments of the
starts blinking slowly. urea level indicator urea level indicator
• The warning lamp starts blinking quickly. starts blinking quickly.
lights. • The warning (red) is • The warning is red.
shown. • The warning lamp
• The warning lamp starts blinking.
continues to light.
Vehicle speed is limited to
Drive - Engine power is reduced less than 20 km/h
in stages.
(12 mph) *1

*1:The driving restriction is engaged within 8 hours

after being set to the warning level 3, so the
vehicle can be driven only slowly.
But if you restart the engine, the driving restric-
tion is engaged immediately.
NOTE:
For the method for canceling the driving restriction,
refer to the next page. P. 1-9
5-72 Switches and controls

2.2 Warning of abnormal detection

If the system detects a deterioration in quality of the
AdBlue ® or an abnormality of the BlueTec® exhaust
gas aftertreatment, the warning lamps will light and
blink, and a drive is restricted automatically. Imme-
diately have the vehicle inspected by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

CAUTION
If you continue to drive with the warning lamps
lit and/or blinking the NOx level of exhaust
emissions will increase damaging the environ-
ment. In addition the BlueTec® exhaust gas
aftertreatment will be damaged. Continuing to
drive in this condition also results in reduced
engine output and finally in the engagement of
driving restrictions after which the vehicle can
be driven only at slow speed.
 5-73

Warning 1 2 3
level
Warning
indicator 6IH 6IH
lamp

> > >

• The warning lamp

lights. • The warning (red) is
• The warning is red.
• Depending on the con- shown.
• The warning lamp
tent of the abnormality, • The warning lamp starts blinking.
the warning (amber) continues to light.
may be shown.
Vehicle speed is limited to
Drive - Engine power is reduced less than 20 km/h
in stages.
(12 mph) *1
Driving time

Abnormal detection (Case A) *2 10hours later 20hours later

Abnormal detection (Case B) *3 36hours later 100hours later

*1:The driving restriction is engaged within 8 hours

after being set to the warning level 3, so the
vehicle can be driven only slowly.
But if you restart the engine, the driving restric-
tion is engaged immediately.
*2(Case A):
• When the NOx level of exhaust emissions is
very high by an abnormality of the quality of
AdBlue®.
• When AdBlue® consumption is very low.
*3(Case B):
• When BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment
is faulty.
• When EGR (Exhaust Gas Recirculation)
system is faulty.

NOTE:
The warning lamp may light depending on the
type of fault or abnormality.
P. 6-32
5-74 Switches and controls

3 Precautions for inspection and mainte-

nance
• Urea dosing system
The urea dosing system (pump module plus
dosing module) continues to operate for about 2
minutes after the starter switch has been put in
the “LOCK” position. Wait for at least 2 minutes
before disconnecting the battery and electrical
system connectors in order to carry out an
inspection, maintenance and so on.

• Muffler
The muffler incorporates a catalyst and ceramic
filter.

WARNING
Do not touch the water that comes out from
the muffler. The water is weakly acidic
because of the action of the catalyst inside
the muffler. If it comes in contact with your
skin wash it off with lots of water.
 5-75

CAUTION
• Each muffler contains a catalyst and ceramic
filter so do not kick or strike the muffler
because you may damage the catalyst and/
or the ceramic filter.
• Depending upon the way in which the vehi-
cle is used a large amount of rust may be
generated from the exhaust pipe and the
suspension bracket even at an early stage.
Visually inspect the muffler and if there is
any abnormality contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer and
have the vehicle inspected.
• Do not change the length or direction of the
exhaust pipe or muffler because this may
cause the following problems. If modifica-
tion is necessary consult an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Fire or burns since hot gas is exhausted
when removing soot in the DPF by burn-
ing
• Adverse effect on the exhaust gas clean-
ing function
• On the FG models do not remain the
dosing module cover is heavily
clogged with mud.
If mud left deposited dosing module
could not cool down and the BlueTec®
could not work effectively. Clean it at reg-
ular intervals by using a brush or some-
thing also appropriate.
NOTE:
• Because the exhaust gas is cleaned before it is
> emitted, the odor of the exhaust gas will be dif-
ferent from that of a conventional diesel vehicle.
• When starting the engine, or moving off immedi-
ately after starting it in cold weather, white
smoke (water vapor) may be emitted from the
muffler, however this does not indicate an
abnormality.
 6-1

6. Instruments and warning lamps

Arrangement of instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Water temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Urea level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Multi-information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Warning/indicator telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Warning/indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-2 Instruments and warning lamps

Arrangement of instruments and

warning lamps

Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel gauge
Warning/indicator lamps
Urea level indicator <Vehicles with a BlueTec®
Z20959
system>
Multi-information display

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in kilome-

ters or miles per hour.

Z20960
 6-3

Tachometer

• The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute.
• The green zone indicates the engine speed
that is a rough guide for economic operation.
• If the needle enters the red zone , the engine
Z20962
is overreved. Reduce the vehicle speed suffi-
ciently during downhill driving or downshifting to
keep the needle from entering this zone.
P. 7-8

CAUTION
Persistent overrevving can lead to an engine
breakdown.

NOTE:
The term “overrev” refers to rotation of the engine at
an RPM exceeding the maximum limit. This occurs
when the engine is driven by the wheels during
downhill driving or downshifting.

Water temperature gauge

• The water temperature gauge is displayed on

the multi-information display and indicates the
temperature of the engine coolant.
• With the engine running normally, the coolant
temperature indicator will indicate around the
middle point of the scale.
• If the coolant temperature becomes abnormally
high, the multi-information display will show
in amber.
• If the engine overheats, the warning lamp will
light up and the multi-information display will
show in red. The coolant temperature indica-
tor will show the 13th gradation or above, indi-
cating the overheating zone . A buzzer will
sound simultaneously.
• When the engine has overheated, perform the
checks and corrective steps described on this
reference page: P. 13-8
Z24963
CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine only after letting it
run at a speed slightly above the idling RPM
until the coolant cools down. Turning off the
engine immediately after stopping will cause the
coolant temperature to rise quickly and may
cause the engine to seize up.
6-4 Instruments and warning lamps

Fuel gauge

CAUTION
The fuel injection system may fail if the engine
stops due to lack of fuel.
Z20965
The fuel gauge indicates the amount of fuel still
remaining in the fuel tank.
F: Full
E: Empty
When the Low-fuel warning lamp is illuminated,
the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the
tank is as indicated below.
Quantity of fuel remaining in tank
Tank capacity Quantity
70 litres Approx. 12 litres
100 litres Approx. 17 litres

When the needle approaches the “E” mark or Low-

fuel warning lamp is illuminated, refuel as soon as
possible. P. 1-4

NOTE:
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, air will enter the fuel
system. Simply refueling the vehicle will not make
the engine startable ; the air must be bled out of the
fuel system. P. 13-37
 6-5

Urea level indicator

<Vehicles with BlueTec® system>

CAUTION
Do not let the urea tank become empty. If the
urea tank becomes empty a driving restriction
automatically engages so the vehicle can be
driven only slowly.
We recommend that you carry AdBlue® in a por-
table container in your vehicle in case the urea
tank becomes empty.

NOTE:
If the quantity of AdBlue® in the tank becomes too
low, the warning lamps will light or blink.
P. 5-70

1 Urea level indicator

• The urea level indicator shows the level of the
AdBlue® in the urea tank.
F (all 4 segments are on): Full
E (only 1 segment is on): Replenish the
AdBlue®.

>

• When the tank is full, all 4 segments of the urea

level indicator are lit. As the AdBlue® level
drops, the segments go out one by one.
• If only the E segment of the urea level indicator
is lit, the AdBlue® level has fallen too low.
Replenish it. P. 1-6

Z20967

2 When the AdBlue® level is too low

• When the AdBlue® level has fallen too low, a
warning is issued as follows:
• The E segment of the urea level indicator ,
which has been lit, starts flashing slowly (at
0.5-second intervals).
• The urea level warning lamp comes on.
If this condition happens, replenish the AdBlue®
immediately. P. 1-6

>
6-6 Instruments and warning lamps

• When the AdBlue® level has dropped further, a

warning is issued as follows:
• The E segment of the urea level indicator ,
which has flashed slowly, starts flashing
quickly.
• The urea level warning lamp is on.
If this condition happens, replenish the AdBlue®
immediately.

>

• When the urea tank becomes completely empty,

a warning is issued as follows:
• All segments from F to E of the urea level
indicator flash quickly.
• The urea level warning lamp is on.
Because a driving restriction engages and the vehi-
cle can be driven only slowly, replenish AdBlue®
immediately and then disengage the restriction.
P. 1-9

>

Multi-information system

1 Outline of multi-information system

MODE switch
SELECT switch
SET/RES switch
Multi-information display
Information area
Warning/indicator area
Transmission information area
Odometer/trip meter area
Time/outside temperature area (outside temper-
ature indication is available for vehicles with a
fully automatic air conditioner)

The multi-information system indicates the following

types of information on the multi-information display
located on the meter cluster.
• Information area: coolant temperature, amount
of PM in the DPF, and vehicle-related informa-
tion including the maintenance schedule.
• Warning/indicator area: various warnings and
indicators. P. 6-19
• Transmission information area: gear positions
selected by the DUONIC ® system and other
Z24964 transmission-related information.
P. 5-23
• Odometer/trip meter: total running distance and
individual trip distance.
• The MODE, SELECT, and SET/RES switches
are used for selection, setting, and confirmation
on each screen.
 6-7

2 Odometer/trip meter
When the starter switch is turned to “ON”, either
“ODO” (odometer) or “TRIP” (trip meter) is dis-
played. The display toggles between “ODO” and
“TRIP” each time the ODO/TRIP switch is
pressed.
ODO/TRI
• ODO (odometer)
Indicates the total distance covered by the vehicle
to the nearest kilometer (or mile).
ODO/TRI
• TRIP (trip meter)
Indicates the distance covered by the vehicle from a
selected point to the present point to the nearest 0.1
ODO/TRI kilometer (or 0.1 mile).
The trip meter has two options: TRIP “A” and TRIP
“B”. The indications are independent of each other.
To reset the trip meter to zero, press the ODO/TRIP
switch for at least 1 second. The count of only the
currently displayed option will return to “0.0”.

Z24965

NOTE:
If the unit of fuel mileage is changed, the unit for the
odometer and trip meter indication changes accord-
ingly. For information on the fuel mileage display
unit, see page 6-13.

Z24966
6-8 Instruments and warning lamps

3 Display mode selection and settings

3.1 Display mode selection
You can select a desired display mode by pressing
the MODE switch .

(MWTPE]QSHIW

7LSVXTVIWW YTXSWIGSRH SR13()W[MXGL

0SRKTVIWW WIGSRHSVPSRKIV SR13()W[MXGL

>

No. Display mode Ref. page

Calendar and clock 6-9
Outside air temperature (vehicles with fully automatic air conditioner) 6-11
DPF monitor 6-12
Fuel mileage information 6-13
Maintenance information 6-14
Illumination intensity (brightness adjustment) 6-18
 6-9

3.2 Calendar and clock

• Date/time
Press the MODE switch to display the date
and time on the screen.

Z24968

• If you press the SELECT switch while the

date and time are displayed on the screen, the
month part of the date will change from numeri-
cal representation to English representation.

Z24969

• Date and time adjustment

Z24984
6-10 Instruments and warning lamps

1. Give a long press on the SET/RES switch

while the date and time indication is displayed
on the screen. The adjustment screen will
appear.
2. Each time you press the SET/RES switch, one
of the indication items is selected in the
sequence shown below with the selected item
flashing. The cycle repeats if you press the
switch repeatedly.
Initial display screen (date/time display)
Time display mode Year Month
Day Hour Minute Initial display
screen
While the item you want to set is flashing, press
the MODE switch or SELECT switch to
make adjustments.
• The 12-hour clock will be displayed if you select
“12 h” on the time display mode screen; select-
ing “24 h” will change the display to the 24-hour
clock.
• Press the SELECT switch to advance the indi-
cation. Each long press (0.5 second or longer)
will move the value forward by 2 years, 2
months, 2 days, 2 hours, or 10 minutes.
• Press the MODE switch to retard the indication.
Each long press (0.5 second or longer) will
move the value backward by 2 years, 2 months,
2 days, 2 hours, or 10 minutes.
3. After completing necessary adjustments, press
the SET/RES switch.
4. Press the SET/RES switch as many times as
necessary to go back to the initial display
screen.

• Adjusting the clock to time signals

While the display is in the calendar and clock
mode, you can adjust the clock to a time signal
by pressing the SET/RES switch and releasing
the switch simultaneously with a time signal.
Example:
The clock will be adjusted to 11:00
if its current indication is between 11:00 and
11:29.
The clock will be adjusted to 12:00
if its current indication is between 11:30 and
11:59.
NOTE:
• If the date is set, the day of the week will be
automatically adjusted to the new date.
• The calendar can be adjusted for the period
between January 1, 2009 and December 31,
2039.
 6-11

3.3 Outside air temperature <vehicles with

fully automatic air conditioner>
If you select the outside air temperature mode by
pressing the MODE switch , the outside air tem-
perature around the front of the cab is indicated.
NOTE:
As the temperature is sensed at the outside air inlet
on the cab, the indicated temperature may differ
from the actual outside air temperature under cer-
tain traffic or air conditioner operating conditions.
Z24970
• The following selections and settings are possi-
ble for the outside air temperature mode:
• Selecting the unit of temperature display
between degree Celsius (°C) and degree
Fahrenheit (°F)
• Selecting the bottom-left display on the
screen between temperature and time
• Setting an alarm when the outside air tem-
perature falls below a preset temperature

• Selections and settings in outside air tem-

perature mode

SET/RES

MODE SELECT

SET/RES
SET/RES

MODE SELECT

SET/RES

MODE SELECT

SET/RES

Z24971
6-12 Instruments and warning lamps

1. Select the outside air temperature mode by

pressing the MODE switch .
Give a long press on the SET/RES switch to
display the adjustment screen .
2. Select the adjusting/setting item using the SET/
RES switch. Each time you press the SET/RES
switch, the display changes in the following
sequence:
Temperature unit selection Time/temperature
selection Temperature alarm on/off setting
• The temperature unit can be changed between
degree Fahrenheit (°F) and degree Celsius
(°C) by pressing the MODE switch or
SELECT switch on the temperature unit
selection screen .
• The bottom-left display can be changed between
temperature and time indications by pressing
either the MODE switch or SELECT switch on the
time/temperature selection screen .
• Method for setting temperature alarm on/off
On the temperature alarm on/off setting screen
, press the MODE switch to activate the out-
side air temperature alarm and press the
SELECT switch to deactivate the alarm. Once
the alarm is activated, you can set an alarm
temperature between –5°C and 5°C (23°F
and 41°F). The alarm is issued by the tempera-
ture indication at the bottom-left on the screen
flashing for about 1 minute when the set temper-
ature is reached.

3.4 DPF monitor

This display mode indicates the amount of PM in
the DPF, a prompt for performing parked DPF
regeneration, and the predicted time until comple-
tion of parked DPF regeneration. If the situation
requires, the DPF monitor also provides the driver
with necessary warnings and indications.

Z24972

• If the DPF contains PM equivalent to 7 or more

segments of the indicator, a message is dis-
played prompting you to perform the parked
DPF regeneration.

Z24973

See page 5-62 or 5-70 (vehicles with a BlueTec®

system) for details about the DPF.
 6-13

3.5 Fuel mileage information

The fuel mileage information includes: average fuel
mileage , real-time fuel mileage , instantaneous
fuel mileage , and average speed .
• The average fuel mileage indicates the average
of the fuel mileage from the time it was last reset
to the present.
SELECT • The real-time fuel mileage indicates the fuel
mileage in the last 0.5-second period.
• The average vehicle speed indicates the aver-
age speed at which the vehicle has been driven
SELECT since the last reset.
• The instantaneous fuel mileage is the fuel mile-
age over the past 1-minute period.

SELECT • How to switch the display

1. Press the MODE switch to select the fuel
mileage information mode .
2. Press the SELECT switch to change the display.
Each time you press the SELECT switch, the
following pairs of information will be displayed
one after another.
• Average mileage and real-time mileage
Z24974 • Average mileage and average vehicle speed
• Instantaneous mileage and average mileage

• How to reset the mileage and speed data

You can reset both the average vehicle speed and
average mileage data by giving a long press (1 sec-
ond or more) on the SET/RES switch .

• Adjusting the correction coefficient for fuel

mileage data and selecting the unit of fuel
mileage display
If necessary, you can change the correction coeffi-
cient for fuel mileage data and the unit of fuel mile-
age display as follows.
• Usually, there is no need to change the correc-
tion coefficient for fuel mileage data. However,
the coefficient should be changed if you notice
any significant difference between the actual
and indicated fuel mileages. Increasing the cor-
rection coefficient value will result in larger indi-
cations for all of the average, real-time, and
instantaneous fuel mileages. Reducing the
value decreases them.

Default value of correction coefficient 1.00

NOTE:
If you press the SET/RES switch for more than 1
second in the correction coefficient change screen,
the coefficient will return to the default value (1.00).

• The fuel mileages can be indicated in units of

“l/100 km”, “mpg”, or “km/l”.
• “l/100 km” indicates the amount of fuel in
litres that the vehicle has consumed to cover
a distance of 100 kilometers.
• “mpg” indicates the miles covered by the
vehicle on one gallon of fuel.
6-14 Instruments and warning lamps

• “km/l” indicates the kilometers covered by

the vehicle on one litre of fuel.

NOTE:
If the unit for fuel mileage is changed, the unit for
the odometer and trip meter indication changes
accordingly.
• If “l/100 km” or “km/l” is selected, the unit for the
odometer and trip meter indication becomes
“km”.
• If “mpg (USA)” or “mpg (UK)” is selected, the
unit for the odometer and trip meter becomes
“mi (mile)”.

1. Press the MODE switch to select the fuel

mileage information mode .
2. Press the SET/RES switch to display the
adjustment screen , then press the SET/RES
SET/RES switch. Each time you press the switch, the dis-
play toggles between the fuel mileage correction
coefficient (FUEL ADJUST) and the fuel mile-
age unit (SELECT UNIT) .
3. With the desired display selected, press the
SET/RES
SELECT switch or MODE switch to change
the correction coefficient or fuel mileage unit.
• Press the SELECT switch to increase the cor-
rection efficient, or the MODE switch to
decrease it. Continue to press each switch if you
want to change the value quickly.
• Use the SELECT switch to change the fuel mile-
SET/RES age unit. The unit changes in the following
sequence each time you press the switch:
“l/100 km” “mpg (USA)” “mpg (UK)” “km/l”
4. Press the SET/RES switch to return to the initial
display screen.

Z24975

3.6 Maintenance information

If you select this mode, the multi-information display
indicates the running distance and the number of
months since the distance was last reset after
replacing oils, fluids, or filter elements according to
your selection of screen.

Z24976
 6-15

• Selection of maintenance information screens

SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT

SELECT

Z24977

1. Press the MODE switch to select the mainte-

nance information mode .
2. Press the SELECT switch . Each time you
press the switch, the screen changes to the one
for a new replacement item in the following
sequence, beginning with the previously dis-
played screen:
ENGINE OIL OIL FILTER (Engine oil filter)
FUEL FILTER BRAKE FLUID AIR FIL-
TER T/M OIL (Transmission gear oil and/or
clutch control fluid <Vehicle with a
DUONIC®system>) HUB GREASE (Wheel
hub bearing grease) DIFF OIL (Differential
oil) P/S OIL (Power steering oil) ENG
COOLANT (Engine coolant)
6-16 Instruments and warning lamps

• How to set replacement intervals

Set the replacement interval for each replacement
item according to the table below.
Item Replacement interval
Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or every 24 months
ENGINE OIL Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles) or every 12 months
at the severe use
OIL FILTER (Engine oil filter) Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or every 24 months
FUEL FILTER Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or every 12 months
BRAKE FLUID Every 36 months
AIR FILTER Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles)
T/M OIL (Transmission gear oil and/or clutch con-
Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles)
trol fluid <Vehicle with a DUONIC ® system>)
HUB GREASE (Wheel hub bearing grease) Every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)
DIFF OIL (Differential gear oil) Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles) or every 24 months
It is not necessary to set the replacement interval
P/S OIL (Power steering oil) because replacement of the power steering fluid is not
periodic.
ENG COOLANT (Engine coolant) Every 24 months

1. Press the MODE switch to select the mainte-

nance information mode .
2. Press the SELECT switch to select the
screen for the replacement item for which you
want to set the interval.
3. Press the SET/RES switch to select the inter-
val distance setting screen (with “km” or “mi”
indicated). The numerals indicating the distance
SET/RES blink once this screen is selected.
SET/RES 4. Press the SELECT switch or MODE switch to
change the distance.
• Each time you press the SELECT switch, the
distance value increases by 1,000 km or 500
miles.
• Each time you press the MODE switch, the dis-
SET/RES tance value decreases by 1,000 km or 500
miles.
• A long press on the SELECT or MODE switch
increases or decreases the distance value by
5,000 km or 2,500 miles, respectively.
• If the replacement interval is controlled by the
period of time (not by the distance), leave the
distance space blank “---- km” or “---- mi”.
Z24978 5. Press the SET/RES switch to select the inter-
val period setting screen (with “month” indi-
cated). The numerals indicating the period of
time blink once this screen is selected.
6. Press the SELECT switch or MODE switch to
change the value of the period.
• Each time you press the SELECT switch, the
period increases by 1 month.
• Each time you press the MODE switch, the
period decreases by 1 month.
• A long press on the SELECT or MODE switch
increases or decreases the period by 2 months,
respectively.
• If the replacement interval is controlled by the
distance (not by the period of time), leave the
period space blank (“-- month”).
 6-17

7. Press the SET/RES switch to return to the main-

tenance information mode .
8. Give a long press on the SET/RES switch until
“0 km” and “0 months” are indicated in the main-
tenance information mode to reset the mainte-
nance information.

• Maintenance alarm indication

• For each item for which you have set the
replacement interval, an alarm is indicated at
1,000 km, 600 mile or 1 month before the set
distance or period of time is reached.
If this condition is met for an item, an alarm will
be indicated for the item every time the starter
switch is turned to “ON”. The alarm indication
goes out as soon as the parking brake is
released. If there are multiple alarms to indicate,
they are indicated one after another, each being
indicated for 3 seconds.
Z24979

• If a periodic replacement item is used continu-

ously even after the set distance or period is
reached, the maintenance information symbol
will turn to amber .

Z24980

• Resetting of maintenance information

After replacing a periodic replacement item such as
the oil, filter element, or engine coolant, reset the
maintenance information for the item as follows:
1. Press the MODE switch to select the mainte-
nance information mode.
2. Press the SELECT switch to select the item
for which the maintenance information is to be
reset.
3. Give a long press (1 second or more) on the
SET/RES switch to reset the maintenance
information.
Z24981
NOTE:
Do the same procedure after replacing any periodic
replacement item.
6-18 Instruments and warning lamps

3.7 Illumination intensity (brightness adjust-

ment)
• Selection and adjustment of illumination
intensity
• Both the illumination intensity screen and the
adjustment screen provide different displays
between the time when the light switch is in the
“OFF” position and the time when the switch is
in the or position as follows:
• When the light switch is in the “OFF” posi-
tion, the multi-information display indicates
“DISP (DAY)” or “GAUGE (DAY)”. In this
state, the brightness of the displays or
gauges under no illumination condition (day-
time) is adjustable.
• When the light switch is in the or
position, the multi-information display indi-
cates “DISP (NIGHT)” or “GAUGE (NIGHT)”.
In this state, the brightness of displays or
gauges when lit (nighttime) can be adjusted.
• The brightness of the following display and
gauges can be adjusted as follows.
• When “DISP (DAY)” or “DISP (NIGHT)” is
Z24982 displayed:
Multi-information display
• When “GAUGE (DAY)” or “GAUGE (NIGHT)”
is displayed:
Urea level indicator
• When “GAUGE (NIGHT)” is displayed:
Illumination of the air conditioner and heater
control panel and the scales of the speed-
ometer, tachometer, and fuel gauge (when
the light switch is in the or position)
1. Press the MODE switch to select the illumina-
tion intensity mode .
2. Press the SELECT switch . Each time you
press the switch, the display toggles between
“DISP (DAY)” and “GAUGE (DAY)” . When
the light switch is in the or position, the
display toggles between “DISP (NIGHT)” and
“GAUGE (NIGHT)”.
3. With the item to be adjusted displayed on the
screen, press the SET/RES switch to
advance to the adjustment screen .
4. Adjust the brightness using the MODE switch or
SELECT switch.
• Press the MODE switch to reduce the bright-
ness.
• Press the SELECT switch to increase the bright-
ness.
5. Return to the illumination intensity display by
pressing the SET/RES switch.

Z24983
 6-19

Warning/indicator telltale

The warning/indicator telltale function provides

warning and indicator indications on the multi-infor-
mation display in the following situations:
• When a problem occurs with a vehicle system
• When a system is activated
• When the distance/period remaining before the
replacement time becomes short

1 Telltale indications
1.1 Indication colours
Warnings or indicators are displayed in any of the
following colours according to their categories:
• Red
• Amber
• Black

1.2 If there are multiple warnings

If there are multiple warnings to display, all of these
warnings are displayed one after another and
repeatedly, each being displayed for 3 seconds.

Z21500

2 Categories of warnings and indicators

WARNING
Red indications require you to immediately
stop the vehicle at a safe place and take nec-
essary actions. Continuing to drive without
taking necessary actions could lead to a seri-
ous accident.

CAUTION
Amber indications alert you to a malfunction or
degraded functionality of components. You
should continue to drive carefully for the rest of
the trip and then take necessary actions as
soon as possible.
6-20 Instruments and warning lamps

2.1 Red and amber indications

Ref.
Indication Warning/indicator Condition for lighting/flashing
page

Engine system warning Engine power is being automatically 6-23

restricted.
(red)

Engine system warning Engine must be inspected. 6-23

(amber)

Transmission oil temperature warning Clutch control fluid or the clutch temperature 6-23
(red) <Vehicles with DUONIC® system> is too high.*

Transmission control warning

DUONIC® system is faulty. 6-24
(red) <Vehicles with DUONIC® system>

Transmission control warning DUONIC® system is faulty (but automatic or

6-24
(amber) <Vehicles with DUONIC® system> manual gear shifting is possible).

Cab tilt lock is not completely engaged. (A

Cab tilt warning
<Vehicles other than Crew-cab models> buzzer will sound at a vehicle speed of 5 km/ 12-8
(red) h (3 mph) or higher.)

Failure has occurred in electric control sys-

SAM warning tem of SAM. 6-24
(red)

Failure has occurred in electric control sys-

SAM warning tem of SAM (a failure that requires inspec- 6-24
(amber) tion of exterior lamps).

Overloaded DPF warning DPF contains too much PM. 5-58

(amber)

Meter cluster warning Electrical system of meter cluster is faulty. 6-25

(amber)

The amount of fuel mixed with engine oil has

exceeded the upper limit. (Some fuel is
Engine oil level warning 6-25
(amber)
intentionally mixed with engine oil to burn
PM in DPF.)

Fuel filter warning Water in fuel filter has increased. 12-52

(amber)

The electrical balance between the main

Battery equaliser warning battery and battery for body equipment is 6-25
(red) <Vehicles with battery equaliser>
abnormal.
*: The following actions will cause excessive slipping of the clutch and heat generation:
• Holding the stopped vehicle on an up slope using only the accelerator pedal and moving the vehicle
very slowly for a long time.
• Depressing the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped with the gearshift lever in the “D” or
“R” position and the brake pedal depressed or the parking brake applied.
• Moving the vehicle very slowly repeatedly to drive over a high step or curb.
 6-21

Ref.
Indication Warning/indicator Condition for lighting/flashing
page

ASR system warning

<Vehicles with an ESP® system> The ASR system is faulty. 8-12
(amber)

ASR cutoff indicator

The ASR function is turned off. 8-12
(amber)
<Vehicles with an ESP® system>

Lane departure warning system warning

<Vehicles with the lane departure warn- Lane departure warning system is faulty. 8-17
(amber) ing system>
6-22 Instruments and warning lamps

2.2 Black indications

Ref.
Indication Warning/indicator Condition for lighting/flashing
page
ASR indicator
Lights when the ASR is operating. 8-12
<Vehicles with an ESP ® system>
PTO indicator
Lights when transmission PTO is engaged. 8-2
<Vehicles with transmission PTO>
PTO engagement preparation indicator
Lights when transmission PTO is preparing
<Vehicles with DUONIC® system and to engage. 8-2
PTO>
Distance or period remaining before sched-
uled engine oil replacement time has
Engine oil replacement alert indicator 6-14
become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or
1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Engine oil filter replacement alert indica- uled engine oil filter replacement time has 6-14
tor become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or
1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Fuel filter replacement alert indicator uled fuel filter replacement time has become 6-14
shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or 1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
uled brake fluid replacement time has
Brake fluid replacement alert indicator 6-14
become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or
1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Air cleaner replacement alert indicator uled air cleaner replacement time has 6-14
become shorter than 1,000 km or 1 month
Vehicles with DUONIC® system:
Distance or period remaining before scheduled
clutch control fluid and transmission oil
replacement time has become shorter than
Transmission oil replacement alert 1,000 km (600 miles) or 1 month 6-14
indicator Manual transmission vehicles:
The distance or time remaining before the
scheduled transmission oil replacement time
has become shorter than 1,000 km (600
miles) or 1 month
Distance or time remaining before scheduled
Wheel hub bearing grease replacement wheel hub bearing grease replacement has
6-14
alert indicator become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or
1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Differential gear oil replacement alert uled differential gear oil replacement time 6-14
indicator has become shorter than 1,000 km (600
miles) or 1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Power steering oil replacement alert uled power steering oil replacement time has 6-14
indicator become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or
1 month
Distance or period remaining before sched-
Engine coolant replacement alert uled engine coolant replacement time has
indicator become shorter than 1,000 km (600 miles) or 6-14
1 month
 6-23

2.3 Engine system warning

• Red warning
If an engine system warning is shown, have the
vehicle inspected by the nearest authorised MITSU-
BISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

• Amber warning
If an engine system warning is shown, have the
vehicle inspected by the nearest authorised MITSU-
BISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
Z21711

2.4 Transmission oil temperature warning

<Vehicles with DUONIC® system>
This warning is displayed when the clutch control
fluid or the clutch temperature is too high. If this
indication appears, do the following:
• The warning appears and the buzzer sounds
three times (when the clutch control fluid
temperature is too high)
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and be sure to
fully apply the parking brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position.
Z21712
Depress the accelerator pedal to run the engine
at a speed slightly higher than the idling speed
in order to cool down the clutch control fluid.
3. If the warning disappears, you may continue to
drive. If the warning remains on or is indicated
repeatedly, transmission oil leak age may be the
cause. Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
• The warning appears and the buzzer contin-
ues sounding (when the clutch temperature
is too high)
1. The clutch temperature is overheating because
many half clutches is used. Select a lower gear
than usual in the manual shift mode and start.
2. If the indication remains displayed, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and be sure to fully apply
the parking brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” position.
Depress the accelerator pedal to run the engine
at a speed slightly higher than the idling speed
in order to cool down the clutch.
4. If the warning disappears and the buzzer stops,
you may continue to drive. If the warning or the
buzzer remains on, contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

CAUTION
Do not stop the engine without letting the trans-
mission cool down otherwise the transmission
may seize up. Stop the engine only after the
warning has disappeared from the screen.
6-24 Instruments and warning lamps

2.5 Transmission control warning

<Vehicles with DUONIC ® system>
• Red warning
The red transmission control warning is displayed
when the DUONIC® system is faulty.
If this indication appears while driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and move the
gearshift lever to “P”.
2. Turn the starter switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
3. Turn the starter switch to “ON”.
Z21713 4. If the indication remains displayed, avoid con-
tinuing to drive and contact your nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Amber warning
The amber transmission control warning is dis-
played when the DUONIC® system is faulty (but
automatic or manual gear shifting is possible).
• If driving in the automatic shift mode is possible,
you may continue to drive but must have the
vehicle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer as soon as possible.
• If no automatic gearshift takes place when driv-
ing in the automatic gearshift mode, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and move the
gearshift lever to “P”.
2. Turn the starter switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
3. Turn the starter switch to “ON”.
4. If the warning remains displayed but driving in
the manual gearshift mode is possible, take the
vehicle to an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer for inspection as soon as
possible.
5. If the warning remains displayed and gear shift-
ing is impossible in the manual gearshift mode,
contact your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

2.6 SAM warning

NOTE:
SAM, which stands for Signal Detect and Actuation
Module, is a module that integrates the control and
power distribution functions for the electric equip-
ment of the cab and truck body.
• Red warning
The red SAM warning is displayed when a failure
occurs in the electric control system of the SAM.
If this warning appears while driving, stop the vehi-
Z21714 cle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position (manual
transmission vehicles) or in the “P” position
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system).
2. Turn the starter switch to “LOCK”.
3. Turn the starter switch back to “ON”. If the indi-
cation goes out, there are no problems. If the
warning remains displayed, contact your near-
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer immediately.
 6-25

• Amber warning
The amber SAM warning is displayed when a failure
(of a type that requires inspection of exterior lamps)
occurs in the electric control system of the SAM.
If this warning appears while driving, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position (manual
transmission vehicles) or in the “P” position
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system).
2. Turn the starter switch to “LOCK”.
3. Check the exterior lamps for abnormalities.
Replace a blown lamp if any. P. 13-16
4. Turn the starter switch back to “ON”.
5. Switch on the replaced lamp. If the warning
goes out, there is no remaining problem with the
SAM.
6. If the warning remains displayed, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer as soon as possible.

2.7 Meter cluster warning

This warning is displayed when the electrical sys-
tem of the meter cluster is faulty.
If this warning appears while driving, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position (manual
transmission vehicles) or in the “P” position
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system).
2. Turn the starter switch to “LOCK”.
3. Turn the starter switch back to “ON”. If the warn-
Z21715
ing goes out, there are no problems.
4. If the warning remains displayed, do not con-
tinue to drive but contact your nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer
immediately.

2.8 Engine oil level warning

This warning is displayed when the amount of fuel
mixed with engine oil has exceeded the limit.
• If this warning is displayed, replace the engine
oil as soon as possible.
• If even more fuel is mixed with engine oil, this
warning and the (amber) warning are alter-
nately displayed. If this happens, replace the
engine oil immediately.

Z21719

2.9 Battery equaliser warning

<Vehicles with battery equaliser>
This warning is displayed when the electrical bal-
ance between the main battery and the battery for
body equipment becomes abnormal.
If this warning appears while driving, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do the following:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position (manual
transmission vehicles) or in the “P” position
(vehicles with a DUONIC® system).
Z21502 2. Turn the starter switch to “LOCK”.
6-26 Instruments and warning lamps

3. Turn the starter switch back to “ON”. If the warn-

ing goes out, there are no problems.
4. If the warning remains displayed, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer as soon as possible.

Warning/indicator lamps

0S[JYIP[EVRMRKPEQT 9VIEPIZIP[EVRMRKPEQT

=

The illustration shows the standard arrangement of

the warning and indicator lamps. Some lamps
shown here, however, may not be installed on your
vehicle.

CAUTION
The red warning lamps if illuminated warn you
of vehicle component failures and possible dan-
ger of accident. Never drive the vehicle while a
red warning lamp is illuminated. If any of them
light up stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and make checks for locating the cause. If
necessary have your vehicle repaired by your
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.

NOTE:
The red warning lamps may also come on if the
engine is started when the battery’s performance
has decreased. In this event, either charge the bat-
tery or replace the battery with a new one.
 6-27

Lamp Ref.
symbol Warning/indicator lamp If illuminated page

1-4
Fuel level warning lamp Level of fuel in fuel tank excessively low 6-4

5-46
Turn signal indicator lamp Turn signal or hazard warning lamps flashing
5-49

Headlamp high beam indicator lamp Headlamp high beams illuminated 5-46

Front fog lamp indicator lamp Front fog lamp in operation 5-50

Rear fog lamp indicator lamp Rear fog lamp in operation 5-50

Vacuum pressure warning lamp Excessively low vacuum in vacuum system –

Brake fluid at an excessively low level 12-33

Brake warning lamp
Parking brake activated 5-44

Exhaust brake indicator lamp Exhaust brake activated 5-47

Engine preheat indicator lamp Engine being preheated 5-6

Charge warning lamp Problem in battery charging system 13-9

Engine oil pressure warning lamp Excessively low engine oil pressure 12-22

Urea level warning lamp

Quantity of AdBlue® in urea tank has fallen too low 5-71
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system>

• Quantity of AdBlue® in urea tank has fallen too low

• Very high level of the NOx level of exhaust emis-
sions due to an abnormality of the quality of
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment warning lamp AdBlue® 5-70
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system> • Very low consumption of AdBlue®
• Fault of BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment
• Fault on EGR (Exhaust Gas Recirculation) system

Engine overheating warning lamp Engine overheating 13-8

Cruise control indicator lamp Cruise control activated 5-38

<Vehicles with a cruise control>

Fast flashing Preparation for auto-

(0.5-second matic engine stop in
interval) progress
Slow flashing
(2-second Automatic engine
interval) stop in progress
ISS is
ISS indicator lamp operating Automatic engine 5-13
Illuminated start is cancelled.
• Buzzer (Door is opened dur-
sounds ing automatic engine
stop.)

Illuminated System failure

4WD indicator lamp <FG> Four-wheel drive (4WD) mode selected 8-5
6-28 Instruments and warning lamps

Lamp Warning/indicator lamp If illuminated Ref.

symbol page

Flashing The ESP® is in operation

®
ESP indicator and warning lamp
8-12
<Vehicles with an ESP® system>
®
Illuminated Failure of the ESP

ESP® OFF indicator lamp

The ESP® function is turned off. 8-12
<Vehicles with an ESP® system>

• Fault in engine control system

• Exhaust gas is abnormal or BlueTec® exhaust gas 5-73
Engine control warning lamp
aftertreatment is faulty. 6-32
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system>

• Failure of ABS system

ABS warning lamp • The ESP® functions will be disabled. <Vehicles with 8-23
ESP®>

• Defective communication of engine immobiliser

Engine immobiliser warning lamp starter key 3-3
• Failure of engine immobiliser

SRS air bag warning

<Vehicles with SRS air bags> The electrical system of SRS air bags is faulty. 4-10

Slow flashing
(0.5-second interval; amber)
DPF contains a lot of
PM
Fast flashing
(0.25-second interval; amber)
DPF indicator lamp 5-54
5-63
Illuminated (amber) Parked DPF regener-
ation in progress

Automatic DPF
Illuminated (green) regeneration in
progress

Lane departure warning system cutoff indicator lamp

Lane departure warning system function disabled 8-17
<Vehicles with the lane departure warning system>

The warning lamps shown below come on when the starter switch is turned from the “ACC” position to the
“ON” position but almost immediately go off.
Lamp
symbol Warning lamp Operation

Goes off when engine is started.(Remain illuminated while

Brake warning lamp
the parking brake is applied.)

Vacuum pressure warning lamp Goes off when engine is started.

Charge warning lamp Goes off when engine is started.

Engine oil pressure/level warning lamp Goes off when engine is started.
 6-29

Lamp
symbol Warning lamp Operation

Goes off when engine is started.

Engine control warning lamp ( This lamp lights up or flashes until the engine is started.
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system> )

Goes off a few seconds after starter switch is turned to “ON”

ABS warning lamp position.

Goes off a few seconds after starter switch is turned to “ON”

Engine immobiliser warning lamp position.

Urea level warning lamp Goes off a few seconds after the starter switch is turned to
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system> the “ON” position.

Urea level indicator lamp Goes off a few seconds after the starter switch is turned to
<Vehicles with BlueTec® system> the “ON” position.

ESP® warning lamp Goes off a few seconds after the starter switch is turned to
<Vehicles with an ESP® system> the “ON” position.
6-30 Instruments and warning lamps

1 Vacuum pressure warning lamp

WARNING
Braking is dangerously sluggish when the
vacuum warning lamp is illuminated. For
safety never drive with the vehicle in this
condition.

This lamp illuminates when the starter switch is

Z24950 turned to the “ON” position. As long as the lamp
goes out when the engine is started, the vehicle
may be driven. If illuminated while the engine is run-
ning, this lamp signals that the vacuum level in the
brake vacuum system has dropped below the safe
limit.
Since braking becomes sluggish under this condi-
tion, depress the brake pedal with full force to slow
down the vehicle, then pull off the road as soon as it
is safe to do so, and perform the following checks:
1. Let the engine run at intermediate RPM until the
warning lamp goes out.
2. Check piping and its connections for vacuum
leaks.
3. If the lamp does not go out or comes on again
soon after it has gone out, the vacuum system is
defective and must be repaired. Call an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

2 Brake warning lamp

WARNING
If the brake warning lamp comes on owing to
an excessively low level of brake fluid the
brakes will not be fully effective and driving
will thus be dangerous. Do not drive the vehi-
cle in this condition.

Z10836 This lamp lights up when the parking brake lever is

pulled or when the brake fluid level drops below the
safe limit. Should the lamp remain illuminated even
after the parking brake lever has been released or
light up during driving, pull off the road as soon as it
is safe to do so, and perform the checks below.
With the starter switch in the “ON” position and the
engine not running, the warning lamp will stay on
even if the parking brake lever is released. The
lamp will go out if the engine is started.
1. Check the brake fluid level.
Replenish the reservoir if the level is too low.
P. 12-33
2. Pump the brake pedal several times to make
sure that the fluid level does not drop.
3. If the fluid level drops, it indicates fluid leakage.
Call an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.
 6-31

3 Charge warning lamp

The charge warning lamp lights up when the starter
switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out
as soon as the alternator starts charging the battery
after the engine has turned over.
The lamp also lights up if a problem occurs in the
battery charging system while the engine is running.
If this occurs, pull off the road as soon as it is safe to
do so, and perform the following checks.
1. Check the V-belt for breakage and excessive
Z10484 deflection. P. 12-62
2. If both the above checks have turned out nor-
mal, the problem is probably in the battery
charging system.
Call an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.

4 Engine oil pressure warning lamp

The engine oil pressure/level warning lamp lights up
when the starter switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion and goes out as soon as the engine is turned
over. If the lamp lights up while the engine is run-
ning, the cause may be an excessively low engine
oil pressure. Pull off the road as soon as it is safe to
do so, and perform the following checks.
1. Check the engine oil level. Add if insufficient.
P. 12-22
Z10476 2. Check various parts of the engine for any sign of
oil leaks.
3. If the oil level is normal and there are no oil
leaks, the problem is in the lubrication system.
Call an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.

CAUTION
Never continue driving with the lamp illumi-
nated. The engine could seize up.
6-32 Instruments and warning lamps

5 Engine control warning lamp

• If the engine control system or BlueTec®
exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions are
detected, this lamp lights up. Depending on the
type of malfunctions, the engine power may be
restricted.
If this lamp lights up, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor
or dealer immediately.
• Also when the starter key is turned to “ON”, this
lamp lights up.
If there is not malfunctions, it should go out after
Z11009 the engine is started.
If this lamp doesn't light up when the starter key
is turned to “ON”, it may be faulty. Have the
vehicle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer immediately.

Lamp activation when the engine is started

<Vehicles without BlueTec® system>

When the starter key is turned to “ON”, this lamp
lights up.
And it should go out after the engine is started.
If this lamp remains lit after the engine is started,
the engine control system may be faulty.

<Vehicles with BlueTec® system>

When the starter key is turned to “ON”, this lamp
lights up with three successive signalling phases.
The first phase is the lamp check. The lamp lights
up for approximately five seconds and then goes
out for approximately ten seconds.
The second phase indicates the system check sta-
tus. The lamp either goes on again or flashes for
approximately five seconds. It then goes out for
approximately five seconds.
The third phase is the indication whether any emis-
sions-related malfunctions have been detected.
• If no emissions-related malfunctions are
detected, the lamp lights up briefly and then
goes out for approximately five seconds.
This flashing sequence is repeated until the
engine is started.
• If an emissions-related malfunction is
detected, the lamp flashes three times and
then goes out for approximately five sec-
onds. This flashing sequence is repeated
until the engine is started. The lamp remains
lit for approximately 15seconds after the
engine is started.
• If a serious emissions-related malfunction is
detected or an emissions-related malfunc-
tion is still present and more than 200hours
have elapsed since detection, the lamp lights
up and remains lit after the engine is started.
 6-33

6 ABS warning lamp

This lamp comes on when the starter key is turned
to “ON”. It should go out a few seconds later. If the
lamp comes on again, this indicates there is a mal-
function in the antilock braking system (ABS).
Should this lamp illuminate during driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and perform the following
inspection.
1. Turn the starter key to the “OFF” position and
then to the “ON” position again.
Z10880
2. Determine the system condition as follows:
• The system is normal if the warning lamp goes
out a few seconds later.
• The system is faulty if the warning lamp stays on
for longer than a few seconds or it goes off but
comes on again.
• The system is normal if the warning lamp goes
off in a few seconds after the starter key is
turned to “ON”. The system is also normal if the
warning lamp does not go off a few seconds but
then goes off as soon as the vehicle is started.
3. If the system is found to be faulty, have the sys-
tem repaired by an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Even with the ABS faulty and the warning lamp
remaining lit, the normal brake system is still
functioning satisfactorily. Only the ABS function
is lost. Drive with great care on slippery surfaces
with the vehicle in this condition.
• If the warning lamp is illuminated, the ESP®
functions will be disabled. <Vehicles with ESP®>

7 Engine overheating warning lamp

When the engine overheats, this lamp illuminates,
the indication (red) is displayed on the multi-
information display and a buzzer sounds. If engine
overheating occurs, the coolant temperature indica-
tor will indicate the overheat zone. The buzzer will
stop sounding if you apply the brakes by pulling the
parking lever.
Promptly stop the vehicle, then run the engine at a
speed slightly higher than the idling speed until the
Z10486 coolant has cooled down. Also, take other steps
that are necessary following overheating of the
engine. P. 13-8

WARNING
Driving with an overheated engine can dam-
age the engine or even cause a fire.

CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine only after letting it
run at a speed slightly above the idling RPM
until the coolant cools down. Turning off the
engine immediately after stopping will cause the
coolant temperature to rise quickly and may
cause the engine to seize up.
6-34 Instruments and warning lamps

8 Engine immobiliser warning lamp

This lamp should normally come on when the
starter switch is turned to “ON” and go out a few
seconds later. If the lamp fails to go out, communi-
cation with the engine immobiliser starter key may
be obstructed or the engine immobiliser itself may
be faulty. In this case, perform the following inspec-
tion.

8.1 When the engine cannot be started

Z21718
• Check whether a metal piece or another key is
in contact with the engine immobiliser starter
key. If you find any metal piece or another key
touching the starter key, separate them, turn the
starter switch back to “ACC” or “LOCK”, and
then try starting the engine.
• The engine immobiliser is normal if the engine
can be started and the warning lamp goes
out.
• If the engine cannot be started and the
warning lamp remains lit, try starting the engine
using another registered starter key. If you still
cannot start the engine, the engine immobiliser
is probably faulty; contact an authorised MITSU-
BISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

8.2 When the engine can be started

• Turn the starter switch back to “ACC” or “LOCK”
and then restart the engine.
• If the warning lamp goes out, the engine
immobiliser is normal.
• If the engine cannot be started and the
warning lamp remains lit, the engine immobiliser
is probably faulty. Contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer as soon
as possible.

Tachograph

• The tachograph records vehicle speeds, dis-

tances driven, and other information.
• For instructions on using the tachograph, refer
to the separate tachograph owner’s handbook.
 7-1

7. Starting and driving

Precautions when setting the vehicle in motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Precautions for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tips for improving fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
On uphill and downhill roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
On rough roads and in bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Loading cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-2 Starting and driving

Precautions when setting the vehicle

in motion

• Check the immediate area around the vehicle,

using mirrors as necessary: there should be no
persons or obstacles under, in front of, on either
side of, or behind the vehicle.
If you wish to reverse but cannot confirm safety
behind the vehicle using the mirrors, get out of
the vehicle and perform the check.
• Check that none of the red warning lamps are lit
and no warnings are indicated on the multi-infor-
mation display.
• Fully release the parking brake.
• Always set the vehicle in motion slowly. Sudden
starts and partially pressing the clutch pedal can
damage the clutch.
• On manual transmission vehicles, it is recom-
mended that when the vehicle is unladen, 2nd
gear should be used to pull away on level sur-
faces to improve fuel economy.

WARNING
Do not perform the following operations in a
vehicle with a DUONIC ® system. The vehicle
could abruptly start moving resulting in a
serious accident.
• When setting the vehicle in motion do not
operate the gearshift lever with the accel-
erator pedal pressed.
• Do not rev the engine while the vehicle is
stationary. If by some chance the gear-
shift lever is in a position other than “P” or
“N” the vehicle may abruptly start mov-
ing.

CAUTION
• When the gearshift lever of a vehicle with a
DUONIC ® system is placed in the “R” or “D”
position a phenomenon known as creep
causes the vehicle to start moving unless
the brakes are applied. When operating the
gearshift lever keep the brake pedal firmly
pressed. Release the parking brake after (not
before) operating the gearshift lever. Other-
wise the vehicle will unexpectedly start
moving resulting in an accident.
• In a vehicle with a DUONIC® system keep
the brake pedal firmly pressed even while
the gear position indicator is flashing. If the
vehicle were on a slope and you released the
brake pedal with the gear position indicator
flashing the absence of creep force would
allow the vehicle to roll downhill resulting in
an accident.
 7-3

• In a vehicle with a DUONIC® system, the gear-

shift lever cannot be moved from the “P” to “N”
positions, from the “N” to “P” positions, or from
the “N” to “R” positions if the brake pedal is not
pressed.
• Familiarize yourself with the methods for con-
trolling a vehicle with a DUONIC® system before
starting to drive it. P. 5-21

Precautions for driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Should you notice anything unusual about the vehi-
cle, immediately stop the vehicle and inspect the
relevant sections to find the cause of the trouble. If
you are unable to identify the cause of the trouble or
unable to do the repairs yourself, call your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

• Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

WARNING
• Never place the starter switch in any posi-
tion other than the “ON” position while
operating the vehicle.
If you turn the starter switch to the “ACC”
position the engine will stop. This is dan-
gerous.
If the engine stops during driving:
• The braking force reduces extremely.
• The power steering system becomes
inoperative rendering steering danger-
ously sluggish.
• The fuel injection system could suffer a
failure.
• The electrical circuits of the warning
lamps meters etc. become inoperative
causing electric components to mal-
function.
• Never use a slope to move the vehicle with
the engine stopped. This practice is very
dangerous and could lead to an accident
because when the engine is stopped the
steering wheel becomes difficult to oper-
ate and the brakes become much less
effective.
• Removing the starter key causes the steer-
ing wheel to lock making it impossible to
steer the vehicle.
7-4 Starting and driving

• Should the engine stall while the vehicle is in

motion, do not panic. Simply press the brake
pedal to slow the vehicle, and pull off the road
as soon as it is safe to do so.
• If a red warning lamp comes on, a warning is
indicated on the multi-information display, the
buzzer sounds, or the vehicle behaves abnor-
mally, stop the vehicle in the nearest safe place
and investigate the cause.
P. 6-19, 6-26
If you cannot identify the cause or cannot rectify
the problem, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Avoid making sharp turns and braking hard
except in emergencies. Doing so during high-
speed driving could cause the vehicle to tip over.
• On vehicles with a DUONIC® system, be sure to
press the brake pedal with the right foot. Operat-
ing the brake pedal with the unaccustomed left
foot may delay your reaction in emergencies
and cause unforeseen accidents.
• If you notice a strange noise, vibration, or smell,
or if steering or braking feels unusual, pull the
vehicle off the road as soon as it is safe to do so
and check for the source of the trouble. If you
cannot determine the cause of the problem and/
or cannot rectify it, contact the nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• When driving on narrow streets or when making
a turn, keep in mind that the tracking of the front
and rear inner wheels is different, and also
make sure of rearward safety using the rearview
mirrors.
• Remember that the mirrors protrude from the
vehicle body. Be careful not to hit pedestrians
and obstructions with the mirrors when driving
on narrow roads.
Looking at the mirrors while driving causes your
line of vision to move significantly. Be sure to
keep paying attention to safety ahead of the
vehicle.
• Do not keep the steering wheel turned fully to
either side for more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause the power steering system to mal-
function.
• Do not try to forcefully turn the steering wheel
when the front wheels are stuck against a curb-
stone or other object. Doing so could cause the
steering gearbox to fail.
• Continuous high-speed driving burdens the
engine and other vehicle parts. Allow yourself
enough time that you do not need to push the
vehicle too hard.
• Perform your pre-operation checks with particu-
lar care when you expect to drive at high
speeds.
When continuously driving at high speeds, your
sense of speed may become dull. Pay constant
attention to your speed, and maintain an ade-
quate distance from the preceding vehicle.
 7-5

• If a tyre bursts or gets punctured while you are

driving, do not panic. Keep a firm grip on the
steering wheel and gradually reduce your
speed. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
place. Do not brake sharply. Braking sharply
would be dangerous because the steering wheel
would be pulled to one side with great force.
• Do not drive your vehicle if a tyre has been
punctured. Failure to observe this precaution will
expose the wheel bolts to excessive force, and
this in turn could lead to bolt or wheel damage.
• When driving at high speeds in the rain, the
tyres sometimes ride on a film of water and lose
contact with the road surface. This is known as
“hydroplaning”. If this should happen, you will
lose control of both steering and braking. There-
fore, be sure to maintain moderate speeds on
rainy days.
Hydroplaning can easily occur if tyre tread is
worn to the point where the tread pattern is very
shallow.
• Do not use a mobile telephone while driving. If
you wish to use a mobile telephone, first stop
the vehicle in a safe place. Using a mobile tele-
phone while driving could distract your attention
from the vehicle and from the road ahead,
resulting in an accident.
• Operate the radio and other items of equipment
in the cab when the vehicle is stationary. It is
dangerous to operate such items of equipment
or use a carphone (other than a hands-free
type) while driving.
• Do not allow a child to touch the driver’s controls
and other equipment. A child’s interference
could cause a fault or accident.

1 When driving a manual transmission

vehicle
• Do not operate the vehicle with the clutch disen-
gaged or the gearshift lever in neutral.
Doing so will render the engine braking and
exhaust brake features ineffective, forcing you
to rely only on the service brakes and overusing
them in the process.
• Do not slip the clutch. Clutch-slipping occurs
when you partially depress the clutch pedal
while the vehicle is in motion.
This will shorten the service life of the clutch.

2 When driving a vehicle with a DUONIC®

system
• For normal driving, select the “D” position.
P. 5-21
• Do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” or “P”
position while the vehicle is in motion. If the
gearshift lever were moved to the “N” or “P”
position with the vehicle in motion, abnormal
sounds and vibration would occur. Also, trans-
mission components could be broken, resulting
in a serious accident.
Always stop the vehicle before placing the gear-
shift lever in the “N” or “P” position.
7-6 Starting and driving

• If the system judges that a manual upshift or

downshift would put the engine speed out of the
normal rpm range, the gearshift does not take
place.
Adjust the vehicle speed with the accelerator or
brakes before making an upshift or downshift
with the gearshift lever.
• If you stop the vehicle momentarily, for example,
at a red light, be sure to keep the brake pedal
depressed. Without the brakes applied, the vehi-
cle will move, although only very slowly, even if
the accelerator pedal is not depressed. If you
must wait for longer than expected, select the
“N” or “P” position and pull the parking brake
lever.
• If you stop temporarily when driving uphill,
depress the brake pedal and pull the parking
brake lever. Do not attempt to stop the vehicle
from rolling backwards with the accelerator
pedal.

Tips for improving fuel economy

Observe the following precautions to achieve maxi-

mum fuel economy and to extend tyre life.
• A time of 1 to 2 minutes will be sufficient for
warming up the engine.
• Avoid racing the engine as doing so not only
wastes fuel but also harms the engine.
• Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, and
sudden braking.
• It is recommended that when the vehicle is
unladen, 2nd gear should be used to pull away
on level surfaces.
• When accelerating, do not wind the engine out
before changing gears; instead, change gears
before engine speed reaches a high RPM. Fuel
consumption can be minimized by keeping the
tachometer needle in the 1,000 to 2,000 rpm
range.
• On vehicles with a DUONIC® system, fuel con-
sumption can be further minimized by setting
the economy mode switch to ON.
• Always shut off the engine when the vehicle is in
a stop. Never park the vehicle or leave it with the
engine running, even for a short time.
• Try to drive at moderate and constant speeds.
Unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
causes fuel waste.
• Do not keep the exhaust brake switch in the
activation position at all times. Doing so repeat-
edly decelerates and accelerates the vehicle
speed due to frequent operation of the exhaust
brake, which reduces fuel economy. Move the
exhaust brake switch between the activation
and non-activation positions as necessary for
road and traffic conditions.
• Always keep the air pressure in tyres correctly
adjusted.
Periodically rotate the tyres.
 7-7

• Use tyres of the specified size only. Use of the

wrong size tyres can interfere with correct
DUONIC® (transmission) shift timing and result
in poor fuel economy (Vehicles with a DUONIC®
system).
• Try to load cargo in a way that minimizes wind
resistance. P. 7-13
• Be sure to perform the pre-operational checks
and periodic inspections.

Braking

WARNING
• When warning lamps light up
immediately stop the vehicle and perform
necessary checks. P. 6-26
• Avoid sudden braking except in emer-
gency. Sudden application of the brakes
generates a large shock which could
cause an accident. Sudden braking will
wear down tyres and could cause malfunc-
tions in other sections of the vehicle.
• Avoid overusing the service brakes as the
resultant overheating could cause unde-
sirable fading which contribute to poor
braking.
• Do not use the exhaust brake on a wet fro-
zen snow-covered or otherwise slippery
road surface when the vehicle is lightly
loaded or not loaded. Using the exhaust
brake under such conditions could cause
the tyres to slip on the road surface
resulting in a skid. The tyres are particu-
larly liable to slip when the vehicle is trav-
eling downhill.
• Reduce speed sufficiently before negotiat-
ing a curve. When negotiating a curve with
the exhaust brake applied if the tyres slip
due to the slippery road surface or a step
in the road the ABS may function causing
the exhaust brake to be temporarily
released which may result in a serious
accident.
• Except in an emergency never apply the
parking brake while the vehicle is moving
since the vehicle could spin and/or over-
turn.
• If the brake is faulty or if brake oil is leak-
ing do not continue to drive the vehicle.
Since braking is sluggish continuing to
drive could lead to a serious accident.

1. Use engine braking and exhaust brake to decel-

erate sufficiently before applying the brakes.
2. Pressing the brake pedal in two or three stages
contributes to stable braking.
Remember that the braking distance varies with
vehicle speed, load weight, and road conditions.
7-8 Starting and driving

NOTE:
Engine braking is a braking effect realized when the
accelerator pedal is released during vehicle opera-
tion. The lower the transmission gear, the more
powerful the engine braking.

On uphill and downhill roads

1 Uphill roads
On manual transmission vehicles or vehicles with a
DUONIC ® system in manual shift mode, downshift
early if the vehicle speed begins to drop to minimize
the load on the engine.
NOTE:
The vehicle may move backward when starting on
an uphill road. Using also the parking brake will help
to start successfully in this case.

2 Downhill roads
• If you are going to drive down a steep road or a
road with a long downhill grade, test the service
brakes and exhaust brake in advance to make
sure that they are functioning well.
• Place the vehicle in the gear used when driving
uphill and use engine braking and exhaust
brake to help slow the vehicle. Never drive
downhill at high speeds.

WARNING
• Never coast with the clutch disengaged or
the gearshift lever in the neutral position
(manual transmission vehicles) or the
gearshift lever in the “N” position (vehi-
cles with a DUONIC ® system). There would
be no engine braking and no exhaust brak-
ing so there would be an excessive bur-
den on the service brakes.
• Avoid overusing the service brakes as the
resultant overheating could cause unde-
sirable vapor lock and fading both of
which contribute to poor braking.

NOTE:
• “Vapor lock” refers to the condition in which the
brake system overheats, causing the brake fluid
to boil and form bubbles that weaken hydraulic
pressure, resulting in poor braking.
• “Fading” refers to the condition in which the
brake pads overheat to the point where friction
with the disc rotor is significantly reduced. This
also results in poor braking.

WARNING
Except in an emergency never apply the
parking brake while the vehicle is moving
since the vehicle could spin and/or overturn.
 7-9

• First, decelerate the engine sufficiently before

downshifting.
In a vehicle with a DUONIC® system, shifting
down will be prohibited by a safety device if the
vehicle is driving fast. In such cases, depress
the brake pedal and reduce the vehicle speed.

CAUTION
Do not let the engine overrev on downhill roads
as this could generate excessive stress in vari-
ous parts of the engine and damage it. Control
the vehicle speed so that the needle of the
tachometer does not enter the red zone.
NOTE:
“Overrev” refers to an operating state of the engine
in which it rotates at an RPM higher than the recom-
mended maximum RPM. Overrevving the engine
could lead to engine failure.

On rough roads and in bad weather

WARNING
On vehicles with a DUONIC® system use the
manual shift mode when driving on slippery
surfaces (such as a wet or frozen road).
Using the automatic shift mode on slippery
roads could cause an accident for the follow-
ing reasons:
Skidding is more likely to be caused by auto-
matic shift-downs that take place normally
when driving in the automatic shift mode.
Skidding also may occur easily due to auto-
matic shift-downs following full or quick
operation of the accelerator pedal.
Even while driving using the manual shift
mode the vehicle is likely to skid if you sud-
denly depress the accelerator pedal or
quickly shift down the gear.

• Use a low gear and try to drive at a constant

speed when driving on gravel roads or muddy
roads.
• Do not race the engine when attempting to
move out of mud. Racing the engine is useless
and even worsens the condition as the spinning
wheels will make ruts deeper. Instead, place
thick cloth, gravel or the like under tyres, and
select the 1st or reverse gear alternately or, in a
vehicle with a DUONIC® system, shift the gear-
shift lever into the “D” and “N” positions alter-
nately to move the vehicle back and forth until
you can drive out.
7-10 Starting and driving

CAUTION
Do not operate a vehicle with a DUONIC ® sys-
tem in this way for more than 5 minutes since it
causes the transmission oil or the clutch to heat
up rapidly.

• Drive very slowly on bumpy roads and take care

not to allow the undercarriage to bottom out.
If the muffler strikes a rock or other obstacle, its
catalyst or other internal elements may be
damaged. Have it checked by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Avoid sudden steering and sudden braking on
roads that are slippery from rain. Conditions are
especially dangerous just after it begins to rain.
Use engine braking and the exhaust brake
together with the wheel brakes to decelerate.
Note, however, that sudden engine braking can
cause a skid. Drive at a speed at which you can
stay comfortably in control of the vehicle.
• When the vehicle is driven through puddles or
washed with water, braking performance can be
reduced by water entering the brake drums or
working areas of the brake discs (depending
whether the vehicle has drum brakes or disc
brakes). In this event, drive slowly with light
pressure on the brake pedal to dry out the
brakes. Pay attention to nearby vehicles while
doing so.
• Do not drive on flooded roads. If you drive on a
flooded road and water gets into the vehicle,
immediately have the vehicle inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer. Water in the vehicle can cause a number
of problems:
• If water gets into the engine, it can cause
engine damage.
• If water gets into the high-current fuse box, it
can cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.
• If water gets into the wheel bearings, king-
pins, or tie-rod ends, it can cause rust,
resulting in problems such as bearing sei-
zure.
• If water gets into the muffler, it may cause
damage to the catalyst(s), ceramic filter and/
or sensor contained within.
• In fog, illuminate the front and rear fog lamps
and drive carefully at low speeds, paying atten-
tion to the centre line and the vehicle ahead of
you.
• When driving in snow or on frozen roads, use
tyre chains, snow tyres or winter-use tyres and
drive at a moderate speed. Avoid sudden brak-
ing and sharp turns.
 7-11

Parking

WARNING
• Park the vehicle on the flattest available
surface.
Avoid parking on slopes.
If it is unavoidable to park the vehicle on a
slope do the following: Firmly apply the
parking brake while fully depressing the
brake pedal. On vehicles with a DUONIC®
system place the gearshift lever in the “P”
position and chock the wheels. You can
further improve safety by leaving the
steering wheel turned so the vehicle will
roll toward an obstacle (for example a
curbstone) in the unlikely event of move-
ment.
• On vehicles with a DUONIC ® system do
not park the vehicle only with the gearshift
lever placed in the “P” position; always
firmly engage the parking brake. If you
park the vehicle on a steep slope only by
placing the gearshift lever in the “P” posi-
tion without also engaging the parking
brake the gearshift lever will become
extremely difficult to move or in the worst
case it may be impossible to release the
transmission from the locked state. If this
happens shift the gearshift lever into the
“N” position and then after making sure
the gear position indicator shows “N”
move the lever to the “D” position.
• The engine and exhaust pipe are
extremely hot immediately after the vehi-
cle has been driven. Do not park the vehi-
cle in any place where there is dry grass
waste paper or other flammable material.
• Always stop the engine before sleeping in
the cabin. You could otherwise cause an
accident by unintentionally moving the
accelerator pedal or shift lever while sleep-
ing. Also you could suffer carbon-monox-
ide poisoning from exhaust gases if the
vehicle is parked in a closed space.
• Never leave lighters cans of carbonated
drink and spectacles in the cabin when
parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The
cabin will become extremely hot so light-
ers and other flammable items may catch
fire and unopened drink cans (including
beer cans) may rupture. The heat may also
affect plastic spectacle lenses and other
spectacle parts that are made of plastic.
For example the coating on the lenses
may crack and the lenses themselves may
become deformed.
7-12 Starting and driving

WARNING
• The body as well as inside equipment and
controls of a vehicle parked in sunshine
for a long time could become hot enough
to burn you. Do not touch hot parts
directly with bare hands; use a cloth or
appropriate material in between.
• Illumination of the warning lamp does
not necessarily mean that the parking
brake is sufficiently activated. Always pull
the parking brake lever up all the way.
• Always use the mirrors to confirm safety
before opening a door. Suddenly opening
a door is dangerous because the door may
obstruct cars motorcycles bicycles and
pedestrians coming from behind.

1. Stop the vehicle on the flattest available surface.

2. Pull the parking brake lever all the way while
fully depressing the brake pedal.
3. On a manual transmission vehicle, place the
gearshift lever in the neutral position. On a vehi-
cle with a DUONIC ® system, place the gearshift
lever in the “P” position.
4. After allowing the engine to idle for three min-
utes, stop it.
5. To help prevent theft and needless consumption
of electricity from the battery, be sure to remove
the starter key and lock the doors.
NOTE:
On vehicles with a DUONIC ® system, a buzzer
sounds continuously if the driver’s door or assistant
driver’s door is opened while the engine is running
and the gearshift lever is in the “D” position.
The buzzer stops if the gearshift lever is moved to
the “P” or “N” position, the engine is stopped, or the
door is closed.
If the gearshift lever is moved to the “R” position
while the engine is running, the buzzer sounds
intermittently.
Always stop the engine with the gearshift lever in
the “P” position.

CAUTION
• Before stopping the engine allow it to idle
so the coolant temperature comes down.
Engine parts are particularly hot immediately
after the vehicle has been driven uphill or on
an expressway. Let the engine idle for at
least three minutes. P. 5-11
• Leaving the vehicle to stand a long time with
the starter switch in the “ON” or “ACC” posi-
tion could result in a dead battery.
• Be sure to turn off all lights after parking to
prevent drainage of the battery.
 7-13

6. If parking on a slope is unavoidable, block the

wheels securely with chocks and take any other
necessary measures to prevent the vehicle from
moving.

Loading cargo

1 Avoid overloading the vehicle.

Overloading the vehicle causes braking perform-
ance to deteriorate and can thus cause an accident.
Also, overloading the vehicle places excessive
stress on vehicle parts, shortening their service
lives.
Some local regulations specify the maximum gross
vehicle weight (GVW). You should strictly observe
these regulations.

2 How to load cargo

Improperly loaded cargo is unstable and may cause
uneven weight distribution. If the weight is concen-
trated in one place, it may damage the cargo deck
and frame or burst a tyre.

WARNING
• When roping up cargo or covering it with a
tarpaulin make sure that neither the rope
nor the end of the tarpaulin hang down
between the cab and the cargo deck as a
loosely hanging rope or tarpaulin could
catch fire from the engine heat.
• The cargo should be prevented from mov-
ing and also securely fixed with wire etc.
so that it will not slide during driving.
• Do not place wooden boards or other
items between the cargo bed and frame.
The heat from the exhaust pipe could set
fire to them.

CAUTION
When spreading the tarpaulin take care not to
let it cover or be drawn into the engine air intake
duct as this will reduce engine output and
could cause an engine failure.
7-14 Starting and driving

• Place the cargo evenly on deck.

• Avoid being piled high with cargo. If cargo is

piled high, the vehicle is at risk of rolling over
upon being hit with a side wind or making a turn.

• If you place supports under the cargo, position

them at equal intervals.
• Avoid allowing long objects to project over the
rear edge of the cargo deck. Use suitable sup-
ports when loading long objects. Do not support
them only with the gate and the rear edge of the
cargo deck.
• To prevent cargo from falling, strap it down
securely and cover it with a tarpaulin. Secure
the tarpaulin ends neatly so they do not flap.
>
 8-1

8. Handling special equipment

Transmission PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

4WD system – FG models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Lane departure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Limited slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Antilock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Trailer coupling and trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-2 Handling special equipment

Transmission PTO

CAUTION
• Engage the PTO while the engine is idling.
• While using the PTO check that the indi-
cator lamp is not flashing. If the PTO is used
for a long time with the indicator lamp flash-
ing the engine output can change resulting
in an accident. If the indicator lamp is flash-
ing before you use the PTO first perform
parked DPF regeneration. If the indicator
lamp starts flashing while you are using the
PTO stop work and perform parked DPF
regeneration. Refer to “Parked DPF regener-
ation” on page 5-54 or 5-63.
• On a vehicle with an idling stop & start (ISS)
system press the ISS cutoff switch. The ISS
system does not activate while the PTO is
operating. However the ISS system may
activate unexpectedly after the PTO is disen-
gaged which could lead to an unexpected
accident.
• Before operating the PTO be sure to apply
the parking brake and if the vehicle has a
DUONIC ® system place the gearshift lever in
the “P” position. The PTO will work with the
gearshift lever in the “N” position but you
should use it with the gearshift lever in the
“P” position for safety. If the gearshift lever
is in any position other than “P” or “N” the
vehicle may move resulting in an accident.
Making sure the parking brake is applied
and if the vehicle has a DUONIC ® system
that the gearshift lever is in the “P” position
is particularly important when you control
the engine from outside the vehicle while
using the PTO.
• Disengage the PTO before driving the vehi-
cle. Driving the vehicle with the PTO
engaged could cause the body-mounted
equipment to operate resulting in an acci-
dent. It could also cause the body-mounted
equipment to break down.
• Depending on the type of device you con-
nect to the PTO please note that depressing
the brake pedal during operation may reduce
the speed of the engine.

NOTE:
• The transmission power take-off (PTO) is a
device that enables power to be taken from the
transmission and used to drive a hydraulic pump
or other equipment.
• When the PTO is operating, the ISS system
does not activate (vehicles with an ISS). If the
ISS has activated before the PTO activates and
operation seems troublesome because the
engine automatically stops, press the ISS cutoff
switch.
• Automatic DPF regeneration and parked DPF
regeneration are not possible while the PTO is
being used.
 8-3

• With a vehicle that has a DUONIC® system,

moving the gearshift lever to any position other
than “P” or “N” while the PTO is engaged or
pushing the PTO switch while the vehicle is
being driven causes the indicator to come on
and a buzzer to sound a warning.

1 Controls and indicators

PTO switch
<LHD> The PTO switch is used to engage and disengage
the PTO.
Multi-information display indicator
• The indicator is on when the PTO switch is
used to engage the PTO. (Vehicles with a
DUONIC® system)
• The indicator is on when the PTO switch is
used to engage the PTO.

Z21732

<RHD>

Z21011

2 Manual transmission vehicles

2.1 Engaging the PTO

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Make sure the gearshift lever is in the neutral
position.
3. Hold down the clutch pedal and start the
engine. When the engine has warmed up, keep
it idling.
4. Check that the indicator lamp is not flash-
ing. If it is flashing, perform parked DPF regen-
eration before engaging the PTO.

5. Hold the clutch pedal down fully and push the

PTO switch to turn it on.
ON 6. Check that the indicator on the multi-infor-
mation display has come on, then slowly release
the clutch pedal to engage the PTO.

Z22174
8-4 Handling special equipment

2.2 Disengaging the PTO

1. Hold the clutch pedal down fully and push the

PTO switch to turn it off.
2. Check that the indicator on the multi-infor-
mation display goes off.
3**

>

3 Vehicles with a DUONIC® system

3.1 Engaging the PTO

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Make sure the gearshift lever is in the “P” posi-
tion.
3. Hold down the brake pedal and start the engine.
When the engine has warmed up, keep it idling.
4. Check that the indicator lamp is not flash-
ing. If it is flashing, perform parked DPF regen-
eration before engaging the PTO.

5. Push the PTO switch to turn it on.

6. The indicator on the multi-information dis-
play will come on. When PTO engagement is
complete, the indicator will come on.

NOTE:
Depending on conditions, the indicator may not
come on. This phenomenon does not mean there is
an abnormality.

Z21734

3.2 Disengaging the PTO

Push the PTO switch to turn it off. Check that the

and indicators on the multi-information display
go off.

Z21735
 8-5

4WD system – FG models

Select the 2WD (rear-wheel-drive) mode or 4WD

(all-wheel-drive) mode as necessary for the condi-
tion of the road surface. The 4WD mode can be
used for extra traction on rough road surfaces and
on snow-covered road surfaces (in mountainous
regions, for example).

CAUTION
• Your 4WD vehicle is intended to be driven on
roads. Do not always drive it on rough sur-
faces. Always driving it on rough surfaces
could damage it.
• With a 4WD vehicle power is applied to both
the front wheels and rear wheels; if incorrect
tyres are fitted they can prevent the vehicle
from performing to its full potential and can
even cause an accident. Incorrect tyres can
also adversely affect powertrain compo-
nents. Please observe the following tyre-
related cautions:
• Make sure all of the tyres are the speci-
fied size and are identical in terms of
manufacturer brand and tread pattern.
Be particularly careful when fitting snow
tyres or other winter-use tyres.
• Use tyres that do not differ from each
other in terms of the extent of wear.
• Regularly check the tyre inflation pres-
sures and keep them adjusted to the
specified values.
• When tyre replacement is necessary
replace all of the tyres at the same time.
• Use genuine wheels. Do not change the
wheel size.
• To ensure that the tyres wear evenly
rotate the tyres as necessary.
• For towing of the vehicle raise the front
wheels off the ground and disconnect the
propeller shaft at the end closer to the rear
wheels.
• The 4WD mode is not recommended for driv-
ing on dry paved roads as the tyres may
wear down prematurely the running noise
may increase and more fuel may be con-
sumed. Malfunction of the drive train compo-
nents may also result. Be sure to drive in the
2WD mode on dry paved roads.
8-6 Handling special equipment

1 Control and indicator lamps

0,(" 
Front drive switch
HIGH-LOW selector switch
4WD indicator lamp
Free-wheeling hub

>

6,("


>

Z19059

1.1 Front drive switch

The front drive switch is used to select either the
two-wheel drive (2WD) mode that uses only the two
rear wheels as driving wheels or the four-wheel
drive (4WD) mode in which the engine power is
transmitted to all four wheels. Turn this switch “ON”
to select the 4WD mode; turn it “OFF” to select the
2WD mode.

1.2 HIGH-LOW selector switch

The switch selects the gear position of transfer,
Z21362
"HIGH" (high-speed) or "LOW" (low-speed) when
the front drive switch is turned on (4WD).
When you select the gear position, the switch must
be pushed and held until the gear position is fully
switched.

1.3 4WD indicator lamp

The indicator lamp lights up when the 4WD mode is
selected.
 8-7

1.4 Free-wheeling hub

Even when the 4WD vehicle is running in the two-
wheel drive mode with the engine power transmit-
ted only to the rear wheels, the front wheels are
always connected to the power train (differential,
propeller shaft and transfer). The free-wheeling hub
is a device to release the wheels from the power
train to allow them to rotate freely, thus saving
energy and improving power economy.

2 How to select drive mode

You can select any desired drive mode and transfer
gear range combination from among those shown
in the following table. Select the most suitable com-
bination according to the driving conditions.

Mode-
4WD HIGH-LOW
range indica- selector Driving conditions
combi-
nation tor lamp switch lamp

2WD
High – Normal road driv-
ing
range

Driving on snow-
covered, frozen, or
4WD sandy roads or
other difficult roads
High where running in
range
the two-wheel
drive mode is inap-
propriate.
Driving on steep
uphill or muddy
4WD roads or other
Low roads where
range exceptionally good
traction is
required.
8-8 Handling special equipment

2.1 How to switch 2WD mode or 4WD mode

• Switching to 4WD High range from 2WD High
range
1. Move the free-wheeling hub (both front wheels)
to "LOCK" position. P. 8-9
2. Press the front drive switch to turn it on.
3. Check if the indicator lamp comes on.

• Switching to 2WD High range from 4WD High

range
1. Press the front drive switch to turn it off.
2. Check if the indicator lamp turns off.
Z21362
3. Move the free-wheeling hub (both front wheels)
to "FREE" position. P. 8-9

NOTE:
• You do not have to depress the clutch pedal.
• Switching operation can be done also while driv-
ing or while stopped.
• When a gear is not switched, depress lightly an
accelerator pedal after returning it.
• The gear can not switch to 2WD mode from
4WD low range. Switches to 4WD high range
position before switches to 2WD mode.

2.2 How to switch High range or Low range

• Switching to 4WD Low range from 4WD High
range
1. Park the vehicle and depress the clutch pedal
.
 2. Push and hold the "LOW" side of HIGH-LOW
selector switch. The lamp of the switch will
4YWLERH,SPH comes on. Push and hold the switch until it
passes more than two seconds after a lamp
comes on.
3. The operation of the clutch pedal and the switch
is completed.
>

• Switching to 4WD High range from 4WD Low

range
1. Park the vehicle and depress the clutch pedal
 .
2. Push and hold the "HIGH" side of HIGH-LOW
selector switch. The lamp of the switch will
turns off. Push and hold the switch until it
passes more than two seconds after a lamp
turned off.
4YWLERH,SPH
3. The operation of the clutch pedal and the switch
is completed.
>
NOTE:
You can not select Low range when the vehicle is
on 2WD mode. Select the High range. You can only
select Low range or High range when the vehicle is
on 4WD mode.
 8-9

CAUTION
• Never operate the HIGH-LOW selector switch
while driving. If the switch is operated during
driving range is not switched. Be sure to
park the vehicle and depress the clutch
pedal before it is switched.
• Push and hold the HIGH-LOW selector
switch until it passes more than two seconds
after a lamp comes on or turned off. If time
pushing the switch is short the gear would
not engage so the vehicle can not drive. If
such a thing occurred try to switch the
range again.
• Never switch in the middle of the slope.

2.3 How to switch the free-wheeling hub

• For propulsion of the vehicle in the 2WD mode,
set each free-wheeling hub to the “FREE” posi-
tion .
• For propulsion of the vehicle in the 4WD mode,
set each free-wheeling hub to the “LOCK” posi-
tion .

WARNING
• Set both of free-wheeling hubs to the
Z21364 "FREE" position or "LOCK" position while
driving.
If you drive with one free-wheeling hub in
the "FREE" position and the other in the
"LOCK" position the free-wheeling hub
may fail and can also adversely affect driv-
ing and may cause an accident.
• Do not touch the free-wheeling hub just
after stopping the vehicle. The free-wheel-
ing hub is very hot then and could burn
you.

CAUTION
When the 4WD mode is selected ensure that the
free-wheeling hubs on both front wheels are set
in the “LOCK” positions. Should either or both
of them be in the “FREE” position four-wheel
driving is not possible.
8-10 Handling special equipment

3 Advice on use of the 4WD mode

WARNING
When you select the 4WD mode to drive on
off-road terrain (sandy or muddy ground) or
snow-laden or frozen roads take sufficient
care to avoid inappropriate operation.

3.1 Precautions to be taken when selecting the

4WD mode
• In the 4WD mode, you may feel the steering
wheel move differently from the way it does in
the 2WD mode. Operate the steering wheel
carefully until you get the complete feel of 4WD
operation.
• When turning a sharp corner on a dry pavement
at a low speed in the 4WD mode, a condition
resembling one that would occur during braking
can develop. This condition called “sharp corner
braking” is caused by the fact that the four tyres
are moving along circles of different radiuses
and is a phenomenon limited to 4WD vehicles. It
does not imply that any abnormal condition
exists. If you experience this condition, either
straighten steering wheel or switch to the 2WD
mode.

3.2 Driving on snow-covered or frozen roads

Select the 4WD mode according to the snow or
road surface condition. Start out slowly. The use of
tyre chains or snow tyres is recommended.
P. 11-5

CAUTION
On the FG models install tyre chains on both
the front and rear wheels when driving in the
4WD mode. When driving in the 2WD mode
chains may be removed from the front wheels.
 8-11

3.3 Driving on sandy or muddy ground

• Select the 4WD mode if you find it appropriate to
do so after checking sand or mud conditions.
Start out slowly. Drive at low speeds, keeping
the speed as constant as possible.
• Avoid quick acceleration, sudden braking and
sharp turn as they can cause the vehicle to
become stuck in the sand or mud, making it
impossible to free the vehicle by yourself.
• Tyre chains are effective when driving through
deep mud.
• Muddy conditions are generally difficult to judge
and there is danger of becoming stuck in deep
mud. To prevent this, drive as slowly as possible
and, if necessary, get out of the vehicle and
check the conditions.

3.4 Climbing steep hills

Select the 4WD mode to make full use of engine
torque. Choose the path that has the least stones,
sand and bumps. At both the start and end of a
climb, moderate slopes are preferable.

3.5 Descending steep hills

• Select the 4WD mode and descend slowly using
engine braking so that the wheels do not slip.
• Quick braking can slip the wheels and result in a
loss of vehicle control. Check road conditions
before descending.
• Avoid gear shifting when descending a hill.
Select the best gear in advance, and maintain
the gear until the end of the descent.

3.6 Crossing a river

CAUTION
• Do not drive in water. Driving in water can
cause the following problems:
• Water can get into the front and rear
axles.
• Water can get into the high-current fuses
resulting in a short circuit that causes a
fire.
• Never shift gears while crossing a river.

Although 4WD has many advantageous features, it

is not designed for driving in water. If it is absolutely
necessary to drive in water, select the 4WD mode
and drive as described below to get out of water in
the shortest possible time.
After driving in water, promptly have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.
• Choose a path where water is shallowest and
drive slowly to avoid making waves.
• After crossing, check the brakes. If the brakes
do not operate effectively, drive slowly and
lightly depress the brake pedal to dry the brakes
while remaining aware of any vehicles in front of
or behind you.
8-12 Handling special equipment

• After crossing, check the electric system for any

problems that the water may have caused. Also
observe the recommendations in the following
sub-paragraph describing precautions to be
taken when selecting the 4WD mode.

3.7 If you have driven in water by necessity

• If you have driven in water by necessity,
promptly have the vehicle inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
• Immediately check engine, transmission, trans-
fer and differential oil. If the oil looks milky, it is
contaminated with water. Be sure to replace it.
P. 7-9
• If water has entered the cab, dry the carpet, etc.
Leaving them wet can cause rusting.

3.8 After off-road driving be sure to check the

following points:
• Check for damage caused by stones, etc.
• Check the brakes. If the brakes function poorly,
have them checked by your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Grease the propeller shaft and also the front and
rear suspension springs. P. 12-19

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

system

<Vehicles with ESP ®>

The ESP ® system performs integrated control of the
braking of each wheel and engine power to achieve
the following:
• Reduce the risk of overturning of vehicles with a
high centre of gravity
• Reduce the risk of skidding on slippery road sur-
faces

In addition, the following functions are provided:

• Antispin regulator (ASR)
The ASR prevents the driving wheels from spinning
on snow-covered, frozen, or slippery road surfaces,
enabling smooth standing starts and optimizing the
vehicle’s acceleration, straight-line stability, and hill-
climbing ability. It functions in conjunction with the
ESP ® system.
• Braking assistance
When a strong braking force is required, as in cases
where emergency braking is applied or the vacuum
pressure has dropped, this function provides addi-
tional force to assist the driver to depress the brake
pedal.
• Drag torque control
If the driving wheels start to spin during engine
braking, this function controls the engine torque to
prevent the wheels from spinning for improved
safety.
 8-13

WARNING
The ESP® system cannot overcome limita-
tions on the vehicle’s running and braking
performance. Do not depend too much on the
system; it is your responsibility to judge the
road and other conditions properly and
reduce speed sufficiently to ensure safety
when driving on slippery road surfaces or
before negotiating a curve.

CAUTION
Even if the ASR is operating avoid reckless
driving and take sufficient care to ensure safety
when driving on slippery road surfaces.

NOTE:
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

1 Controls and indicators

0,("

>
8-14 Handling special equipment

6,("

>
ASR/ESP® cutoff switch
This switch is used to temporarily disable the ESP®
function. If you press the ASR/ESP® cutoff switch,
both the ESP ® and ASR functions will be disabled.
When these functions are disabled, the multi-infor-
mation display shows and the indicator
lamp comes on.

Warning and indicator display on the multi-

information display
When the ASR is faulty, the multi-information dis-
play shows .
When the ASR functions are disabled, the multi-
information display shows .
When the ASR is operating, the multi-information
display shows .

The ESP® OFF indicator lamp

When the ESP®system is turned off, the lamp
comes on.

The ESP® indicator and warning lamp

• When the ESP® is in operation, the lamp
flashes.
• When the ESP®system is faulty, the lamp
comes on.
 8-15

2 Precautions during inspection and ser-

vicing

WARNING
When the following components need to be
repaired or modified consult an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer. If
inappropriate repairs or modifications are
made the ESP® system may not operate nor-
mally causing an accident.
• Installation of radio equipment
• Servicing of the steering system
• Changing the differential gear ratio
Examples of inappropriate modifications:
• Changing the tyre size
• Modification of the steering system
• Modification of the suspension
• Changing the installation position and ori-
entation of the ESP® sensors or modifica-
tion of the ESP® sensors
• Other modifications that affect the ESP®
system’s control functions

When a roller tester is used to check the braking

power or vehicle speed, consult an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

3 Precautions during driving

• When the ESP® system is operating, the engine
speed can reduce regardless of how far the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
• On slippery road surfaces, corrective steering
may be necessary even if the ESP® system is
operating.
• Heavy cargo can place excessive burden on the
service brakes. Use engine braking and exhaust
braking, and avoid overusing the brake pedal on
a long downhill road which is slippery.
• Vehicles equipped with an ESP® system have
an ASR function, thus providing better accelera-
tion on slippery surfaces than vehicles without
an ESP® system, but the braking performance
is the same as vehicles equipped with an ABS.
8-16 Handling special equipment

4 Operation
4.1 Activating conditions
The ESP ® system may activate when:
• You change lanes when driving at high speed,
• You swerve suddenly to avoid an obstacle,
• You enter a curve without slowing down suffi-
ciently, or
• You are driving on a snow-covered, frozen, or
slippery road surface.

CAUTION
The ESP® system may fail to activate or may not
perform effectively when:
• The vehicle speed exceeds the limit
• The vehicle is running at low speed
• The cargo is not loaded evenly
• A tyre is punctured or has dropped off
• The vehicle is struck by side winds or
• The brakes need servicing.
• The warning lamp is illuminated.
P. 6-33

4.2 Operation
• The ESP ® system activates when the sensors
installed on the vehicle detect a sudden steer-
ing, large lateral acceleration or skidding. The
ESP® system controls braking and engine
power during its operation.
When the ESP® system is operating, the
indicator lamp flashes.
• The ASR activates when the driving wheels spin
on snow-covered, frozen, or slippery road sur-
faces. The ASR controls engine power during its
operation. When the ASR is operating, the multi-
> information display shows .

CAUTION
When the ESP ® system is operating the vehicle
is in an unstable condition. Take sufficient care
when driving in this condition.

5 ASR/ESP® cutoff switch

CAUTION
Do not use the ASR/ESP ® cutoff switch while
driving normally.

NOTE:
If you press the ASR/ESP® cutoff switch, both the
ESP ® and ASR functions will be temporarily dis-
abled.

To temporarily disable the ESP® function, use the

ASR/ESP® cutoff switch.
 8-17

• Disabling the ESP® system

Press the ASR/ESP® cutoff switch to disable the
ESP® function. When the ESP® function is dis-
abled, the multi-information display shows and
the indicator lamp comes on.

>

• Canceling the ESP® cutoff

Press the ASR/ESP® cutoff switch again to cancel
the ESP® cutoff. If the engine is stopped while the
ESP® system is disabled, the ESP® system will
automatically activate when the engine is restarted.
When the ESP® system activates, the and
indicator go out.

>

6 Warning lamp
If the warning lamp comes on or the multi-infor-
mation display shows while driving, the ESP®
may be faulty.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and perform the fol-
lowing checks.
• Stop the engine, and then restart it.
• If the warning or indicator lamp does not go out
after driving for a while or if the warning or indi-
cation lamp goes out but comes on again after a
while, the ESP® system is faulty. Have the nec-
essary repair performed by an authorised
> MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer as soon
as possible.

Lane departure warning system

<Vehicles with the lane departure warning system>

The lane departure warning system alerts the driver
with a warning display and buzzer if the driver has
left their lane unintentionally.
8-18 Handling special equipment

WARNING
The lane departure warning system is
designed to assist the driver in driving the
vehicle but is not designed to make it possi-
ble to drive while asleep at the wheel or while
looking elsewhere. It is also not designed to
assist with driving when visibility is poor
such as in rain or fog. Drivers are advised to
drive safely at all times by using the steering
wheel to suit the surrounding conditions.

1 Controls and indicators

0,("
Lane recognition camera
Recognises the white lane markings on a road to
detect if the vehicle has left its lane.

Lane departure warning system cutoff

switch
Switch to temporarily disable lane departure warn-
ing system operation.

indicator lamp
Lights when the lane departure warning system
function is disabled. The lane departure warning
system does not operate when this is lit.

warning
Shown if there is a malfunction with the lane depar-
ture warning system.

Lane departure warning system warning dis-

play
Shown in the multi-information display if the vehicle
=  leaves its lane. A buzzer also sounds at the same
time.

6,("

= 
 8-19

2 Lane departure warning system opera-

tion
• The lane departure warning system operates
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 60 km/h
(37 MPH).
• A warning is shown in the multi-information dis-
play under the following conditions. A buzzer
also sounds at the same time.

Condition Multi-information display Buzzer

When leaving the • Switches from

lane on the left side other screens.
of the vehicle • The lane on the
left flashes.

Sounds

= 

When leaving the • Switches from

lane on the right other screens.
side of the vehicle • The lane on the
right flashes.

Sounds

= 

When the white lane The screen currently The screen currently displayed remains unchanged.
Does not
markings cannot be displayed remains sound
recognised unchanged.

NOTE:
If the lane departure warning system operates, the
warning is shown for approximately 3 seconds even
if the vehicle moves back to its lane.
The warning may stop after approximately 1 second
in some circumstances.

• The lane departure warning system does not

operate under the following conditions.
• When the turn signal lamps are flashing
• When there is a system malfunction
• When the lane departure warning system is
disabled after pressing the lane departure
warning system cutoff switch
• When the vehicle's speed is 60 km/h
(37 MPH) or less
8-20 Handling special equipment

3 Precautions when driving

CAUTION
• Do not place items around the lane recogni-
tion camera or cover the camera. Further-
more do not subject the camera to shocks.
Doing so may prevent the system from oper-
ating normally.
• Do not grab or pull on the lane recognition
camera. If the camera is deformed it may
prevent the system from operating normally.
• Take care not to spill water or other drinks
on the lane recognition camera. Water or
other drinks spilled on the camera may pre-
vent the lane departure warning system from
operating normally.
Other peripheral equipment may also stop
operating normally.

NOTE:
• The lane departure warning system does not
operate if there is no centre line or dividing lines,
the white lane markings are of a special shape,
or the white lane markings on either side of the
vehicle cannot be recognised due to causes
such as falling snow, or the road covered with
snow or water, or the camera is against the light.
• If the lane departure warning system cannot
continuously recognise any white lane markings
on roads such as expressways where the white
lane markings are clearly visible, there may be
dirt on the lane recognition camera lens or the
windscreen. Wipe the lens of the camera with a
soft cloth such as a lens cleaner for glasses.
 8-21

4 Lane departure warning system cutoff

switch
Switch to disable lane departure warning system
operation.

• Lane departure warning system disabled

Pressing the lane departure warning system cutoff
switch disables the function and the indicator
lamp lights.

• Re-enabling the lane departure warning sys-

tem
Pressing the lane departure warning system cutoff
switch again enables the system to function. The
lane departure warning system also operates auto-
matically when the engine is stopped and started
again. The indicator lamp goes out when the
system's function operates.

5 Warning display
The warning is shown in the multi-information
display, and when the indicator lamp lights up,
the lane departure warning system function is dis-
abled due to a malfunction with the system.
Request an inspection as soon as possible at a
nearby authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

= 

Limited slip differential

The limited slip differential performs a special func-

tion in addition to the ordinary differential function
that is needed when the vehicle is in a turn. When
one wheel begins to spin on a slippery surface, the
limited slip differential provides most of the driving
force to the wheel that is not spinning, thus auto-
matically stopping the spinning and providing trac-
tion to the vehicle.
This function is effective when driving on bumpy or
snow laden roads, and useful when moving the
vehicle out of mud.
8-22 Handling special equipment

WARNING
When you raise the vehicle on one side for
replacing a tyre or any other purpose never
rotate the raised wheel. Doing so is danger-
ous as power is transmitted to the wheel that
is on the ground and the vehicle could move.

CAUTION
Z09031
Use only the special oil destined for limited slip
differentials if your vehicle is equipped with a
multiple-disc clutch type limited slip differential.

NOTE:
A vehicle with limited slip differential can be identi-
fied by precautionary stickers near its driver’s
seat and on the rear axle housing.

The limited slip differential actions take place auto-

matically, but it is recommended you pay attention
to the following points:
• On slippery road surfaces, excessively pressing
the accelerator pedal during a turn may cause
the vehicle to skid and lose balance. Keep this
in mind for your safety.
• Using tyres different in pressure or outside
diameter between the right and left wheels may
result in pulling the vehicle to one side during
acceleration or uneven wear of tyres. Check the
tyres regularly to make sure the right and left
ones are inflated to the same pressure and not
different in outside diameter.
• Distribute the load weight evenly. If the load is
heavier at the rear, the vehicle’s tendency to
move in a straight line will slightly increase.
 8-23

Antilock braking system (ABS)

If a vehicle is driven on a slippery road or it is run-

ning with no or only light load, the wheels can lock
and then skid when the brake pedal is strongly
depressed. The ABS is a computer-controlled sys-
tem that deters the wheels from locking by control-
ling the braking force on each wheel.
The ABS is combined with EBD, which appropri-
ately distributes the braking force according to the
weight on each axle and can delay operation of the
ABS to the point beyond which all wheels will lock.
Z16072

WARNING
• Even the ABS cannot remove limitations
on the vehicle’s running and braking per-
formance. It is your responsibility to judge
road and other conditions properly and
drive safely on slippery surfaces.
• The ABS does not always shorten the
braking distance. Do not depend too much
on the system but keep safe following dis-
tances.

CAUTION
If you intend to install radio equipment please
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer beforehand.

1 Driving tips
NOTE:
• If the ABS is malfunctioning and the ABS warn-
ing lamp stays on, no ABS functions are avail-
able. Even if this condition happens, the brakes
work normally. If the warning lamp stays on,
have the vehicle repaired by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer as soon
as possible.
• EBD stands for “Electronic Brake force Distribu-
tion”.
• To be able to take prompt actions in any situa-
tion involving ABS operation, you should know
its operational characteristics, which are as fol-
lows:
• On an ordinary road surface, the ABS may
work even when you do not apply heavy
braking.
The ABS may work only on the rear wheels
at the time of relatively strong braking on a
dry road surface if the vehicle is not laden or
carrying a light load. This does not indicate
an abnormal condition. If the brake pedal is
further depressed after ABS works on the
rear wheels, the braking force on the front
8-24 Handling special equipment

wheels increases, thus shortening the stop-

ping distance.
• The ABS works even while the wheels are
not locking. The system performs the neces-
sary control by sensing the vehicle speed
and the degree of acceleration, in order to
prevent complete lockup of the wheels.
• While the ABS is in operation, it is not neces-
sary to pump the brake pedal (depressing
the pedal two or three times), as the system
automatically adjusts the braking forces. If
you pump the brake pedal, the braking dis-
tance will increase as the pedal must be
released during pumping.

1.1 Brake pedal operation

Hold the brake pedal depressed as necessary even
when the ABS is in operation.
When the ABS is working, you may feel very slight
or slow vibration through the brake pedal, but this
does not indicate an abnormal condition. Continue
depressing the brake pedal.
You may also feel slight vibration of the vehicle
body or hear the sound of a motor running. These
conditions are caused by normal operation of the
system, and are not a fault.

1.2 Braking distance

The braking distance varies with the road surface
condition. On a gravel road or a road covered with
deep, fresh snow, the braking distance may be
longer with ABS-equipped vehicles than with vehi-
cles without ABS.

Z14700

1.3 Steering wheel operation

In the case of hard braking, you may feel the vehicle
pulling slightly to the right or left. If this occurs when
the wheels on one side are on ice or another slip-
pery surface and the wheels on the other side are
not, you may have to correct the direction with the
steering wheel.

1.4 Illumination of ABS warning lamp

If the ABS warning lamp comes on while driving, the
system is faulty. Although the ABS function is not
available under this condition, the brake system
operates normally. P. 6-29
 8-25

Trailer coupling and trailer socket

• The trailer coupling (ball-type) is used for

hitching and towing a trailer. The maximum
weight of the trailer which trailer coupling can be
used to tow is as follows.

Z13227 Model Maximum weight

FEA5 models 3 tons
Other than FEA5 models 3.5 tons

• The trailer socket supplies power to the trailer

lamps.

Trailer socket type 13-pole

• Be sure to place the starter switch in the “LOCK”

position before hitching or unhitching a trailer.
• After hitching a trailer, make sure the towing
vehicle detects the trailer by placing the starter
switch in the “ON” position, then depressing the
brake pedal for at least one second.
• For instructions on hitching and unhitching a
trailer and instructions on using the trailer, refer
to the trailer owner’s handbook.

WARNING
If the trailer has safety chains install the
hooks (option) on your vehicle and be sure
to attach the safety chains to the hooks. The
safety chains will prevent a serious accident
if the trailer accidentally comes unhitched.

NOTE:
• After coupling the trailer, operate the lighting
and turn signal switches, and press the brake
pedal. Check that all lamps illuminate normally
on the towing vehicle and trailer.
• Before hitching a trailer, check the trailer cou-
pling for play. If there is any play in the coupling,
do not use it and have it inspected by your near-
est MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

1 Driving with a trailer coupled

• Constantly keep an eye on the trailer’s move-
ment.
• When the vehicle is turned left or right or driven
around tight bends, the trailer will swing sharply
inward. Take this movement into account when
maneuvering the vehicle.
• When driving downhill, decelerate to prevent the
trailer from pushing the towing vehicle. This is
particularly important on winding downhill roads.
8-26 Handling special equipment

2 Jack-knifing
The coupling between the towing vehicle and trailer
is designed to allow a pivoting action when the vehi-
cle is steered. On slippery road surfaces, therefore,
sudden steering or braking can cause the towing
vehicle to rotate about the trailer coupling and swing
toward the trailer. This behavior, known as “jack-
knifing”, is extremely dangerous.

2.1 Prevention of jack-knifing

• Avoid sudden braking and steering operation.
Consistently careful driving should eliminate the
need for sudden application of the brakes. Take
particular care to avoid sudden braking and
downshifting (including the skipping of gears on
downshifts) when driving at high speeds, on
curves, on downhill roads, and on snowy, icy,
wet, and other slippery surfaces.
To prevent the wheels from slipping, decelerate
gradually by using engine braking and the
exhaust brake together.
• Never steer sharply and apply the brakes sud-
denly at the same time; it is extremely danger-
ous.
• Unbalanced wheel-braking forces can lead to
jack-knifing, so have inspections and mainte-
nance performed regularly.
• Over-inflation of tyres reduces the tyre-to-road
contact area and makes the wheels slip sooner.
Make sure the tyres are inflated to the specified
pressure.

3 Parking
When parking with a trailer coupled to the towing
vehicle, be sure to activate the trailer parking brake
in addition to the towing vehicle parking brake. Also,
remember to apply chocks (available from an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer)
to the wheels.
 9-1

9. Heating and air conditioning

Front air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Rear air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Fully automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Rear air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9-2 Heating and air conditioning

Front air outlets

Z21365

1 Adjusting the airflow direction

• Adjust the up/down direction of airflow from
each outlet as desired by moving up or down the
knob or fin .
• Adjust the left/right direction of airflow from each
outlet as desired by pressing the right or left side
of the outlet.
• Close each outlet by moving the knob or fin fully
downward. The outlet opens if the knob or fin is
moved upward.
NOTE:
Avoid placing anything between the windshield and
instrument panel, as it will block the necessary air-
flow toward the windshield.

Z21366
 9-3

Rear air outlets

<Crew-cab>
1 Air outlets in vehicle equipped with rear
air conditioner

2 Adjusting the airflow direction

• Adjust the left/right airflow direction from each
outlet as desired by moving the knob to the
left or right.
• Adjust the up/down airflow direction from each
outlet as desired by pressing the top or bottom
of the outlet.


9-4 Heating and air conditioning

Heater

NOTE:
The heater uses the heat produced by the engine
coolant. Warm air is, therefore, not available until
the coolant temperature becomes sufficiently high.

1 Control panel

Z21999

Mode selector dial

Fan speed dial
Temperature adjustment dial
Air selector switch
 9-5

1.1 Fan speed dial

The fan speed dial allows you to turn off the fan and
select any of the four fan speeds as desired.
0: Turned off
1: Breeze
2: Weak
3: Medium
4: Strong

Z21037

1.2 Temperature adjustment dial

Turn the dial in the direction of arrow to increase
the air temperature and in the direction of arrow
to reduce it.

Z22000

1.3 Air selector switch

Pressing the air selector switch allows you to toggle
the setting between recirculation of inside air and
introduction of outside air. When recirculation is
selected, the indicator lamp in the switch comes
on.
• Outside air
Use this setting when driving in normal condi-
tions.
• Recirculation
Use this setting when the outside air is dirty.
Z22314
Using this setting when parking enables you to
prevent dust from entering the cab.

CAUTION
Using the recirculation setting for a long time
will cause air to become stale. If this happens
switch to the outside air setting.

NOTE:
• Select outside air when driving in normal condi-
tions.
• Using the recirculation setting for a long period
when humidity is high makes the windows prone
to fogging.
9-6 Heating and air conditioning

1.4 Mode selector dial

Use the mode selector dial to select outlets as
desired.
• For airflow toward the upper body
Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21367

• For airflow toward the upper body and

toward the feet
Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21368

• For airflow toward the feet

Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21369

• For airflow toward the feet and toward the

windshield
Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21370

• For airflow toward the windshield

Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21371
 9-7

2 Using the controls

2.1 To heat the cab
Place the mode selector dial in the position or
in the position.

Z22001

2.2 For cool airflow toward the head and warm

airflow toward the feet
Place the mode selector dial in the position or
in the position.

Z22002

2.3 To defog the windshield

Place the mode selector dial in the position. If
you wish to defog the windshield quickly, use the
fan speed dial to select the maximum fan speed
and use the temperature adjustment dial to select
the maximum temperature.

Z22003

2.4 To ventilate the cab

Press the air selector switch to select outside air,
and place the mode selector dial in the position.
When the mode switches to air recirculation, the
indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

Z22004

3 Cleaning the air filter

Clean the air filter every 6 months.
A dust clogged air filter may cause malfunction of
the blower motor. P. 12-96
9-8 Heating and air conditioning

Manual air conditioner

WARNING
Never leave children alone in the cab espe-
cially when the air-conditioning is on. They
will suffer from dangerously high interior
temperatures should the air conditioning
accidentally stop.

CAUTION
To protect the environment your vehicle’s air
conditioning system uses refrigerant HFC-134a
which does not harm the ozone layer.
Since charging the system with this refrigerant
requires a method different from the conven-
tional method be sure to contact the nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if your system needs to be serviced.

NOTE:
• The heater uses heat produced by the engine
coolant. Warm air is, therefore, not available
until the coolant temperature becomes suffi-
ciently high.
• When you perform the parked DPF regenera-
tion, the engine compartment temperature will
rise, probably causing the air conditioning sys-
tem to stop. You may then feel reduced air con-
ditioning performance, but this does not indicate
any abnormality. The air conditioning system will
automatically restart functioning normally as
soon as the engine compartment temperature
drops to a normal temperature following the ter-
mination of the DPF regeneration.
• A fast idling device increases the engine’s idling
speed slightly when the air conditioner is used.
• Do not release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
When necessary because of servicing or scrap-
ping of the vehicle, consult the nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer in
order to have the refrigerant properly removed.
 9-9

1 Control panel

Z22312

Mode selector dial

Fan speed dial
Temperature adjustment dial
Air selector switch
Air conditioner switch

1.1 Fan speed dial

The fan speed dial allows you to turn off the fan and
select any of the four fan speeds as desired.
0: Turned off
1: Breeze
2: Weak
3: Medium
4: Strong

Z21037

1.2 Temperature adjustment dial

Turn the dial in the direction of arrow to increase
the air temperature and in the direction of arrow
to reduce it.

Z22313
9-10 Heating and air conditioning

1.3 Air selector switch

Pressing the air selector switch allows you to toggle
the setting between recirculation of inside air and
introduction of outside air. When recirculation is
selected, the indicator lamp in the switch comes
on.
• Outside air
Use this setting when driving in normal condi-
tions.
• Recirculation
Use this setting when the outside air is dirty.
Z22314
Using this setting when parking enables you to
prevent dust from entering the cab.

CAUTION
Using the recirculation setting for a long time
will cause air to become stale. If this happens
switch to the outside air setting.

NOTE:
• Select outside air when driving in normal condi-
tions.
• Using the recirculation setting for a long period
when humidity is high makes the windows prone
to fogging.
• If the air selector switch is pressed with the
starter switch at “OFF”, the setting will not
change until the starter switch is turned to “ON”.

1.4 Air conditioner switch

Pressing the air conditioner switch activates the air
conditioner, which has cooling and dehumidifying
functions. The indicator lamp in the switch comes
on at this time. Pressing the air conditioner switch
once more stops the air conditioner.

NOTE:
• If the air conditioner switch is pressed with the
starter switch at “OFF”, the air conditioner will
not start until the starter switch is turned to “ON”.
Z22315 • If the air conditioner switch is pressed when the
fan speed dial is turned to the “OFF” position,
the air conditioner will not start until the fan
speed dial is turned to an operating position.

1.5 Mode selector dial

Use the mode selector dial to select outlets as
desired.
• For airflow toward the upper body
Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21367
 9-11

• For airflow toward the upper body and

toward the feet
Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21368

• For airflow toward the feet

Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21369

• For airflow toward the feet and toward the

windshield
1. Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21370

• For airflow toward the windshield

Place the mode selector dial in the position.

Z21371

2 Using the controls

2.1 To heat the cab
Place the mode selector dial in the position or
in the position.

Z22322
9-12 Heating and air conditioning

2.2 For cool airflow toward the head and warm

airflow toward the feet
Place the mode selector dial in the position or
in the position.

Z22324

2.3 To defog the windshield

Place the mode selector dial in the position. If
you wish to defog the windshield quickly, use the
fan speed dial to select the maximum fan speed
and use the temperature adjustment dial to select
the maximum temperature.

Z22325

2.4 To ventilate the cab

Press the air selector switch to select outside air,
and place the mode selector dial in the position.
When the mode switches to air recirculation, the
indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

Z22327

2.5 To cool the cab

Press the air conditioner switch to activate the air
conditioner, then use the temperature control dial to
set a comfortable temperature. The indicator lamp
will be illuminated while the air conditioner is
operating.

Z22328

3 Cleaning the air filter

Clean the air filter every 6 months.
A dust clogged air filter may cause a poor air condi-
tioning performance and blower motor malfunction.
P. 12-96
 9-13

Fully automatic air conditioner

WARNING
Never leave children alone in the vehicle. If
the air conditioner stops for some reason or
other the temperature inside the vehicle will
rise and can cause heat stroke for example.

CAUTION
To protect the environment your vehicle’s air
conditioning system uses refrigerant HFC-134a
which does not harm the ozone layer.
Since charging the system with this refrigerant
requires a method different from the conven-
tional method be sure to contact the nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if your system needs to be serviced.

NOTE:
• Coolant from the engine is used in the heating
unit. If the level of coolant is low, the unit will be
unable to generate warm air when required.
• When you perform the parked DPF regenera-
tion, the engine compartment temperature will
rise, probably causing the air conditioning sys-
tem to stop. You may then feel reduced air con-
ditioning performance, but this does not indicate
any abnormality. The air conditioning system will
automatically restart functioning normally as
soon as the engine compartment temperature
drops to a normal temperature following the ter-
mination of the DPF regeneration.
• Do not release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
When necessary because of servicing or scrap-
ping of the vehicle, consult the nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer in
order to have the refrigerant properly removed.
9-14 Heating and air conditioning

Z22471

Air outlet selector dial

Air volume adjustment dial
Temperature adjustment dial
Air selector switch
Air conditioner switch

1 Using the air conditioner automatically

1. Set the air volume adjustment dial to “AUTO”.

Z21055

2. Set the desired temperature using the tempera-

ture adjustment dial.
You can adjust the set temperature to a value
between 17 C and 27 C.

Z22472
 9-15

3. Set the air outlet selector dial to “AUTO”.

The air outlet (excluding and ), air vol-
ume, “ON” or “OFF” status of the air conditioner,
and air selector are adjusted automatically.

Z21057

4. To stop operation, set the air volume adjustment

dial to OFF.
NOTE:
• Do not place objects on the solar radiation sen-
sor or cover it because this will prevent the air
conditioning operation from taking account of
solar radiation.
• During “AUTO” operation, if you operate the air
volume adjustment dial, the air outlet selector
dial, or the air selector switch, the operated
function will take priority. Functions other than
the operated one will be controlled automati-
cally.
Z21374 • The automatic control of the air selector does
not work when the air conditioner is turned off.

2 Using the air conditioner manually

• Operate each dial as desired.
Even during automatic (AUTO) operation, the
operated function will take priority.
• Functions other than the operated one will be
controlled automatically.
• To stop operation, set the air volume adjustment
dial to OFF.

2.1 Defrosting the windshield

• When you turn the air outlet selector dial to ,
the air conditioner operates automatically and
the air selector is switched to draw in outside air.
• To quickly defrost the windshield, set the air vol-
ume adjustment dial to maximum, and then set
the temperature to maximum using the tempera-
ture adjustment dial.

Z22473

2.2 Preventing contaminated air from entering

the vehicle
• Press the air selector switch so as to select air
recirculation.
• When the mode switches to air recirculation, the
indicator lamp in the switch lights.
• Each time you press the switch, the mode
switches between outside air ventilation and air
recirculation.

Z21060
9-16 Heating and air conditioning

NOTE:
• When the air outlet selector dial and the air vol-
ume adjustment dial are in the “AUTO” position,
and the air selector switch is operated, the air
selector function switches to manual.
• To put the air selector function in “AUTO”, turn
the air outlet selector dial or the air volume
adjustment dial to a position other than “AUTO”,
then turn it to “AUTO” once again.
• Normally, use the outside air ventilation mode.
• When the humidity is high, if you use the air con-
ditioner in the air recirculation mode for a long
period, condensation is likely to occur on the
windshield.

2.3 Changing the air volume

To increase the air volume, turn the air volume
adjustment dial to the right, and to reduce the air
volume, turn the dial to the left.
: Strong
: Weak

Z21061

2.4 Dehumidifying and air conditioning

Pressing the air conditioner switch activates the air
conditioner, which has cooling and dehumidifying
functions. The indicator lamp in the switch comes
on at this time. Pressing the air conditioner switch
once more stops the air conditioner.

Z22474

2.5 Changing over the selected air outlet

Each time you turn the air outlet selector dial, the
selected air outlet changes over.
• Blowing air toward your upper body

Z21377
 9-17

• Blowing air toward your upper body and feet

Z21378

• Blowing air toward your feet

Z21379

• Blowing air toward your feet and the wind-

shield

Z21380

• Blowing air toward the windshield

Z21381

2.6 Stopping all operations

Set the air volume adjustment dial to OFF.

Z21068
9-18 Heating and air conditioning

3 Cleaning the air filter

Clean the air filter every 6 months.
A dust clogged air filter may cause a poor air condi-
tioning performance and blower motor malfunction.
P. 12-96
 9-19

Rear air conditioner

WARNING
Never leave children alone in the cab espe-
cially when the air-conditioning is on. They
will suffer from dangerously high interior
temperatures should the air conditioning
accidentally stop.

CAUTION
To protect the environment your vehicle’s air
conditioning system uses refrigerant HFC-134a
which does not harm the ozone layer.
Since charging the system with this refrigerant
requires a method different from the conven-
tional method be sure to contact the nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if your system needs to be serviced.

NOTE:
• When using the rear air conditioner, keep the
front air conditioner running at the same time.
The rear air conditioner cannot cool the air
unless the front air conditioner is running.
• When you perform the parked DPF regenera-
tion, the engine compartment temperature will
rise, probably causing the air conditioning sys-
tem to stop. You may then feel reduced air con-
ditioning performance, but this does not indicate
any abnormality. The air conditioning system will
automatically restart functioning normally as
soon as the engine compartment temperature
drops to a normal temperature following the ter-
mination of the DPF regeneration.
• Do not release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
When necessary because of servicing or scrap-
ping of the vehicle, consult the nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer in
order to have the refrigerant properly removed.
• Both the front and rear air conditioning systems
use a common cooling unit. Check the refriger-
ant level in the cooling unit which is incorporated
in the front system if the cooling efficiency has
deteriorated.

1 Using the controls

Power switch
Mode selector buttons
Fan speed selector buttons
Temperature control lever

An inside lamp will light up when any of the above

switches or buttons is in the “ON” position.

Z08887
9-20 Heating and air conditioning

1.1 Power switch

Pressing the power switch activates the rear air
conditioner’s fan. The lamp in the switch comes
on at this time. Pressing the switch again stops the
fan. The lamp in the switch goes off at this time.

Z08888

1.2 Mode selector buttons

Use the mode selector buttons to select outlets as
desired.
• For airflow toward the upper body
Press the mode selector button.

• For airflow toward the upper body and

toward the feet
Press the mode selector button.


 9-21

• For airflow toward the feet

Press the mode selector button.

1.3 Fan speed selector buttons

These buttons allow you to select 3 fan speeds.
When a button is pressed, the lamp in that button
comes on.
LO : Weak
M : Medium
HI : Strong

Z08893

1.4 Temperature control lever

Move the temperature control lever toward the
side to increase the air temperature and toward the
side to reduce it.

Z08894
9-22 Heating and air conditioning

2 Using the controls

2.1 Heating
Warm air is directed toward your feet during the
heating operation.
1. Turn ON the power switch .
2. Select a comfortable temperature by sliding the
temperature control lever .
3. Press a mode selector button – normally the
button – to the “ON” position.
4. Adjust the air flow rate by pressing the desired
fan speed selector button .

2.2 Cooling
Cool air flows toward your head during the cooling
operation.
1. Make sure that the driver’s air conditioner switch
is in the “ON” position.
2. Turn ON the power switch .
3. Slide the temperature control lever as neces-
sary for the most comfortable temperature.
4. Press the mode selector button to the ON
position.
5. Adjust the air flow rate by pressing the desired
fan speed selector button .


 9-23

2.3 Dehumidifying
The air conditioner cools the air for dehumidifica-
tion, and warms it again with a heater before it is
released through the outlets.
Use this mode of operation when the air feels too
humid, for example, in rainy weather.
1. Make sure that the driver’s air conditioner switch
is in the “ON” position.
2. Turn ON the power switch .
3. Move the temperature control lever to a mid-
dle setting.
Z08897
4. Select the desired outlets using the mode selec-
tor buttons and select the desired fan speed
using the fan speed selector buttons .

2.4 Air circulation

This mode of operation allows the air to circulate
inside the cab.
1. Turn ON the power switch .
2. Place the temperature control lever in a low
temperature position.
3. Select desired air outlet combination with the
mode selector button and air flow rate with
the fan speed selector button .

Z08898
3 Cleaning the air filter
The air filter should be cleaned every 6 months.
A dust clogged air filter may cause a poor air condi-
tioning performance and blower motor malfunction.
P. 12-96
 10-1

10. Interior equipment and accessories

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Interior lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Step lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Small article compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Using the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-2 Interior equipment and accessories

Cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter can be used when the starter

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
Push the cigarette lighter all the way in. It will soon
pop back to the original position with its core red
hot. Pull out and use.
Z21383

WARNING
• Do not hold the cigarette lighter in the
pushed-in position as this can cause the
lighter to overheat.
• Something is wrong with the lighter if it
does not pop out within approx. 30 sec-
onds. If this should happen pull it out
manually as leaving it in the socket could
cause a fire.
If the cigarette lighter stops working prop-
erly stop using it and have it fixed immedi-
ately by the nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Do not leave your vehicle with the ciga-
rette lighter pushed in. Doing so could
result in a fire.
• Do not allow a child to touch the cigarette
lighter. The child could get burned.
• Do not touch the metallic parts of the ciga-
rette lighter. You could get burned.
• Never use a cigarette lighter from another
vehicle. Your vehicle’s cigarette lighter is
designed for a 12 V power supply. Do not
use a 24 V cigarette lighter.
• If the cigarette lighter becomes deformed
you must replace it with a MITSUBISHI
FUSO genuine replacement lighter. A
deformed lighter will not pop out properly
and could cause a fire.
• Do not use electrical devices designed to
be plugged into the cigarette lighter
socket as this could overload the circuitry
and overheat the wiring. This could also
damage the inside of the cigarette lighter
socket.
• If water gets into the cigarette lighter
socket it could cause a short circuit
resulting in a fire. Have the cigarette
lighter socket cleaned by the nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor
or dealer.
 10-3

Ashtrays

Remove and empty the ashtrays when they

become full.

WARNING
• Be sure to put out cigarettes and match-
sticks before putting them in the ashtrays.
Close ashtrays completely. Leaving an
ashtray open could cause a fire as the
heat from cigarettes or matchsticks may
ignite things in the ashtray.
• Put only cigarette stubs and matchsticks
in the ashtray. Empty the ashtray before it
becomes completely full as too many
stubs crammed into the ashtray could
catch fire.
• Do not throw cigarette ends out of the win-
dows since this is environmentally irre-
sponsible and could start a fire.
• When cleaning the ashtray do not strike it
with a hard object since it could break. If
the ashtray breaks stop using it and
replace it with a new one. Using a broken
ashtray could cause a fire.

1 Driver’s door ashtray and assistant

driver’s door ashtray
• Raise the lid to use the ashtray.
• When you wish to empty the ashtray, hold the lid
and pull the entire ashtray upward to remove it.

Z21384

2 Rear ashtray in Crew-cab model

8]TI " • Pull the lid of the ashtray toward you for use.
• When you wish to empty the ashtray, push down
the spring and pull the ashtray out toward
you.
• To refit the ashtray, insert its bottom into the
groove then hold down the spring and push
the ashtray into place.


10-4 Interior equipment and accessories

Z21385

Coat hooks

<Other than Crew-cab models>

Use the coat hooks if you wish to hang up clothing
or similar items.

Z08840

Sun visors

The sun visor screens your eyes from sunlight.

Change its angle as needed. Unhook the inside
edge of the sun visor and swing it sideways to
reduce glare from the side. There is a ticket holder
on the back of the driver’s sun visor.
Z21386

Interior lamp

The interior lamp(s) can be used with the starter

switch in any position.

WARNING
Do not leave the interior lamp or spot lamps
lit while driving. Otherwise the light reflected
by interior surfaces will form images on the
windshield which will disturb your forward
vision increasing the risk of an accident.
 10-5

CAUTION
Leaving an interior lamp illuminated for a long
time with the engine not running can drain the
battery to such an extent that the engine cannot
be started.

1 Interior lamp
• “ON” position
The lamp is illuminated regardless of the door
positions.
• “ ” position
The lamp comes on when a door is opened and
goes off when the door is closed.
If the engine is stopped, the lamp will gradually
dim and go out 10 seconds after closing the
door.
Z21387 • “OFF” position
The lamp is off regardless of the door positions.

2 Interior lamp with built-in spot lamps

<Vehicles with interior lamp with built-in
spot lamps>
• “ON” position
The interior lamp is illuminated regardless of the
door positions.
• “ ” position
The interior lamp comes on when a door is
opened and goes off when the door is closed.
If the engine is stopped, the lamp will gradually
Z21388 dim and go out 10 seconds after closing the
door.
• “OFF” position
The interior lamp is off regardless of the door
positions.
Spot lamp switches
If one of these switches is pressed, the spot
lamp on the side of the pressed switch comes
on. The lamp goes out when the switch is
pressed again.

3 Rear interior lamp – Crew-cab models

• “ON” position
The lamp is illuminated regardless of the door
positions.
• “ ” position
The lamp comes on when a door is opened and
goes off when the door is closed.
If the engine is stopped, the lamp will gradually
dim and go out 10 seconds after closing the
door.
Z11389 • “OFF” position
The lamp is off regardless of the door positions.
10-6 Interior equipment and accessories

Step lamp

• When a door is opened, the step lamp on the

door comes on. The lamp goes out when the
door is closed.
• The step lamp goes out about 5 minutes after
opening the door under either of the following
Z21736 conditions:
• The starter key is removed or in the “LOCK”
position.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

NOTE:
The step lamp does not go out while the hazard
warning lamps are flashing.

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the mirror to the position where the best rear

view can be obtained.

Fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is a dry chemical powder type

and usable on class A, B and C fires. This fire extin-
guisher is effective for a fire in its initial stage.

 WARNING
• You should read through the instructions
on the label attached to the fire extin-
guisher for its proper use and application
so that you will be prepared to extinguish
a possible fire.
• Replace the chemical before its useful life
period expires.
 10-7

Small article compartments

> 

WARNING
Do not use the console and tray to hold items
that are prone to rolling while the vehicle is
moving. Such items could create a hazard by
impeding driving.

CAUTION
Do not splash water on the glove compartment
and tray and do not put wet objects in
them.
Fuses relays and other electrical components
are stored underneath the glove compartment
and tray. If these components are exposed to
water your vehicle’s electrical system could be
damaged.

Overhead shelf

WARNING
Do not use the overhead shelf to hold items
that are heavy and/or prone to rolling. Such
items could fall down and cause injuries as
the vehicle starts and stops moving.

Vertical compartment
10-8 Interior equipment and accessories

Hook
<Other than Crew-cab models>

Z21390

Door pocket

Centre tray
<Other than Crew-cab models>

Z21391

Centre console box

<Except FEA model>

Pocket <Right-hand drive vehicles>

Back panel console box <Except FEA and

Crew-cab models>

Cup holder
Pull out the cup holders to use them. Keep them
pushed in when they are not being used.

WARNING
The contents in a cup or can held in the cup
holder may spill during movement of the
vehicle. Beware of scalding if they contain
hot beverages.
Z21737

CAUTION
• Take care not to spill drinks when using the
cup holder. Immediately wipe up any drinks
that are spilled.
• Do not spill any water or drink over the
switches and electrical equipment around
the driver’s seat as wet electrical devices
could malfunction and even cause a fire. If
you spill a drink or water over electrical
devices have your vehicle inspected by your
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.
 10-9

Seatback tray
When folded, the centre seatback can be used
as a tray.
The centre seatback tray is provided with a clip,
which enables you to use it as a clipboard.

Lower pocket
NOTE:
If you accidentally drop something like a pen into
the lower pocket, take it out through one of the
holes that open at both sides of the pocket’s
inside bottom using a long, thin rod or similar object.

Z21738

Glove compartment with lock

Lock
Unlock

Z21394

Tray <Vehicles with tray>

Box with lid (2DIN)

Pocket
10-10 Interior equipment and accessories

Using the radio

The radio (optional) can be used with the starter

switch in the “ON” position or “ACC” position.

CAUTION
Using the radio for an extended period without
the engine running could drain the battery.

• Extend the antenna before using the radio.

Retract the antenna when it is likely to cause an
obstruction; for example, when tilting the cab.

Z13179
 11-1

11. In cold weather

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
When parking the vehicle after replenishing the AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Other recommendations for cold weather operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Installing tyre chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11-2 In cold weather

Coolant

• When vehicles are shipped from the factory,

MITSUBISHI genuine FUSO DIESEL
LONGLIFE COOLANT is added to the coolant in
their cooling systems.
This additive combines both antifreeze and anti-
rust capabilities to sufficiently protect the cooling
Z09270
system from freezing up. However, for added
safety, it is recommended that you have your
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer check that the coolant has a proper
concentration of the additive before winter
begins.
• Be sure to use coolant added with the FUSO
DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT or an equivalent
to the recommended concentration.
P. 12-54

Engine oil

The viscosity of the engine oil increases in cold

temperatures, sometimes making it hard to start the
engine, especially early in the morning. Therefore,
use an engine oil of a viscosity which suits the
weather conditions.

Fuels

Ordinary diesel fuel gels in freezing temperatures,

making it impossible to start the engine.
If you are bound for a cold region, it is recom-
mended that you fuel your vehicle so that it burns
more than half the fuel by the time you reach your
destination. This allows you to refuel with a grade of
diesel fuel appropriate to the colder weather condi-
tions.
 11-3

When parking the vehicle after

replenishing the AdBlue®

If the urea tank becomes empty, a driving restriction

automatically engages, so the vehicle can be driven
only slowly.
In cold weather, if you do not operate the driving
restriction canceling procedure before you park
your vehicle refilled the tank with AdBlue®, the
AdBlue® will freeze, so the driving restriction will
become impossible to cancel.
Perform the driving restriction canceling procedure
immediately after refilling the tank with AdBlue® in
cold weather. P. 1-9

Other recommendations for cold

weather operation

• If the engine fails to start, turn the starter switch

back to the “ACC” position or “LOCK” position in
order to recover the battery function and wait 30
seconds before trying to start the engine again.
• As the temperature falls, battery performance
decreases. Check the battery electrolyte level
and its specific gravity. P. 12-89
Special lubricants/hydraulic fluids must be used
in cold regions where the ambient temperature
could drop below –25°C. For details, consult
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer.
• Replace the windshield washer fluid with one for
cold weather to prevent freezing. Follow the fluid
manufacturer’s instructions when adjusting the
concentration.

CAUTION
Never use engine coolant fluid as window
washer fluid. It would damage the body paint-
work.

• Occasionally check the undercarriage and

fender wells, and if necessary remove snow and
ice taking care not to damage vehicle parts as
you do so. If your vehicle is equipped with ABS,
there is ABS equipment, electrical wiring, etc. on
the inner side of the wheels, so be careful not to
damage them when removing snow and ice
from the tyres.
11-4 In cold weather

• The brakes may be frozen up when the vehicle

is driven on snow-laden roads or during parking
in cold weather. Since frozen brakes are slug-
gish to function, drive your vehicle carefully
while paying attention to vehicles behind, as
well as in front, and checking normal function of
the brakes from time to time by slightly pressing
the brake pedal. If the brakes are sluggish,
depress the brake pedal repeatedly while driving
at a low speed until normal braking returns.
• Avoid parking on a slope. Select a level, flat sur-
face not directly exposed to wind or snow as far
as possible. If there is wind, turn the front of the
vehicle away from the wind.
• Do not apply the parking brake in extremely cold
conditions that could cause it to freeze up and
become impossible to release. In such condi-
tions, take the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle and pull the parking brake
lever. Never park on a slope.
2. Block the wheels securely with chocks.
3. In a manual transmission vehicle, put the
gearshift lever in the 1st or reverse position.
In a vehicle with a DUONIC® system, put the
gearshift lever in the “P” position.
4. Release the parking brake lever.
• On vehicles with air conditioner, operate the air
conditioner at least once a month to maintain its
functions even during the cold season when it is
not being used.

NOTE:
• If the doors freeze up, melt the ice using hot
water, then wipe off the water to prevent further
freezing. Do not force the doors open since their
rubber seals may be ripped or otherwise dam-
aged.
• In cold weather, the key holes and door opening
rubber parts can freeze so that the key cannot
be inserted and the doors cannot be opened.
Carefully wipe off all water after the vehicle is
washed, and spray the key holes and door
opening rubber parts with silicone or some other
substance that effectively prevents freezing.
 11-5

Installing tyre chains

• Make sure that tyre chains are installed properly

so that they do not become loose and interfere
with other vehicle parts while the vehicle is in
motion.
• Use tyre chains corresponding to the tyre size.
The example below is the procedure to be fol-
lowed when installing triple chains.

CAUTION
• Do not use chains on the front wheels on
any models except for the FG models;
instead use of snow tyres is recommended.
On the FG models install tyre chains on
both the front and rear wheels when driving
in the 4WD mode. When driving in the 2WD
mode chains may be removed from the front
wheels.
• If you use tyre chains be sure to install them
without any slack.
• When fitting tyre chains refer to the instruc-
tions supplied with them.
• Drive at low speeds desirably at speeds
lower than 30 km/h (19 mph) when chains
are installed on wheels.
• Driving on a dry road with chains installed
may damage the chains as well as the road
surface. Avoid doing so as far as possible.
• Make sure that the chains and their spring
bands are not excessively worn or otherwise
damaged.
• If you hear an abnormal noise while driving
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe place and
check the tyre chains.

1. Place the chains over the tyres with the hook

ends of cross chains facing outward.

Z09325
11-6 In cold weather

2. Connect the hook of inside chain , leaving

no excess links. Then, take up the slack in the
inside chain by pulling cross chains for the
inside tyre outward.

Z09326

3. Temporarily connect hook of outside chain

as shown.

Z11190

4. Pull the middle chain as far as possible and

connect its hook.
5. Pull both ends of outside chain as far as pos-
sible and connect hook .

Z11191

6. Ensure that hooks and are flat on the tyre

sidewalls. Also make sure that the chains are
not twisted.
7. Fasten extra chain links with a metal wire to pre-
vent them from hitting against other vehicle
parts.

Z09329

8. Fit spring band . Attach the hooks of spring

band on the chain at even intervals with the
hook ends facing outward.
9. After driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes,
check the chains for looseness or disconnected
hooks.

Z09330
 12-1

12. Simple inspection and service

General precautions for servicing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Onboard tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Reaching the access opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Pre-operational checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Oils and fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Filter elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
Draining water from fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
Engine coolant – check and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54
V-belts – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62
Steering wheel – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64
Service brakes – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
Parking brake – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67
Clutch – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
Tyres – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
Tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71
Tyre rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83
Spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85
Wiper blade – replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-87
Windshield washer – fluid level check and refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88
Battery – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89
Lamps – check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95
Air filters – cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96
Cleaning your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
Intercooler and radiator – cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102
12-2 Simple inspection and service

General precautions for servicing

the vehicle

• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the

starter key.
• Set the parking brake firmly and place the gear-
shift lever in the neutral position (manual trans-
mission vehicles). If your vehicle is equipped
with the DUONIC® system, place the gearshift
lever in the “P” position.
• Work with the vehicle parked on level ground.
• Block the wheels with chocks.
• Engine parts are extremely hot immediately
after you have driven the vehicle. Take care not
to burn yourself. If possible, service the vehicle
only when the engine is cool.
• Be careful not to drop objects into the air intake
duct.
• Do not climb onto the engine. Stepping on
engine pipes or accessories could cause dam-
age and malfunctions.
• After you have completed the service job, check
that you have left no rags, paper, or tools in the
engine compartment. Flammable objects in par-
ticular should not be left inside the engine com-
partment as they could cause a fire.
• After carrying out inspections and maintenance,
check that there are no oil, fluid or water leaks.
• Be careful not to hurt yourself on the corners of
the body when performing inspections.
• When inspecting the oil or coolant, be sure to
make ready a container suitable for catching
drained fluid.
• Dispose of drained oil, coolant, tyres and battery
in the specified manner. Disposing of them irre-
sponsibly could cause environmental harm.
 12-3

WARNING
• Do not run the engine for a long period in
any poorly ventilated place. Particularly in
an enclosed area such as the inside of a
garage or other building a buildup of
exhaust gases can cause carbon-monox-
ide poisoning.
• Be sure to stop the engine before perform-
ing inspections with the cab tilted or
engine access opening opened. If the
engine was running and your hands
clothes or other items touched or came
into close proximity to the engine’s rotat-
ing parts they could be dragged into the
mechanism resulting in injuries.
If you must unavoidably perform inspec-
tions with the engine running do not on
any account touch the fan or any other
rotating part.
• The fuel injection system includes a high-
voltage circuit. You could receive an elec-
tric shock if inspections are performed
with the starter switch in the “ON” posi-
tion. If it is unavoidable to perform inspec-
tions with the starter switch turned “ON”
be careful not to touch the electric wiring
or connectors.

CAUTION
• Do not remove the covers around the engine
except when the engine is inspected. These
covers help to reduce noise.
• Always use MITSUBISHI genuine parts for
replacements such as filters or filter ele-
ments. Also oil and grease should be those
recommended by MFTBC. P. 14-3
• The muffler contains a catalytic converter
and a ceramic filter. Do not kick or knock the
muffler since the catalytic converter or
ceramic filter could be damaged.
Water emitted from the exhaust pipe may
slightly acidic and should not be touched. If
you touch this water rinse it off under a fau-
cet.
• The urea dosing system continues to oper-
ate for about 2 minutes after the starter
switch has been put in the “LOCK” position.
Wait for at least 2 minutes before discon-
necting the battery and electrical system
connectors in order to carry out an inspec-
tion maintenance and so on.
12-4 Simple inspection and service

NOTE:
• Special lubricants/hydraulic fluids must be used
in cold regions where the ambient temperature
could drop below –25°C.
For details, consult your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Perform each item of inspection or replacement
depending on either the odometer reading or
operating period (months), whichever occurs
first.

Onboard tools

Z19539

1 Onboard tool list

Your vehicle is equipped with the following tools for
use in regular inspection and servicing.

CAUTION
Each of the onboard tools is designed for a spe-
cific task. Be sure to use the right tool for every
job.
 12-5

NOTE:
Onboard tools are different according to models.
Tool bag
Spanners (set of three)
Screwdriver
Pliers
Socket wrench (for wheel nuts)
Wrench handle (for wheel nut wrench and
hydraulic jack) <FEA0, FEB0>
Wrench handle (for wheel nut wrench and
hydraulic jack) <Other than FEA0, FEB0>
Spare tyre handle (for removal and installation
of spare tyre) <FEA models vehicle without
spare tyre carrier of rear overhang>
Spare tyre handle (for removal and installation
of spare tyre) <FEA models vehicle with spare
tyre carrier of rear overhang>
Hydraulic jack
Tyre repair kit (Option)
Consists of:
Bag, Emergency repair sealant bottle and
aerosol bottle, Aerosol bottle set, Valve
core remover – long type (for front wheel tyres
and rear inner wheel tyres), Valve core
remover – short type (for rear outer wheel tyres),
Spare valve cores (2 pieces), Tyre pres-
sure gauge

2 Tool storage location

<All models except Crew-cab models>
• The onboard tools are stowed at the back of the
driver’s seat and assistant driver’s seat.
When you wish to use them, fold the seatbacks
forward to gain access to them.



<Crew-cab models>
• The onboard tools are stowed in the compart-
ment under the rear seat. Undo clamps on
the rear seat and raise the seat. Keep the seat
raised by holding it with support strap(s) .
There is one support strap on standard cab
models, while there are two straps on wide cab
models in which the rear seat is divided into two
parts.

 
12-6 Simple inspection and service

Reaching the access opening

<Crew-cab models>
1 Engine access opening
There is an opening under the assistant driver’s
seat which provides access to the engine for
inspection and servicing.
Uncover and cover the opening as follows:
• To uncover the opening
1. Tip the seatback forward.
2. Fold back the floor mat. Next, release the two
clamps by first pulling down their handles
and then raising the handles while still pulling
only on their ends.
3. Raise the seat cushion , then release the
retaining hook on the bottom of the seat cush-
ion.
4. Attach the retaining hook to the grip beside
the assistant driver’s seat to hold the seat in
 place.
• To cover the opening
1. Remove the retaining hook from the grip while
supporting the seat cushion to prevent it from
dropping.
2. Attach the retaining hook to the spring on the
bottom of the seat cushion to hold the hook in
place.
3. Gently lower the seatback and seat cushion,
then fasten the clamps to retain it.
4. Return the floor mat and seatback to their origi-
nal positions.

CAUTION
• Be careful not to trap the seat belt or floor
mat when covering the engine access open-
ing.
• Completely fasten the clamps after covering
the engine access opening.
 12-7

2 Power steering fluid and engine coolant

level inspection opening
In front of the rear seat, there is an opening for
inspecting and replenishing the power steering fluid
and engine coolant.
Uncover and cover the opening as follows:
1. Remove the cover .
2. Raise the clamp to unhook it and then swing
down the inspection opening cover .
Perform the above procedure in reverse to
cover the opening.

Z20950
12-8 Simple inspection and service

Tilting the cab

<Other than Crew-cab models>

NOTE:
A Crew-cab cannot be tilted.

WARNING
• When tilting the cab do so correctly using
the method shown in this manual. If you
raise or lower the cab using an incorrect
method you may get your hands or other
body parts trapped. Also the cab may not
lock completely. If the cab may not lock
completely the cab may lift up and cause a
serious accident while the vehicle is in
motion.
• Park on a flat level area before raising or
lowering the cab. If the area is not flat and
level there is a risk that the cab may not
lock completely when it is lowered. If the
cab may not lock completely the cab may
lift up and cause a serious accident while
the vehicle is in motion.

1 Preparation

WARNING
• Before tilting or lowering the cab make
sure that the area around the cab is clear
of people and obstructions. Also make
sure there is nobody in the cab.
• The cab will move too quickly under the
effect of inertia if it is tilted on a slope
possibly causing damage to various vehi-
cle components. Doing so is dangerous
as the hook may not engage completely
when the cab is lowered.
Never tilt the cab when the vehicle is on
any kind of slope.
• Never tilt the cab with persons inside.
• To ensure safety two people should work
together to tilt the cab if it has a roof deck
or other heavy item attached to it. One per-
son working alone could become unable
to support the cab and have an accident
as a result.
• If any heavy item of cargo is on the roof
deck or in the cab remove it before tilting
the cab. Otherwise its weight could cause
the cab to move suddenly during tilting
resulting in an accident.
• Do not touch the steering wheel gearshift
lever parking brake lever or any other
control in the cab while the cab is tilted.
 12-9

CAUTION
If any item of cargo is in the cab retain or
remove it. Otherwise it may tip or fall and get
damaged when the cab is tilted.

NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner,
turn off the air conditioner before tilting the cab. Tilt-
ing the cab with the air conditioner running would
cause the water that drains out of the air conditioner
to leak into the cab.

• Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface and

stop the engine.
• Set the parking brake securely.
Chock the wheels for added safety.
• In a manual transmission vehicle, place the
gearshift lever in neutral. In a vehicle with a
DUONIC® system, place the gearshift lever in
the “P” position.
• Remove water or other liquids from inside the
cab before tilting. Also remove from the cup
holders any beverage that has an open lid.
• Close both doors completely.
• Before tilting the cab, make sure there is ade-
quate clearance in front of the cab and above it.

Clearance in front (m) 1 or more

Clearance above (m) 1 or more

If there are any obstructions within the clear-

ance areas shown above, remove them.
• Lower the radio antenna.

2 Tilting the cab

CAUTION
Raise the cab gently. Raising it quickly with
great force could damage the cab tilt mecha-
nism.

1. Pull lever A . With lever A still pulled, pull up

lever B . Keep lever A pulled until the lever B
has been fully raised.

CAUTION
Lever B must only be raised when lever A has
been pulled. If an attempt is made to raise lever
B by force it may be damaged as a result.

Z09214
12-10 Simple inspection and service

2. Grasp tilt grip and pull lever C . The cab will

rise slightly.

Z09215

3. Hold the tilt grip and raise the cab until the end
of cab stay engages with the notch of the
lock lever . The cab is secured when they are
engaged.

Z16404

4. Still holding the tilt grip, insert the stopper into

the notch of the lock lever.

WARNING
• Hold the tilt grip when raising the cab. If
you raise the cab holding lever B or lever
C the cab lock mechanism may be dam-
aged or the cab may not lock completely
when the cab is lowered. Also these may
Z16405 raise the cab and cause a serious accident
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure to insert the stopper into the
notch of the lock lever. If the stopper may
not insert completely the cab may lower
and cause a serious accident.

3 Lowering the cab

WARNING
• Hold the tilt grip and support the cab while
lowering it slowly. Your body may be
trapped if the cab is lowered quickly or the
cab may not lock completely.
• Before lowering the cab make sure that
you have not left rags tools etc. in the
engine compartment. Flammable objects
left inside the engine compartment can
cause fires.
 12-11

1. Release the stopper and retain it in the clip .

Z11913

2. Hold the tilt grip to support the cab. Lift the lock
lever and fold the cab stay .

WARNING
• Hold the tilt grip when lowering the cab. If
you lower the cab holding lever B or lever
C the cab lock mechanism may be dam-
aged or the cab may not lock completely.
Also these may raise the cab and cause a
Z11914 serious accident while the vehicle is in
motion.
• When you have unlocked the cab stay
immediately move your hands away from
the lever. The cab stay will tip toward the
rear of the vehicle so your hands could
otherwise get trapped.

3. Still holding the tilt grip , lower the cab until the
hook on lever C engages with the cab mount
.

Z09219

4. Push down lever B until the pin engages

with the latch .
If you cannot push down lever B, repeat the cab
tilting procedure.

Z09220
12-12 Simple inspection and service

4 Checking locking of the cab

WARNING
After lowering the cab confirm that the cab is
locked in place. If the cab lock is not fully
secure the cab may lift up and cause a seri-
ous accident while the vehicle is in motion.

When the cab is lowered down, the state of locking

should be checked as follows. If incomplete locking
is identified, repeat the cab tilting procedure and
lower once again. If incomplete locking still exists,
never drive the vehicle and contact your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

1. Confirm that the latch is fully engaged with

the pin . Also confirm that lever B does not
move when it is pulled.
2. While pulling the lever C , pull the grip to
raise the cab and confirm that the cab does not
rise.
3. If the cab does rise, repeat the cab tilt proce-
dure.



4. Turn the starter switch to the “ON” position, then

make sure the multi-information display does
not indicate the warning.

WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle while the multi-infor-
mation display is showing . Vibration
could cause the cab to rise. If the multi-infor-
mation display is showing tilt the cab
Z20948 again.
 12-13

Pre-operational checks

Be sure to perform the pre-operational checks for

the items listed below at the start of each day’s
operation in order to ensure safe and comfortable
driving. If you find anything unusual you are unable
to repair yourself, you should have this corrected at
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distrib-
utor or dealer before operating the vehicle.

CAUTION
The engine oil level changes depending on the
usage conditions. As part of daily inspections
check the oil level before driving the vehicle.
If you use the vehicle under the following condi-
tions the engine oil may exceed FULL (for
inspection) ( symbol) or drop below LOW on
the oil level gauge quicker than usual.
• Operating in slow vehicle speed (lower than
20 km/h (12 mph) in average and more than
30% of total operation) or operations involv-
ing frequent starts and stops.
• Operations involving frequent engine starts
and stops condition in 10 minutes and in 10
km (6 miles) distance.
• Operating with the engine running at idle for
long time frequently.

1 Before starting the engine

Z22197
12-14 Simple inspection and service

Coolant level
Check that the coolant level is between the
“FULL” and “LOW” marks on the reservoir
tank.
P. 12-56

Z15730

Air cleaner element condition

Check that the dust indicator’s window shows
a red signal.
P. 12-46

Window

Z22468

Pressure cap condition

Make sure the pressure cap is tightly fitted.

Z19637

Engine oil level

Check that there is sufficient engine oil using
the oil level gauge. Change the engine oil if its
level is above the circle mark on the oil level
gauge.
P. 12-23

 

Leakage of coolant fuel and oil

Check underneath the vehicle for any sign of
leakage.

Z10751
 12-15

V-belt tension and damage

Push the belt at either of the locations
indicated by the arrows to check that the
tension is appropriate.
Also, check the belt for damage.

Z22041

2 In the driving post

Start the engine and perform the following checks
while allowing it to warm up.

Z22198

Parking brake lever stroke

Check that the parking brake lever stroke is
equal to 7 to 9 notches when the lever is pulled
with a force of 294 N (30 kgf).
P. 12-67

Z10681

Service brake pedal

Make sure that the brake pedal has 0.1 to 3
mm free play when pressed by finger.
Check also that when the brake pedal is fully
depressed, there is a gap of 10 mm or more
between the pedal and the floor.
P. 12-66

Z11955

Brake fluid level

Check that the brake fluid level is between the
“MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir tank.
P. 12-33

Z21401
12-16 Simple inspection and service

Steering wheel free play

Lightly turn the steering wheel both when the
engine is turned off and when it is idling and
check that the free play of the steering wheel
conforms to the following specifications.
Front indepen-
20 mm
dent suspension
When models or less
Z11947 engine is
turned off Front rigid leaf
suspension 10 to
20 mm
models

When engine is idling 5 to

50 mm
Steering wheel looseness
Try moving steering wheel up and down and
also right and left to check for excessive loose-
ness. P. 12-64

Z09290

Lighting system
Make sure that each lamp lights up or flashes
properly. Check lamp lenses for dirt and dam-
age.
P. 12-95

>

Gauge warning/indicator lamp operation

Check that gauges, warning lamps and indica-
tors are working properly.
P. 6-2

Z22015
 12-17

3 While walking around the vehicle

Z22199

Wheels and tyres

Check the disc wheels for cracks and other
damage. Check the tyres for inflation pres-
sure, tread groove depth, foreign objects in
grooves, cracks, uneven wear, softening and
blistering.
P. 12-69

Z22262

Suspension springs
Check for broken springs and tilt of vehicle
body toward either side.

Z10753

Battery fluid level

<With battery fluid <Without battery fluid If your battery has a battery fluid level indicator
level indicator> level indicator> on top, check that the indicator is black.
If your battery has no fluid level indicator,
check that the battery fluid level is between the
“UPPER” and “LOWER” level lines on the
sides of the battery case.
P. 12-90
Indicator
Black White NOTE:
The above instructions may not apply to your
particular battery; you must inspect the battery
Z20093 fluid level according to the instructions of your
battery’s manufacturer.
12-18 Simple inspection and service

4 While driving at slow speeds

Perform the following checks while driving in a safe
place at speeds lower than 20 km/h (12 mph).

Steering wheel operation

Check that the steering wheel does not vibrate
or pull to one side and that it is not unduly
heavy. Also make sure that the steering wheel
returns to its neutral position smoothly.
P. 12-65

Z11954

Brake performance
Press the brake pedal and check that the
brakes work effectively and evenly on all
wheels.
P. 12-66

Z21408
 12-19

Greasing

1 Grease nipples
Remove all dust and dirt from the grease nipples
before using them. Always use the recommended
grease.

CAUTION
Wipe away any grease that sticks to wires or
rubber hoses and any grease that overflows
from the grease nipples.

Greasing intervals
Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles) or 24 months

<FE>

Z21409
12-20 Simple inspection and service

<FG>

Z21410

Z21152 Z09226

Grease nipple

Z09227 Dust covers Z09228

 12-21

Grease nipple

Dust plug hole

Z16543 Z09498

Recommended lubricant:
Chassis grease
NLGI No.1 (Li soap)
Rear spring pin, front (2 points each on both
sides)
Rear spring pin, rear (4 points each on both
sides)
King pin bearing (4 points in total on both sides)
<Rigid leaf suspension models>

Recommended lubricant:
Wheel bearing grease
NLGI No.2 (Li soap)
Propeller shaft universal joint
Supply the grease until it emerges from the uni-
versal joint dust covers (four places).
Propeller shaft slip joint
Supply the grease until it emerges from the slip
joint dust plug hole.
Propeller shaft double cardan joint
<FG models>
NOTE:
The number of greasing points on the propeller
shaft differs from model to model.

2 Door hinge (total six places on right and

left doors 12 places on Crew-cab mod-
els)
Apply the recommended grease to the door hinges
and anchor hooks after wiping them clean.

Greasing intervals
Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles) or 48 months
Z10719
12-22 Simple inspection and service

Recommended lubricant:
Chassis grease
NLGI No. 1 (Li soap)

3 Anchor hooks (two places)

<Not applicable to Crew-cab models>
Apply the recommended grease to the door hinges
and anchor hooks after wiping them clean.

Greasing intervals
Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles) or 48 months

Z21154 Apply grease to the top of each anchor hook.

Recommended lubricant:
Chassis grease
NLGI No. 1 (Li soap)

Oils and fluids

1 Engine oil
Performance, life, and startability of the engine
depend to a large degree on the engine oil. Always
use oil of the specified grade and viscosity.

Inspection At the time of pre-operational

intervals check

Normal Every 40,000 km

(24,000 miles) or
use
Replacement 24 months
intervals Every 20,000 km
Severe
use* (12,000 miles) or
12 months
*Severe use is as follows.
• The vehicle is driven mostly at 20 km/h
(12 mph) or slower. (Mileage ratio of low speed
driving is 30% or over)
• Operation involves starting and stopping the
engine frequently (at 10-minute intervals or
shorter).
• The vehicle is repeatedly driven for short dis-
tances of 10 km (6 miles) or shorter.

CAUTION
• If the warning is displayed replace the
engine oil as soon as possible.
• If the warning and warning (amber)
are displayed alternately replace the engine
oil immediately. If the same oil is used even
after the warning the engine may suffer vari-
ous problems including uncontrolled rev-
ving of the engine in an extreme case.
 12-23

Recommended lubricant:
Engine oil

Classification SAE viscosity number

ACEA C2 0W–30,5W–30

Quantity required:

Quantity
Replacing oil Approx. 5.5 liters
Replace the oil and the Approx. 6.0 liters
filter at the same time

CAUTION
• Use only the specified engine oil. Any other
oils may contain substances that cause the
ceramic filter inside the DPF to be loaded
with particulate matter (PM) prematurely to
the capacity and thus shorten the effectively
functioning period of the DPF.
• Change the engine oil at the specified inter-
vals. During the regeneration process of the
DPF part of the fuel may mix into the engine
oil while the PM is being removed by burn-
ing. If the engine oil is not changed at the
specified intervals it may excessively deteri-
orate due to mixing of fuel and could cause
engine failure. In the worst case the engine
could spontaneously run at an abnormally
high speed.

1.1 Check

CAUTION
The engine oil level changes depending on the
usage conditions. As part of daily inspections
check the oil level before driving the vehicle.
If you use the vehicle under the following condi-
tions the engine oil may exceed FULL (for
inspection) ( symbol) or drop below LOW on
the oil level gauge quicker than usual.
• Operating in slow vehicle speed (lower than
20km/h (12 mph) in average and more than
30% of total operation) or operations involv-
ing frequent starts and stops.
• Operations involving frequent engine starts
and stops condition in 10 minutes and in
10km (6 miles) distance.
• Operating with the engine running at idle for
long time frequently.
12-24 Simple inspection and service

NOTE:
• Check the engine oil level with the vehicle
parked on a level place. A correct engine oil
level cannot be determined when the vehicle is
tilted.
• Be sure to check the engine oil level before
starting the engine at the time of pre-operational
check. A correct engine oil level detection can-
not be expected if the engine is running, or the
time after stopping the engine is too short. Let
the engine stand at least 15 minutes after stop-
ping it before checking the oil level.
• The quantity of engine oil may increase due to
the fuel that may have mixed with it when the
DPF trapped PM is removed by burning. This
does not indicate any abnormality. For the same
reason, the engine oil can smell like fuel; this
also does not indicate any abnormality.
1. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8
If the vehicle is a Crew-cab model, uncover the
engine access opening under the assistant
driver’s seat. P. 12-6
2. Remove oil level gauge and wipe off oil with a
cloth.
3. Fully insert the oil level gauge in the crankcase,
and gently draw it out.

Z21103

4. Check the engine oil on the oil level gauge.

• There is no problem if the oil level is within the
inspection level range (between FULL (for
inspection) and LOW) indicated in the figure.
• The engine oil must also be changed if the oil
level exceeds FULL (for inspection).
P. 12-25
• Engine oil must be added if it is below LOW, or
near LOW. P. 12-25
• The engine oil must also be changed if it is
extremely dirty. P. 12-25
>
( symbol): FULL (for inspection)
(above notch): HIGH (for refilling) CAUTION
(below notch): LOW
If the oil level is above FULL (for inspection) (the
circle mark) on the oil level gauge change the
engine oil immediately. Because this is a sign of
deteriorated engine oil performance continued
use of the same oil will cause engine failure and
could even cause uncontrolled revving of the
engine.

5. After the check, insert the oil level gauge into

position and secure it properly.
 12-25

1.2 Adding oil

1. Clean the area around oil filler cap to prevent
dust and dirt from entering the engine.
2. Remove the oil filler cap and add the specified
oil as necessary.

WARNING
Take care not to spill engine oil as engine oil
on the exhaust manifold the starter or other
Z21277 hot sections of engine could catch fire. Wipe
clean spilt oil.

CAUTION
• The added oil should be of the same grade
and viscosity as the oil originally placed in
the engine.
• Do not add oil so that it exceeds HIGH
(above notch) on the oil level gauge. Doing
so will cause wasteful oil consumption and
cause the oil level gauge to exceed FULL (for
inspection) ( symbol) quicker than usual.
• When adding engine oil take care not to spill
it. If oil is spilled on a belt the belt will slip
on pulleys.

3. Close the oil filler cap, wait for more than 5 min-
utes and check the oil level. If the oil is not within
the replenishing level range indicated in the fig-
ure, add or remove oil to adjust the level.
4. Start the engine and warm it up until the water
temperature gauge moves to around the 8th
segment on the scale (center of indicator).
5. Stop the engine and wait for more than 15 min-
utes before checking the oil level again. If the oil
is not within the replenishing level range indi-
cated in the figure, add or remove oil to adjust
>
the level, and return to step 4 to inspect the oil
(above notch): HIGH (for refilling) level again.
(below notch): LOW 6. Check that there are no oil leaks from the drain
plug.

1.3 Replacement
NOTE:
You must reset the engine control unit every time
after replacing the engine oil. See 1.4 “Resetting the
engine control unit” for details of the method. If you
cannot do it yourself, have it done by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

1. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8

On a Crew-cab model vehicle, uncover the
Z21277 engine access opening under the assistant
driver’s seat. P. 12-6
2. Clean the surfaces around the oil filler cap
and remove the oil filler cap.
12-26 Simple inspection and service

3. Remove drain plug from the oil pan to remove

the oil. P. 12-36

Z21701

Drain the oil until only droplets come out.

WARNING
The engine oil is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been operated. Take
care to avoid being scalded when draining
hot oil. Give the oil time to cool before drain-
ing it.

>
NOTE:
Oil removal is quicker if performed shortly after the
vehicle has been stopped and while the oil is still
warm.
4. After oil has been drained out, clean the area
around the drain plug hole.
5. Replace the O-ring with a new one and tighten
the drain plug.

30±10 Nm
Tightening torque (3.0±1.0 kgfm)

6. Carefully pour fresh engine oil through the oil

filler.
7. Close the oil filler cap, wait for more than 5 min-
utes and check the oil level. If the oil is not within
the replenishing level range indicated in the fig-
ure, add or remove oil to adjust the level.
8. Crank the engine in accordance with the engine
starting procedure shown on page 5-7.
9. Start the engine and warm it up until the water
temperature gauge moves to around the 8th
segment on the scale (center of indicator).
10. Stop the engine and wait for more than 15 min-
utes before checking the oil level again. If the oil
>
is not within the replenishing level range indi-
(above notch): HIGH (for refilling) cated in the figure, add or remove oil to adjust
(below notch): LOW the level, and return to step 9 to inspect the oil
level again.
11. Check that there are no oil leaks from the drain
plug.
12. Reset the engine control unit. See 1.4 “Reset-
ting the engine control unit” for the method.
 12-27

CAUTION
• Do not add oil so that it exceeds HIGH
(above notch) on the oil level gauge. Doing
so will cause wasteful oil consumption and
cause the oil level gauge to exceed FULL (for
inspection) ( symbol) quicker than usual.
• If the engine is frequently run at high speeds
or under heavy loads the engine oil will
deteriorate quickly and must be replaced
sooner than specified.
• When adding engine oil take care not to spill
it. If oil is spilled on a belt the belt will slip
on pulleys.

WARNING
Take care not to spill engine oil as engine oil
on the exhaust manifold the starter or other
hot sections of engine could catch fire. Wipe
clean spilt oil.

1.4 Resetting the engine control unit

1. Turn the starter switch to “ON”. Do not start the
engine.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal to the floor and
keep it there for at least 20 seconds.
3. While still keeping the accelerator pedal
depressed to the floor, pump the brake pedal at
least 6 times.
When the engine control unit is reset, the
indicator (amber) appears on the display for
about 10 seconds.
4. Turn the starter switch to “LOCK”, and wait for 2
minutes.
NOTE:
The engine control unit calculates the engine oil
replacement time. The steps above are necessary
in order to reset the data used for determining the
engine oil replacement time.

2 Clutch control fluid <Vehicles with

DUONIC® system>
Replacement intervals
Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles)
12-28 Simple inspection and service

Recommended oil:
FUSO ATF SP III

Clutch control fluid quantity

Quantity required Approx. 2.0 litres

2.1 Check addition and replacement

Have the clutch control fluid checked, added, or
replaced by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.

3 Transmission gear oil <Including vehi-

cles with DUONIC ® system>

Replacement intervals
Every 80,000 km (48,000 miles)

Quantity required:

Approx. 3.5 litres

Quantity Approx. 0.2 litres for vehicle
with standard PTO

Recommended oil:
Gear oil
Viscosity
Classification SAE viscosity
Condition
number
General 80
API GL-3 Warm or tropical 90
region
General 80
API GL-4
Warm or tropical
90
region
 12-29

3.1 Replacement
1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
2. Apply chocks to wheels.
3. Remove the transmission inspection cover if
the vehicle is equipped with one.

WARNING
The space between the transmission inspec-
tion cover and the surrounding components
 is small. Be careful not to get hurt by edges
or other parts of these components when
removing or installing the cover.

4. Remove inspection plug and drain plug to

let the oil flow out.

WARNING
The gear oil is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been operated. Take
care to avoid being scalded when draining
hot oil. Give the oil time to cool before drain-
ing it.
Z21759

NOTE:
• Oil removal is quicker if performed shortly after
the vehicle has been stopped and while the oil is
still warm.
• Do not confuse the transmission oil inspection
plug and drain plug with the clutch control
fluid inspection plug and drain plug , which are
located nearer to the front of the vehicle than the
transmission oil inspection plug and drain plug.
5. The drain plug is fitted with a magnet. Wipe off
any metal particles sticking to the magnet,
replace the gasket of the injection plug with a
new one, coat the plug’s threads with sealant,
and then install and tighten the plug.

Sealant ThreeBond 1105

68.6 ± 14.7 N·m

Tightening torque
(7.0 ± 1.5 kgf·m)

6. After transmission oil has drained out com-

pletely, install and tighten the drain plug.

7. Add oil through the inspection plug hole until it

reaches the bottom of the hole.
Put your finger straightly into the inspection plug
hole after one minute has passed, and check
that the transmission oil surface reaches the
opening of the hole.
8. Like with the drain plug, replace the gasket of
the inspection plug with a new one, coat the
threads on the plug with sealant, and then install
and tighten the plug.
Z18456
12-30 Simple inspection and service

Sealant ThreeBond 1105

68.6 ± 14.7 N·m

Tightening torque
(7.0 ± 1.5 kgf·m)

9. Install the transmission inspection cover if the

vehicle is equipped with one.

4 Transfer gear oil <FG models>

Every 80,000 km
Replacement
intervals (48,000 miles) or
24 months

Recommended oil:
Gear oil
Viscosity
Classification SAE viscosity
Condition number
General 80
API GL-3 Warm or tropical
90
region
General 80
API GL-4 Warm or tropical 90
region

Quantity required:
Quantity Approx. 3.1 litres

4.1 Replacement
1. Place a container under the drain plug .
2. Remove inspection plug and drain plug to
let the oil flow out.

WARNING
The gear oil is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been operated. Take
care to avoid being scalded when draining
Z12521 hot oil. Give the oil time to cool before drain-
ing it.

NOTE:
Oil removal is quicker if performed soon after the
vehicle has been stopped and while the oil is still
hot.

3. Wipe off any metal particles sticking to the drain

plug. Replace the plug’s gasket with a new one,
coat the threads on the plug with sealant.

Sealant ThreeBond 1105

 12-31

4. After transfer oil has drained out completely,

install and tighten the drain plug.

Tightening torque 68.6 ± 14.7 N·m

(7.0 ± 1.5 kgf·m)

5. Add oil through the inspection plug hole until it

reaches the bottom of the hole .
Put your finger straightly into the inspection plug
hole after one minute has passed, and check
that the transfer oil surface reaches the open-
ing of the hole.
6. Like with the drain plug, replace the gasket of
the inspection plug with a new one, coat the
threads on the plug with sealant, and then install
and tighten the plug.
Z18456
Sealant ThreeBond 1105

68.6 ± 14.7 N·m

Tightening torque
(7.0 ± 1.5 kgf·m)

5 Differential gear oil

Every 80,000 km
Replacement intervals (48,000 miles) or
24 months

Recommended oil:
Gear oil

Viscosity
Classification Atmospheric SAE viscosity
temperature number
Below 40 C 90
API GL-5
Above 40 C 140

CAUTION
• Use oil conforming to GL-5 SAE140 if the
vehicle is to be driven under heavy load con-
ditions as for example driving up long uphill
grades. Remember however that this oil is
to be used only when the temperature is
higher than 10 C.
• On vehicles with a limited slip differential fill
the differential with FUSO LSD GEAR OIL
(GL-5 SAE90).
12-32 Simple inspection and service

Quantity required:

Model Quantity
FEA0, FEB0 Approx. 2.2 litres
FEA5 Approx. 2.7 litres
FEB7, FEC Approx. 4.5 litres
Front axle Approx. 2.2 litres
FG
Rear axle Approx. 4.5 litres

These oil quantities are given only as guidelines. Be

sure to check the correct oil level by removing the
inspection plug as indicated below.

5.1 Replacement
1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
2. Apply chocks to wheels.
3. Remove inspection plug and drain plug to
let the oil flow out.

WARNING
The gear oil is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been operated. Take
Z09245 care to avoid being scalded when draining
hot oil. Give the oil time to cool before drain-
ing it.

NOTE:
Oil removal is quicker if performed shortly after the
vehicle has been stopped and while the oil is still
warm.
4. Replace the drain plug gasket with a new one
and install the plug by tightening it to the speci-
fied torque.

98 to 115 N·m
Tightening torque
(10 to 12 kgf·m)

5. Add oil through the inspection plug hole until it

reaches the bottom of the hole.
6. Like with the drain plug, replace the inspection
plug gasket with a new one and install the plug
by tightening it to the specified torque.

98 to 115 N·m
Tightening torque (10 to 12 kgf·m)
 12-33

6 Brake fluid

At the time of pre-operational

Inspection check and every 40,000 km
intervals
(24,000 miles)
Replacement
intervals Every 36 months

Have the brake fluid replacement performed by

your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distrib-
utor or dealer.

Recommended fluid:
Brake fluid SAE J1703
FMVSS No.116 DOT4
NOTE:
With a manual transmission vehicle, the brake fluid
serves also as clutch fluid.

WARNING
• Be sure to use the recommended brake
fluid.
• Use only one brand of recommended
brake fluid. Mixing of different brands or
types of fluid will change the properties of
the fluid possibly resulting in a lower fluid
boiling point and damaged brake compo-
nents.
If you wish to change the brand of brake
fluid replace all the existing fluid in the
brake system with the new brand fluid.
• Never allow engine oil diesel fuel gear oil
automatic transmission fluid or any other
mineral oil to mix with the brake fluid.
When mixed with the brake fluid even in
very small amounts such oils will cause
the rubber parts of the brake system to
swell and could cause brakes to become
sluggish or to drag. Also do not place
brake fluid in containers that have been
used for mineral oil.
• Because brake fluid is highly hygroscopic
it should be kept in a dry place both during
refilling and storage. If brake fluid absorbs
moisture the boiling point is lowered a
condition which could result in vapor lock.
This is very dangerous.
Do not open the reservoir tank cap when
checking the brake fluid.
• If the brake fluid is used over long periods
its boiling point drops significantly due to
the moisture it has absorbed thereby
increasing the likelihood of dangerous
vapor lock. Therefore be sure to change
the brake fluid at the specified intervals.

CAUTION
Brake fluid dissolves paint. If you spill the fluid
wipe it clean or flush it off with water.
If not cleaned off brake fluid can cause disco-
louration corrosion or cracks in the paintwork.
12-34 Simple inspection and service

6.1 Check
0,("
CAUTION
Do not open cap of reservoir tank for inspec-
tion purposes.

The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on reservoir tank . Check whether the
reservoir tank contains foreign matter. If you see
foreign matter in the reservoir tank, have the reser-
6,(" voir tank inspected and cleaned by your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

WARNING
If the fluid level is unusually low there is a
fluid leak in the brake line. In this case have
your vehicle inspected at your nearest autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

> NOTE:
The warning lamp is illuminated when the brake
fluid level drops below the “MIN” line.

6.2 Adding fluid

0,(" 1. If the fluid level is lower than the “MIN” line,
remove cover , clean the surfaces around cap
of reservoir tank, open cap , and add the rec-
ommended brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.
2. Close the cap firmly.

WARNING
• The container used for adding brake fluid
should be a clean one free of moisture
mineral oil and dust.
6,(" • Be extremely careful not to let dust and
other foreign matter enter the reservoir
tank as foreign matter in the tank could
cause a failure of the brake system.
If you see foreign matter in the reservoir
tank have it checked and cleaned by your
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.
• If the fluid level is unusually low there is a
fluid leak in the brake line. In this case
have your vehicle inspected at your near-
>
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.

CAUTION
Be careful not to exceed the “MAX” line when
adding brake fluid.
 12-35

7 Power steering fluid

Every 40,000 km
Inspection intervals
(24,000 miles)

If the power steering fluid contains dirt or other for-

eign matter, it must be replaced.
Have your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer replace the fluid.

Recommended fluid:
Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON II DEXRON III type

CAUTION
When adding power steering fluid be sure to
use fluid of the same brand as the existing fluid.
Mixing two or more different fluids will change
their properties and could cause a failure.

NOTE:
Inspect the power steering fluid level after stopping
the engine and allowing the power steering fluid to
cool. Increases in the fluid temperature cause
increases in the fluid level, so an accurate inspec-
tion of the level is not possible unless the fluid is
cold.

7.1 Inspecting and adding fluid

<Except Crew-cab 1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
models> 2. Manual transmission vehicles:
Place gearshift lever in the neutral position.
Vehicles with DUONIC® system:
Place gearshift lever in the “P” position.
3. With the vehicle parked on level ground, place
the front wheels in the straight-ahead position
and stop the engine.
4. Apply chocks to the wheels.
5. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8
Z21413
On a Crew-cab model vehicle, uncover the
power steering fluid and engine coolant level
inspection opening. P. 12-6
<Crew-cab models> 6. Observe the power steering fluid level in the res-
ervoir tank . If the fluid level is between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines, it is acceptable. Also,
check whether the power steering fluid is dirty. If
it is dirty, have it replaced by an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
7. If the fluid level is below the “MIN” line, clean the
reservoir tank’s cap and the surrounding area
then open the cap and add power steering fluid
Z21414 until it reaches the “MAX” line.
8. Securely fit the cap.
12-36 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
• Close the tank cap firmly; otherwise power
steering fluid will leak and could catch fire.
Also wipe clean spilt fluid.
• If the power steering fluid level becomes
abnormally low fluid may be leaking. Have
the steering system inspected by your
nearest MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

CAUTION
• Use a clean container when adding the
power steering fluid. Never use a container
that has held any other types of oil or fluid.
Foreign matter in the fluid could result in a
failure.
• Avoid adding more fluid than specified.
• Insufficient oil can make the steering heavy
or noisy and can damage power steering
components.

Filter elements

1 Oil filter replacement

Every 40,000 km
Replacement intervals (24,000 miles) or
24 months

WARNING
• Spilt engine oil should be wiped off clean.
Oil remaining on the exhaust manifold the
starter or other hot sections of engine
could catch fire.
• The engine is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been driven. If you try
to replace the oil filter immediately after
driving the vehicle you may be scalded.
Give the engine time to cool before start-
ing the job.
• When replacing the element you will be
working in a tight space. Be careful not to
injure yourself on the edges of nearby
components.
 12-37

CAUTION
• Oil filter element must not be cleaned and
reused. Always replace the filter element
with a new one.
• When installing a filter case and an air-
releasing plug be careful not to let the O-
ring twist and be damaged.

The method for replacing the oil filter element

depends on the type of cab, as described below.
Use the one that applies to your vehicle.

1.1 Single-cab models

1. If the engine is cold, warm it up until the engine
oil temperature reaches approximately 40°C. (It
takes approximately 20 minutes of idling to raise
the engine oil temperature from 0°C to 40°C.)
After the oil has heated, stop the engine.
NOTE:
Be sure to warm up the engine. Unless you warm
up the engine, engine oil may spill out when you
remove the oil filter case.

2. Make sure that the parking brake is firmly

applied.
3. Chock the wheels.
4. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8
5. Clean the area around the oil filter case to pre-
vent dirt from contaminating the new filter ele-
ment when it is installed later.
6. Turn the oil filter case counterclockwise
(about two and a half turns) to loosen it.
7. Remove the air-releasing plug of the oil filter
case by turning it counterclockwise. Replace the
removed air-releasing plug with a new plug.
Wait for at least 5 minutes after removing the
air-releasing plug to let oil inside the case drain
out completely.
When replacing engine oil, remove the oil filler
cap and then the drain plug. P. 12-25
Z21170

8. Remove the oil filter case by turning it counter-

clockwise. Use a rag to prevent oil from drip-
ping down.

Z21175
12-38 Simple inspection and service

9. Remove the filter element from the filter case.

If the claw of the filter element is too firmly
engaged to remove the element, insert an Allen
wrench and tap it with a hammer to remove
the element.

CAUTION
Use a 4 mm or 5/32 inch Allen wrench. Using a
larger Allen wrench may damage the air drain
Z22308 plug O-ring seal surface while using a smaller
one may pierce the element.

10. Clean the O-ring contact surface of the oil filter

support and the O-ring groove of the oil filter
case.
11. Replace the O-ring of the oil filter case with a
new one. Apply a light coat of engine oil to the
new O-ring before installing it.

CAUTION
Use only the O-ring supplied with a new replace-
ment filter element.

12. Install the new filter element with its holed end
facing down. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI gen-
uine filter element.
13. Install a new air-releasing to the oil filter case.
Z21178
Use a new air-releasing provided with a new
element.

1.5 ± 0.6 N·m

Tightening torque
(0.15 ± 0.06 kgf·m)

14. Tighten the oil filter case.

Tightening torque 25 to 30 N·m

(2.5 to 3.0 kgf·m)

CAUTION
Do not tighten the air-releasing plug and filter
case beyond the specified torque. The air-
releasing plug and filter case could be broken if
over-tightened.

If the engine oil is replaced, add the necessary

quantity of engine oil. P. 12-25
 12-39

15. Crank the engine in accordance with the engine

starting procedure shown on page 5-7.
16. Start the engine and warm it up until the water
temperature gauge moves to around the 8th
segment on the scale (center of indicator).
17. Stop the engine and wait for more than 15 min-
utes before checking the oil level. If the oil is not
within the replenishing level range indicated in
the figure, add or remove oil to adjust the level,
and return to step 16 to inspect the oil level
again.
>
18. Check that there are no oil leaks from the oil fil-
Oil level gauge ter or drain plug.
(above notch): HIGH (for refilling)
(below notch): LOW

1.2 Crew-cab models

1. Make sure that the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2. Chock the wheels.
3. If the engine is cold, warm it up until the engine
oil temperature reaches approximately 40°C. (It
takes approximately 20 minutes of idling to raise
the engine oil temperature from 0°C to 40°C.)
After the oil has heated, stop the engine.
NOTE:
Z21740 Be sure to warm up the engine. Unless you warm
up the engine, engine oil may spill out when you
remove the oil filter case.
4. Left-hand drive vehicles: Remove the rear side
of the engine side cover by removing the
screws and clips .
If there is not enough clearance to use the tool,
remove the front side of the engine side
cover.
Open the engine inspection door.
Right-hand drive vehicles: Open the engine
inspection hatch under the assistant driver’s
seat. P. 12-6
5. Clean the area around the oil filter case to pre-
vent dirt from contaminating the new filter ele-
ment when it is installed later.
6. Turn the oil filter case counterclockwise
(about two and a half turns) to loosen it.
7. Remove the air-releasing plug of the oil filter
case by turning it counterclockwise. Replace the
removed air-releasing plug with a new plug.
Wait for at least 5 minutes after removing the
air-releasing plug to let oil inside the case drain
out completely.
When replacing engine oil, remove the oil filler
cap and then the drain plug. P. 12-25
Z21170
12-40 Simple inspection and service

8. Remove the oil filter case by turning it counter-

clockwise. Use a rag to prevent oil from drip-
ping down.

Z21175

9. Remove the filter element from the filter case.

If the claw of the filter element is too firmly
engaged to remove the element, insert an Allen
wrench and tap it with a hammer to remove
the element.

CAUTION
Use a 4 mm or 5/32 inch Allen wrench. Using a
larger Allen wrench may damage the air drain
plug O-ring seal surface while using a smaller
Z22308 one may pierce the element.
10. Clean the O-ring contact surface of the oil filter
support and the O-ring groove of the oil filter
case.
11. Replace the O-ring of the oil filter case with a
new one. Apply a light coat of engine oil to the
new O-ring before installing it.

CAUTION
Use only the O-ring supplied with a new replace-
ment filter element.
12. Install the new filter element in the filter case
with its holed end facing down.
Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI genuine filter ele-
ment.
13. Install a new air-releasing to the oil filter case.
Use a new air-releasing provided with a new
Z21178
element.
1.5 ± 0.6 N·m
Tightening torque (0.15 ± 0.06 kgf·m)

14. Tighten the oil filter case.

Tightening torque 25 to 30 N·m

(2.5 to 3.0 kgf·m)

CAUTION
Do not tighten the air-releasing plug and filter
case beyond the specified torque. The air-
releasing plug and filter case could be broken if
over-tightened.

If the engine oil is replaced, add the necessary

quantity of engine oil. P. 12-25
 12-41

15. Crank the engine in accordance with the engine

starting procedure shown on page 5-7.
16. Start the engine and warm it up until the water
temperature gauge moves to around the 8th
segment on the scale (center of indicator).
17. Stop the engine and wait for more than 15 min-
utes before checking the oil level. If the oil is not
within the replenishing level range indicated in
the figure, add or remove oil to adjust the level,
and return to step 16 to inspect the oil level
again.
>
18. Check that there are no oil leaks from the oil fil-
Oil level gauge ter or drain plug.
(above notch): HIGH (for refilling) 19. For left-hand drive vehicles, reinstall the engine
(below notch): LOW side cover. Do these by following the removal
procedures in reverse.

2 Fuel filter replacement

Every 40,000 km
Replacement intervals (24,000 miles) or
12 months

WARNING
• Fuel is highly flammable and should be
kept away from hot objects and open
flames owing to the risk of fire or explo-
sion. Wipe up any spilt fuel.
• Do not replace the fuel filter element
immediately after the vehicle has been
driven as the filter will be hot and could
burn you. Wait until the filter cools down.
• After installing the fuel filter confirm that
no fuel is leaking out. Leaking fuel could
cause a fire or explosion.
• Use only the fuel filter specified for your
vehicle. Use of other filters could cause
fuel to leak and cause a fire or explosion.
• When replacing the fuel filter element be
sure to use the special tool to remove and
reinstall the fuel filter case. If the fuel filter
case is inappropriately reinstalled fuel
could leak and the filter itself could
become damaged possibly resulting in a
fire and/or explosion. If you do not have
the special tool please contact an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
• Be careful not to damage the filter case as
this could cause fuel leakage.
• Keep cigarettes and other sources of heat
away from the vehicle while replacing the
fuel filter. They are dangerous because
they could set fire to the fuel.
• When replacing the fuel filter you will be
working in a tight space. Be careful not to
injure yourself on the edges of nearby
components.
12-42 Simple inspection and service

CAUTION
• Fuel filter element must not be cleaned and
reused.
• Always replace with a new genuine fuel fil-
ter. Do not use the filter element beyond the
recommended replacement intervals. Failure
to observe these may damage the fuel injec-
tion parts.
• Be careful not to allow foreign matter to get
into the fuel system when replacing the fuel
filter element. Foreign matter in the fuel sys-
tem could make the fuel injection system
malfunction.
• Do not kick or strike the fuel filter because it
could damage the internal sensor.

The fuel filter of your vehicle is installed at either

Location of fuel filter (differs by model) location shown in the figure.

Fuel tank

Z21188

1. Make sure that the parking brake is firmly

applied.
2. Chock the wheels.
3. Clean the area around the filter to prevent dirt
from contaminating the new filter element when
it is installed later.
4. Place a container under the fuel filter to collect
the fuel.
5. Disconnect the two fuel tubes. While pressing
the lock button at the connector section ,
pull off the tube. Apply a shop towel around the
connector as some fuel will gush out when pull-
ing the tube off.

>
 12-43

6. Using pen or something, put match marks on

the filter case and drain plug .
7. Loosen the drain plug by turning it in the
direction of the arrow indicated in the figure to
allow the fuel in the fuel filter to drain out. Use
pliers or a similar tool to loosen the plug.
8. After the fuel has been discharged, turn the
drain plug clockwise until the match marks on
the drain plug and filter case are aligned with
each other.
>
Tightening torque 1.5 N·m (0.15 kgf·m)

9. Disconnect the sensor connector . Do this

after pulling up the connector’s lock knob and
then pulling out the top part of the connector.

Z21455

10. Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter

case . Do this by pulling the bottom part of the
connector toward you to release the lock and
then pulling the connector directly upward.

Z21456

11. Insert the special tool (separately available)

horizontally from the opposite direction of the
drain plug .

CAUTION
• Be sure to insert the special tool horizontally
from the opposite direction of the drain plug.
If the special tool is not inserted from the
opposite direction of the drain plug the spe-
> cial tool will be inserted only partially and a
filter case might be damaged.
• When inserting the special tool be careful
not to catch the sensor harness .
12-44 Simple inspection and service

12. Remove the fuel filter case by turning it counter-

clockwise using the special tool (separately
available). Let the fuel inside the case drain out.

>

13. Remove the filter element out of the case by

pulling it straight upward.
14. Replace the O-ring of the fuel filter case
with a new one. After applying a light coat of
engine oil to the new O-ring, install it on the fuel
filter case.

Z21459

CAUTION
• Remove and install the filter element in
parallel with the axis of the filter case. Other-
wise the sensor inside the case could
become damaged.
• Use only the O-ring supplied with a new
replacement filter element.

15. Install a new, genuine filter element into the filter

case as shown in the illustration, paying atten-
tion to its direction.
Insert the filter element in a straight line.

CAUTION
• Install the fuel filter case carefully so as not
to twist or damage the O-ring.
• Do not reuse the filter element.
Z21460
16. Insert the special tool (separately available)
horizontally from the opposite direction of the
drain plug .

CAUTION
• Be sure to insert the special tool horizontally
from the opposite direction of the drain plug.
If the special tool is not inserted from the
opposite direction of the drain plug the spe-
cial tool will be inserted only partially and a
> filter case might be damaged.
• When inserting the special tool be careful
not to catch sensor harness .
 12-45

17. Install the fuel filter case by turning it clockwise.

Make sure the projection on the case is in the
area indicated in the figure past the projec-
tion on the filter head. When you are hard to
confirm a projection, put match marks on a filter
head and the case as a guide.

CAUTION
Always check that the projection on the fuel fil-
ter case is in the area indicated in the figure
past the projection on the filter head. If the fuel
filter case is turned insufficiently or excessively
fuel will leak or the fuel filter case will be dam-
aged.

18. Install the sensor connector to the fuel filter case

and then connect the connector. Do this by fol-
lowing the removal procedure in reverse.

CAUTION
If the battery equalizer is near the sensor har-
ness do not let the sensor harness interfere
with the equalizer. If the heat from the equalizer
melts the harness it could break connections in
the sensor harness.

19. Connect the connector of the fuel tube to the

> fuel filter. Insert the connector deep into the fuel
filter, and insert a little further after a click is
heard.
20. After connecting, hold the connector and move it
slightly forward and backward to confirm that the
connector is locked securely.
21. Bleed air from the fuel system as follows:
Hold the starter switch in the “ON” position for
30 seconds and then set it to the “ACC” position
to supply fuel to the fuel system.
22. Start the engine and check that there is no fuel
leakage.

NOTE:
Air enters the fuel system while replacing the filter
element and will prevent the engine from starting.
Before starting the engine after replacing the filter
element, bleed air from the fuel system.
12-46 Simple inspection and service

3 Air cleaner cleaning and replacement

Checking the air

cleaner element At the time of
condition with dust pre-operational check
indicator intervals
Every 40,000 km
Replacement intervals
(24,000 miles)

WARNING
When cleaning air cleaner element wear gog-
gles and a mask to protect your eyes and res-
piratory organs from dust.
Use a dust collector to prevent dust from dis-
persing into the surroundings.

CAUTION
Clean the air filter at the specified cleaning
intervals. Failure to follow this instruction will
result in premature accumulation of PM in the
DPF and eventually cause the systems to mal-
function. On the contrary unnecessary frequent
cleaning can damage the element allowing dust
and other foreign matter to be drawn into the
engine.

NOTE:
Even if the cleaning or replacement interval has not
elapsed, clean or replace the element if clogging of
the element causes a drop in engine output.
 12-47

• Checking the air cleaner element condition

with dust indicator
The dust indicator is located near the air
cleaner. If the indicator’s window shows a red
signal, the air cleaner element is clogged. Clean
the element immediately.

Z22296

• Resetting the dust indicator

After cleaning the air cleaner element, push the
reset button . The red signal will disappear
from the window of the dust indicator.

> 
12-48 Simple inspection and service

• Removal
1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
2. Apply chocks to wheels.

CAUTION
When removing and reinstalling the cover wear
thick gloves not to hurt yourself on the edges of
nearby parts.
<Type 1>
• Removal
1. Remove the clamps (4 places).

Z22297

2. Remove the air cleaner case , cover and

element .

• Installation
Perform installation in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the protrusion of the air cleaner case
is on the opposite side of the protrusion of the
case.

Z22298
 12-49

<Type 2>
• Removal
1. Undo the two clamps and remove the cover
by pulling it toward the clamps.

Z22467

2. Move the lock lever in the air cleaner element

case to the “UNLOCK” position.

Z21180

3. Pull element straight down to remove.

Z21181

• Installation
1. Insert the air cleaner element into the air cleaner
element case in a straight line.
2. Move the lock lever in the air cleaner element
case to the “LOCK” position.

Z21182
12-50 Simple inspection and service

3. Install the cover on the case by inserting the

projections on the cover into the holes in
the case and then fasten the clamps.

CAUTION
Install the air cleaner element in the case and
close the case completely. A broken packing or
loose fastening of the clamps will cause dust or
other foreign material to be sucked in by the
Z21183 engine causing the pistons and cylinder liners
to become worn prematurely.

• Inspection cleaning
<Type 1>
1. Blow compressed air evenly onto the entire sur-
face from the grill side of the element to
remove dust.

Z22300

2. Shine light from the grill side of the element to

check for escaping light. Also check the gasket
for cracks and damage.

Z22301

3. Clean the inside of the case and cover with

a rag.
4. If the inspection reveals a problem in the ele-
ment or if the specified replacement time has
arrived, replace the element with a new one.

Z22302
 12-51

<Type 2>
1. Remove dust by blowing compressed air over
every surface of the air cleaner element from its
end fitted with the gasket .

CAUTION
• Dust can damage your health. Wear a dust
mask to avoid inhaling dust while cleaning
the air cleaner element. Also wear thick
gloves while removing and installing the
cover.
Z21184 • Keep the air pressure under 685 kPa (7 kgf/
cm2) to prevent the element from being dam-
aged.
• Do not strike the element or hit it against
another object.
• If the element is contaminated with oily soot
or dust replace it regardless of the sched-
uled replacement time.

2. Put a light on the gasket side of the air cleaner

element to check that there are no holes that
allow light to leak in the element. Also check the
gasket for cracks or other damage.

Z21185

3. Clean the inside of the case and cover with a

clean cloth. Clean the sealing sections with par-
ticular care.
4. Replace the element with a new one if the check
reveals a defective cleaner element or when the
recommended replacement interval expires.

Z21186

• Replacement
Use a genuine cleaner element for replacement.
Remove the air cleaner element from the case and
replace it with a new one.

Z21187
12-52 Simple inspection and service

Draining water from fuel filter

If the warning is indicated, there is water in the

fuel filter in an amount exceeding the limit.
Drain the water as follows:

WARNING
• Be careful not to spill fuel. If you acciden-
tally spill fuel wipe it all up.
• Keep cigarettes and other sources of heat
away from the vehicle while draining water
from the fuel filter as they could ignite the
fuel.
• Be careful not to injure yourself on the
edges of nearby components while drain-
ing water from the fuel filter.
• Avoid damaging the fuel filter case as this
will cause fuel to leak.
• Do not drain water from the fuel filter
immediately after driving the vehicle. The
fuel filter is extremely hot immediately
after the vehicle has been driven so you
could get burned. Give the fuel filter time
to cool down before draining water from it.

The fuel filter of your vehicle is installed at either

Location of fuel filter (differs by model) location shown in the figure.

Fuel tank 1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.

2. Apply chocks to wheels.
3. Place a container under the fuel filter.

Z21188

4. Using pen or something, put match marks on

the filter case and drain plug . Using pliers
or other suitable tool, slightly turn the fuel fil-
ter’s drain plug counterclockwise to let water
inside the filter drain out.
5. If only fuel starts flowing out, tighten the drain
plug by turning it clockwise until the match
marks on the drain plug and filter case are
aligned with each other.

>
Tightening torque 1.5 N·m (0.15 kgf·m)

6. Turn the starter switch to “ON” position for 30

seconds and then return it to the “ACC” position
to bleed the fuel system.
7. Start the engine and check that fuel does not
leak.
 12-53

WARNING
• The drain contains both water and fuel.
Be sure to wipe clean the surfaces around
the fuel filter to remove all splashed fuel.
Fuel remaining on the surfaces could
cause a fire.
• Make sure fuel does not leak from the filter
or from related parts. Any fuel leakage
could cause a fire.

NOTE:
Air entered the fuel system while water was draining
from the fuel filter. The air in the system prevents
the engine from being started. You must bleed air
out of the fuel system before you can start the
engine.
12-54 Simple inspection and service

Engine coolant – check and

replacement

At the time of pre-operational

Inspection
intervals check and every 40,000 km
(24,000 miles) or 12 months
Replacement
intervals Every 24 months

1 Recommended coolant
Use a coolant containing the FUSO DIESEL
LONGLIFE COOLANT additive and soft water in the
specified proportions.
Having both corrosion preventive and anti-freezing
properties, the additive protects the cooling system
all year around.

2 Water used with coolant

Use soft water with the properties shown in the fol-
lowing table. Do no use hard water from wells and
rivers as it is liable to form scales and cause corro-
sion.

Total hardness 300 ppm or less

Sulfate SO4– 100 ppm or less
Chloride Cl– 100 ppm or less
Total dissolved solids 500 ppm or less
pH 6 to 8

3 Using FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOL-

ANT
The FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT is an
ethylene glycol base antifreeze (SAE J814-C) with
both antifreeze and anticorrosive properties.
The FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT is used
as a coolant additive by mixing it with soft water at
the specified concentration.

Z09270
 12-55

DANGER
• FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT IS
TOXIC. IF A PERSON HAS ACCIDEN-
TALLY SWALLOWED IT FORCE HIM/HER
TO VOMIT AND CONSULT A DOCTOR
IMMEDIATELY. IF IT SPLASHES IN THE
EYES IMMEDIATELY FLUSH THE EYES
WITH WATER FOR MORE THAN 15 MIN-
UTES AND SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION.
• SHOULD FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOL-
ANT COME IN CONTACT WITH YOUR
SKIN IMMEDIATELY WIPE IT OFF AND
THEN THOROUGHLY WASH YOUR SKIN
WITH LOTS OF CLEAN WATER AND SOAP.
IF YOU FEEL UNWELL OR PAIN ON YOUR
SKIN IMMEDIATELY SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION.
IN THE EVENT OF CONTACT WITH YOUR
CLOTHES IMMEDIATELY FLUSH FUSO
LONGLIFE COOLANT WITH WATER AND
SOAP.
• DO NOT USE FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE
COOLANT IN A CLOSED OR POORLY
VENTILATED SPACE. SHOULD YOU
INHALE A LARGE AMOUNT OF GAS OF
FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT
MOVE TO A PLACE WITH FRESH AIR AND
KEEP YOURSELF WARM AND AT REST. IF
YOU FEEL NAUSEOUS OR OTHERWISE
ABNORMAL IMMEDIATELY SEEK MEDI-
CAL ATTENTION.
• CLOSE THE CAP OF THE FUSO DIESEL
LONGLIFE COOLANT CONTAINER IMME-
DIATELY AFTER USING THE PRODUCT.
• DO NOT STORE FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE
COOLANT WHERE CHILDREN COULD
REACH AND ACCIDENTALLY DRINK IT.
• FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT IS
FLAMMABLE; AVOID EXPOSING IT TO
OPEN FLAME.
• WHEN HANDLING FUSO DIESEL
LONGLIFE COOLANT WEAR AN
ORGANIC GAS MASK PROTECTION
GOGGLES OIL-RESISTANT GLOVES
AND/OR PROTECTIVE APRON AS NECES-
SARY.

CAUTION
Do not use methanol-based or methoxypro-
panol-based antifreeze products. They can
severely damage the engine.
Never mix FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT
with other brands of long-life coolant or any
antifreeze or corrosion-preventive additives.
Doing so would reduce the performance of the
coolant. If a different long-life coolant has been
used and the FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOL-
ANT is to be used be sure to thoroughly flush
the cooling system.
12-56 Simple inspection and service

Use the following table to determine the correct

concentration of FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOL-
ANT according to the lowest temperature at which
your vehicle is to be operated.

FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT concentra-

tion (in volume percentage)

Lowest –10
C –15 –20 –25 –30 –35 –40
temper- or C C C C C C
ature
higher
Con-
35 40 45 50 55 60
centra- 30% % % % % % %
tion

Coolant quantity
FEA Approx. 13 litres
Without rear Approx. 13.7 liters
FGB, air conditioner
FEB,
FEC With rear air
conditioner Approx. 14.8 liters

CAUTION
Use FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT at a
concentration of between 30% and 60%. The
proper concentration under normal tempera-
tures is 30%. At a concentration below 30% this
additive performs poorly as an anticorrosive
while at a concentration exceeding 60% it per-
forms poorly as an antifreeze.

4 Check
NOTE:
• Always check the coolant level before starting
the engine when the coolant temperature is low.
When the coolant gets hot, it expands, making
the level look higher than it actually is.
• Deposition may occur in the reservoir tank, but
this will not cause any problem.
1. Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold
before engine startup.
2. The coolant level is sufficient if it is between the
“FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir tank .
3. If the coolant level is below the “LOW” line,
Z21945 make sure coolant is not leaking from the cool-
ing system, then add coolant until it reaches the
“FULL” line.
4. Check for coolant leakage from the radiator and
radiator hoses.
If you find water on the ground from which your
vehicle has been moved after parking, coolant is
probably leaking.
If the coolant level is abnormally low and quickly
drops again when coolant has been added,
coolant may be leaking from the cooling system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
Z21943 dealer.
 12-57

5 Adding coolant

CAUTION
• Coolant should normally be added through
the reservoir tank without opening the pres-
sure cap on the surge tank.
• When adding coolant use new coolant addi-
tive of the same brand and concentration as
the additive that is already in the vehicle.
• Adding only soft water reduces the concen-
tration of the coolant already in the system
resulting in less protection against freezing
and corrosion. Additional coolant should
always contain the correct proportions of the
additive and soft water.

5.1 Adding coolant during pre-operation

checks
1. If the coolant level is below the “LOW” line,
remove the reservoir tank’s cap and pour in a
mixture of FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE COOL-
ANT plus soft water until it reaches the “FULL”
line.
2. Refit the cap securely after adding coolant.

Z09378

Z21944
12-58 Simple inspection and service

5.2 Adding coolant following an engine over-

heat
If the engine overheats, the amount of coolant may
be insufficient not only in the reservoir tank but also
in the main body of the radiator.
Refer to “If the engine overheats” with regard to the
filling of coolant in situations where the engine has
overheated. P. 13-8

WARNING
Never remove the surge tank’s pressure cap
while the coolant is still hot. Carelessly
removing it is dangerous since boiling cool-
ant and hot steam will gush out and could
scald you. Only after the coolant has cooled
down sufficiently remove the pressure cap
by gripping it in a folded piece of thick cloth
and opening it slowly.

6 Replacement
Be sure to flush the cooling system when replacing
the coolant.

WARNING
• Do not replace the coolant immediately
after operating the vehicle since the
engine radiator coolant and other items
will be extremely hot. If you try to drain the
coolant immediately after driving the vehi-
cle you may be scalded. Give the coolant
time to cool before starting the job.
• Never lift the pressure-relief lever while the
coolant is hot otherwise steam and hot
coolant could surge out and scald you
severely.
Before opening the surge tank’s pressure
cap allow the coolant temperature to
drop then lay a folded piece of thick cloth
over the cap and lift the pressure-relief
lever.

1. Place a can under the radiator drain cock to

receive the coolant.
2. Remove the cap from the reservoir tank.

Z09378
 12-59

Z21944

3. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8

If the vehicle is a Crew-cab model vehicle,
uncover the power steering fluid and engine
coolant level inspection opening. P. 12-6
4. Remove the pressure cap of the surge tank
by turning it counterclockwise.

Z21190

5. Open the radiator drain cock to drain engine

coolant.
NOTE:
You can prevent splashes from draining engine
coolant by connecting a hose (commercially avail-
able with a 7 mm inside diameter) to the drain cock
nipple .
6. After the coolant has been completely drained,
close radiator drain cock.
Z21267 2.5 ± 0.5 N·m
Tightening torque (0.25 ± 0.05 kgf·m)
12-60 Simple inspection and service

7. Flush the cooling system.

Pour soft water (preferably after heating moder-
ately) through the pressure cap opening. Refit
the pressure cap tightly by turning it clockwise.
Lower the cab.
Start the engine and keep it running at a speed
slightly higher than the specified idling speed
until the coolant temperature indicator on the
multi-information display shows the 8th segment
on the scale. P. 6-8
Depress the accelerator pedal and run the
engine at a speed slightly higher than the idling
speed.
Stop the engine after 10 minutes and then drain
out the engine coolant. Take great care as the
coolant is very hot.
Repeat the above procedure until the water is
free of dirt.

CAUTION
If the radiator tubing is clogged or coolant is
more contaminated than usual have your vehi-
cle inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

8. Make sure the radiator drain cock is securely fit-

ted.
9. Tilt the cab. If the vehicle is a Crew-cab model
vehicle, uncover the power steering fluid and
engine coolant level inspection opening.
10. Pour coolant (FUSO DIESEL LONGLIFE
COOLANT plus soft water) up to the top of the
pressure cap opening. Pour the coolant slowly
to prevent air from mixing with it.
NOTE:
When refilling the radiator on a Crew-cab model
vehicle, pour coolant slowly to prevent it from over-
flowing the filler port.

11. Check that the coolant level in the pressure cap

Z21265 opening does not go down, then fit the pressure
cap (turn it clockwise until it is tight).

CAUTION
If air is not completely removed from the cool-
ing system this may lead to reduced cooling
efficiency and engine parts failure. After replac-
ing the coolant drive the vehicle and then check
the coolant level.

12. Lower the cab.

13. Fill the reservoir tank with the coolant (FUSO
DIESEL LONGLIFE COOLANT plus soft water)
to the “FULL” line, then replace the cap.
 12-61

14. Depress the accelerator pedal and keep the

engine running at a speed slightly higher than
the specified idling speed to expel air from the
cooling system. When the coolant temperature
indicator shows the 8th segment on the scale,
allow the engine to idle for 10 more minutes
then stop it.
15. When the engine has cooled, open the pressure
cap and, if the coolant level is too low, add cool-
ant until it reaches the top of the pressure cap
opening.
16. Screw the pressure cap down tightly by turning it
clockwise.
NOTE:
Be sure to screw the pressure cap tightly. Other-
wise, boiling water and steam under high pressure
will gush out if the engine overheats.
17. Run the engine a few more minutes to make
sure that there are no coolant leaks.
18. Make sure that the coolant level in the reservoir
Z21266
tank is in the specified range. Add coolant if nec-
essary.

7 Cleaning the radiator core and inter-

cooler
If the intercooler or front of the radiator core is
plugged with mud or dust, cooling efficiency will be
reduced leading to rust. Clean the intercooler and
the radiator at regular intervals. P. 12-102
12-62 Simple inspection and service

V-belts – check

The belt auto-tensioner adjusts the V-belt to the cor-

rect tension automatically, so you do not need to
adjust it. However, you should check the auto-ten-
sioner is working properly.

Inspection At the time of pre-operational

check and every 40,000 km
intervals
(24,000 miles)

WARNING
Be sure to stop the engine before inspecting
the belt. If the engine were running and your
hands clothes or other items were to touch
or come into close proximity with the
engine’s rotating parts they could be
dragged into the mechanism resulting in
injuries.

CAUTION
• If the belt is found to be damaged have it
replaced by an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer as soon as possi-
ble. The engine could fail if the belt breaks.
• Prevent the belt from any contact with oil or
grease during inspection.
If soiled with oil or grease the belts will slip
and this will shorten their service life.
 12-63

1 Check
1. Confirm that the parking brake lever is pulled.
Prevent the vehicle from moving by blocking the
wheels with chocks. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8
If the vehicle is a Crew-cab model, uncover the
engine access opening under the assistant
driver’s seat. P. 12-6
2. Check whether the V-belt is properly tensioned
by pressing it with your palm in either of the
places marked with arrows.
3. If the belt is excessively loose, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer.
4. Also, check the belts for damage.

Z22041

If a belt is cracked or otherwise damaged, have it

replaced it as soon as possible. Belt replacement
requires component disassembly. Please contact
an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer to have the work done.

Z14709
12-64 Simple inspection and service

Steering wheel – check

The steering wheel is a safety-critical part of the

vehicle. If an inspection reveals any abnormality,
contact your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer and have the abnormal-
ity rectified before you drive the vehicle again. Driv-
ing the vehicle with the abnormality unrectified
could result in a serious accident.

At the time of pre-operational

Inspection
check and every 40,000 km
intervals (24,000 miles)

1 Steering wheel play

NOTE:
Be sure to check the steering wheel play with the
engine running and with the engine turned off.
1. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
2. If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, make sure that the gearshift lever is in
the neutral position. If your vehicle is equipped
with the DUONIC® system, make sure that the
gearshift lever is in the “P” position.
Z09289 3. Gently turn the steering wheel from its straight-
ahead (neutral) position to the point where you
first feel resistance in the clockwise direction
and to the point where you first feel resistance in
the counterclockwise direction. The distance
between the two points is the extent of steering
wheel play. Check the steering wheel play with
the engine running and with the engine turned
off. If it is out of specification with the engine
running and/or with the engine turned off, con-
tact your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

Front
independent 20 mm
Steering When suspension or less
wheel play engine is models
(on the turned
off Front rigid leaf
periphery of 10 to
suspension
steering models 20 mm
wheel)
5 to
When engine is idling
50 mm
 12-65

2 Steering wheel looseness

1. Try moving steering wheel up and down and
also right and left to check for excessive loose-
ness.
2. If anything abnormal is found, contact your near-
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

NOTE:
Make sure the lock lever that is used for steering
Z09290 wheel adjustment is securely locked.

3 Steering wheel operation

1. While driving slowly, make sure that the steering
wheel is free from shake and the vehicle does
not pull to one side. Also check for excessive
operating resistance and unsmooth return to the
neutral position.
2. If any abnormal condition is encountered during
the above check, call your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer for
inspection.

WARNING
Perform the checks in a safe place that pro-
vides good visibility all around. During the
checks be sufficiently attentive to surround-
ing traffic conditions.

Service brakes – check

The service brakes are safety-critical parts of the

vehicle. If an inspection reveals any abnormality,
contact your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer and have the abnormal-
ity rectified before you again drive the vehicle. Driv-
ing the vehicle with the abnormality unrectified
could result in a serious accident.

At the time of pre-operational

Inspection
intervals check and every 40,000 km
(24,000 miles)
12-66 Simple inspection and service

1 Brake pedal play

1. Confirm that the parking brake is securely
applied.
2. Pump the brake pedal several times until you
feel a harder response from it than usual.
3. Measure the distance over which the brake
pedal moves when the centre of the pedal pad is
pressed with light finger force to the point where
resistance is felt (brake pedal play). Check
whether the distance is within specification.
Z09288
Brake pedal play
(at centre of pedal pad) 0.1 to 3 mm

4. If the brake pedal play is not as specified, have

the pedal inspected and adjusted by your near-
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

2 Brake pedal stroke

• Start the engine and allow it to idle.
• Fully press the brake pedal. Check whether the
distance between the fully pressed pedal and
the floor is within specification.

Fully depressed brake 10 mm or more

pedal to floor clearance

Z11612 • If the clearance is smaller than the specified

value, have the brakes inspected by your near-
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
• If the pedal-to-floor clearance is insufficient or
the pedal feels spongy when pressed, brake
fluid leakage or presence of air in the brake
hydraulic system may be a cause.
Have the brake system inspected by your near-
est authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if the above conditions are detected.

3 Braking performance
Perform braking tests in a safe place. After check-
ing that warning lamp , or is not illuminated,
drive the vehicle at a low speed to make sure that
braking power is sufficient and even. If braking
seems in any way abnormal, operating the vehicle
could be dangerous. Never drive the vehicle. Ask
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distrib-
utor or dealer for a more thorough inspection.

WARNING
Perform brake tests in a safe place that pro-
vides good visibility all around. During the
tests be attentive to surrounding traffic con-
ditions.
 12-67

Parking brake – check

1 Parking brake lever stroke check

At the time of pre-operational

Inspection
intervals check and every 40,000 km
(24,000 miles)

1. Press the brake pedal firmly so that the vehicle

cannot move.
2. Starting with the parking brake lever in the fully
released position, pull the parking brake lever
with a force of 294 N (30 kgf) until it stops mov-
Z11606 ing. Check whether the lever stroke (the dis-
tance moved by the lever) is within specification.
If the stroke is out of specification, have the
vehicle inspected by your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

Parking brake lever 7 to 9 notches

stroke

3. Make sure the parking brake lever locks

securely in the pulled position.

2 Braking performance

Inspection Every 40,000 km (24,000 miles)

intervals

Stop the vehicle on a dry downgrade, set the park-

ing brake and check to see if the parking brake can
hold the vehicle. If an appropriate downgrade is not
available, drive the vehicle at a low speed and acti-
vate the parking brake to make sure that it exhibits
satisfactory braking action.
If parking brake performance is in any way abnor-
mal, vehicle operation could be dangerous. Contact
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distrib-
utor or dealer.

WARNING
Perform brake tests in safe place that pro-
vides good visibility all around. During the
tests be sufficiently attentive to surrounding
traffic conditions.
12-68 Simple inspection and service

Clutch – check

<Manual transmission vehicles>

Check the clutch for condition. If anything abnormal
is found, see your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

1 Clutch pedal play

Clutch pedal play

0.2 to 4 mm
(at centre of pedal pad)

1. Make sure the engine is not running.

2. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied.
3. Make sure the gearshift lever is in the neutral
position.
4. To check clutch pedal play, use your finger to
Z11613 press the centre of the pedal pad to the point
where resistance is felt and measure the dis-
tance over which the pedal has moved (play) .
If the degree of play is not as specified above,
adjustment is necessary.
Have any necessary adjustment made by your
nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.

2 Clutch operation
Make sure that the clutch pedal operates without
unusual noise or excessive resistance. Check also
that pressing the clutch pedal allows you to move
the gearshift lever easily to the various gear posi-
tions, and that the clutch engages smoothly without
slipping when the clutch pedal is released slowly.
 12-69

Tyres – check

Inspection At the time of pre-operational

intervals check

1 Inflation pressure check

• Use an air pressure gauge to check for proper
tyre inflation pressure.
If the pressure is incorrect, adjust it to the indi-
cated standard pressure.
• Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted
before driving when the tyres are still cool. Make
sure that the tyre air valve caps are securely fit-
ted.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tyre,
Z22262 check whether the spare tyre’s inflation pressure
is correct using an air gauge.
• There is a label affixed to the driver’s door pillar
indicating standard inflation pressure. Keep the
tyres inflated to the pressures shown on the
label.

WARNING
• Excessively low or high tyre pressures not
only give a poor ride but also could cause
cargo to be damaged. Moreover if the
> pressure is too low tyres could overheat
and burst.
• Both the inner and outer tyres on dual
wheels should be inflated to the same
pressure.
• You need not increase tyre pressure
before high-speed driving.

CAUTION
These standard tyre inflation pressures have
been established and are recommended by the
ETRTO (The European Tyre and Rim Technical
Organization). If the tyres on your vehicle were
not made by one of the ETRTO member compa-
nies use the inflation pressures recommended
by your tyres’ manufacturer or adjust the pres-
sures according to your local standards.

NOTE:
The tyre inflation pressures will be higher just after
vehicle operation than before vehicle operation. The
increases in pressure are not abnormal; they occur
because the air in the tyres expands as the tyres
get hot while the vehicle is moving. Do not release
air from the tyres at this time. The pressures will
return to normal as the tyres cool down.
• Never fail to install tyre valve caps after check-
ing or adjusting the air pressure.
12-70 Simple inspection and service

2 Checking tread depth

Make sure that the remaining tread depth is suffi-
cient.

Tread groove depth

1.6 mm
limit

When the tread wears down, slip signs (inter-

rupted sections of the grooves) appear across the
tyre at the locations corresponding to the marks.
Replace the tyre as soon as the slip signs show up,
as continued use is dangerous. P. 12-71

WARNING
If the remaining tread is too shallow the tyres
tend to skid and chances of “hydroplaning”
during high speed driving increase. Hydro-
planing can occur when driving on wet roads
at high speeds. When a vehicle hydroplanes
tyres ride up on and slide over a film of water
causing the driver to lose control of both
steering and braking.

Z19538

3 Checking for cracks damage and

objects embedded in tread
• Check both the tread and the sides of each tyre
for cracks, damage, and excessive or unusual
wear. Check also for metal pieces, nails, and
stones that might be embedded in the tread or
caught between the tyres of dual wheels.
• Touch the tyre by hand to check whether rubber
has softened by adhesion of oil, chemicals, etc.
Check also the tyre expansion or deformation.
Z10805 Check the spare tyre at the same time.
 12-71

Tyre replacement

1 Tyre
• Only tyres of the specified size are usable on
your vehicle. Be sure to use tyres of the speci-
fied size.
• There is a label affixed to the driver’s door pillar
indicating the tyre size. Be sure to use tyres of
the size specified on the label.
• If you are uncertain of the correct size of your
vehicle’s tyres, contact an authorised MITSUB-
ISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

WARNING
Do not mix bias and radial tyres or use other
than the specified size of tyres and disc
wheels. Using other than the specified size of
tyres and disc wheels results in poor steer-
ing and may cause an accident. And it can
cause the following troubles.
• The ABS system cannot work as intended.
• The speedometer indicates a different
speed from the actual vehicle speed.
• The DUONIC® system (transmission) can-
not change gear at the optimum timing so
fuel consumption becomes worse.
• The tyres may touch the frame and steer-
ing components.

• Use tyres and disc wheels which have no cracks

or other damage.
• After rearranging the disc wheels, adjust the bal-
ance of wheels, before driving.
• Because of their propensity to generate heat,
new tyres tend to wear quickly. For vehicles
other than the dump trucks, install two tyres as a
set on the front of the vehicle where the load is
smaller. Break in new tyres by driving 200 km or
more at 60 km/h or less. After this run-in period,
check tyres pressure.
• If there is a difference in diameter between inner
and outer tyres of a rear dual wheel, the differ-
ence should be within 6 mm and install the
smaller tyre as the inner tyre.
12-72 Simple inspection and service

2 Jacking up the vehicle

WARNING
• Securely apply the parking brake.
• Jack up the vehicle on firm level ground.
If you jacked up the vehicle on a slope or
on soft ground the jack could tip and slip
out of position resulting in an accident.
• Apply the jack only to the specified jacking
point. If you apply the jack to any other
point on the vehicle it could slip out of
position resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is no oil or grease on the
jack or jacking point. (Wipe off any such
contamination.) Otherwise the jack could
>
slip out of position resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not start the engine while the vehicle is
jacked up. Engine vibration could cause
the jack to slip out of position.
• Do not get under the vehicle while it is
jacked up. Doing so is dangerous because
you could be trapped under the vehicle if
the jack slipped out of position.
• When the vehicle is to remain jacked up
for a long period place jack stands or
other supports under the frame for safety.
• Never use two or more jacks on a single
vehicle at the same time.

CAUTION
• Do not raise the jack more than necessary.
Doing so could damage the jack.
• Your vehicle’s onboard jack is designed spe-
cifically for that vehicle. Do not use it with
any other vehicle.
• Instructions for using and handling the jack
are affixed to the jack. Be sure to read them
before using the jack.

2.1 Before jacking up the vehicle

• Park the vehicle on a flat, hard surface. Pull the
parking brake all the way on. If your vehicle has
a manual transmission, place the gearshift lever
in the neutral position. If your vehicle is
equipped with the DUONIC® system, place the
gearshift lever in the “P” position.
• Be sure to stop the engine.
• If you get a flat tyre while on the road and need
to change it on the spot, pull up your vehicle in a
safe place where it will not block traffic, turn your
hazard warning lamps on and use a red or white
flag or cloth to give warning to passing vehicles.
• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle.
 12-73

• Block with a chock the tyre diagonally opposite

to the tyre to be replaced.
Example:
Block the left front tyre if the right rear tyre is to
be replaced.
• Prepare the spare tyre. P. 12-85

If the spare tyre is not available, use the following

tyres.

Model Tyre size

FEA0, FEB0 195/75R16C 107/105R
205/75R16C 113/111Q
FEA5
205/75R16C 113/111R
FEB7, FEC and FG 205/75R17.5 124/122M

3 Using the hydraulic jack

3.1 To raise
1. If the place you wish to apply the jack to is too
high, adjust the jack height by turning the ram
counterclockwise.

Z10810

2. Using the slit at the end of the wrench handle

(onboard tool), turn the release valve fully
clockwise.

Z10821

3. Insert the wrench handle into the socket on

the jack, and pump the handle up and down to
raise the vehicle.

Z10822
12-74 Simple inspection and service

CAUTION
The jack for a vehicle with independent suspen-
sion extends and retracts in two stages. Stop
jacking up the vehicle when the yellow second-
stage mark appears. Continuing to operate
the jack could damage it.

Z09293

3.2 To lower
1. Slowly turn the release valve counterclockwise
using the slit at the end of the wrench handle.

WARNING
Turn the release valve slowly. If you turn it
rapidly the vehicle will come down quickly
possibly causing the jack to slip out of posi-
tion.
Z10823

CAUTION
• Avoid loosening the release valve more than
2 turns.
• Do not close the release valve suddenly
while lowering the vehicle since the jack
could suffer damage.

2. Take out the jack and push its head down.

Z10824

3. Rotate the release valve fully clockwise.

Turn the ram head clockwise to retract it.

Z10825
 12-75

4 Removing the wheel

4.1 Front axle jacking points
• FE models

<Vehicles without a rigid leaf suspension stabiliser>

Bottom of leaf spring

Z22023

<Vehicles with a rigid leaf suspension stabiliser>

Bottom of leaf spring behind tie rod

Z09296

<Vehicle with independent suspension>

Jack receptacle behind front wheel

Z22306

When using a garage jack to jack up the front

wheels of a vehicle with independent suspension,
place a plank of wood between the jack and the
centre of the suspension crossmember .
NOTE:
Do not apply the jack to except crossmember.

 
12-76 Simple inspection and service

• FG models
Jack receptacle at the bottom of front axle.

Z09515

4.2 Rear axle jacking point

• FEB0 models
Jack receptacle at the bottom of rear axle hous-
ing

Z13309

• FEA0 models
Bottom of leaf spring

Z09300

• FEA5 FEB7 and FEC models

Bottom surface of the axle housing (beside leaf
spring U-bolt mounting)

Z12831
 12-77

• FG models
Bottom of rear axle housing

Z09303

4.3 How to remove a wheel

WARNING
• Under no circumstances should anyone
get under the vehicle when it is supported
only with the jack. The jack could slip out
from under the vehicle. Also do not
attempt to start the engine when the vehi-
cle is jacked up.
• Check that the jack is positioned securely.
If the jack slipped out of position a seri-
ous accident could occur.
• When the vehicle is to remain jacked up
for a long period place jack stands or
other supports under the frame for safety.
• Never try to remove the outside wheel of
the rear dual wheel by driving only the
inside wheel over a wooden block or the
like.
With a vehicle that has dual wheels which
there are single nuts a serious accident
could occur since the inside and outside
tyres can be removed at the same time
when the wheel nuts are removed.

CAUTION
• If the vehicle is carrying heavy cargo unload
it before jacking the vehicle up.
• When jacking up the vehicle be sure to
place the jack only in the specified locations
as applying the jack to any point other than
the jacking-up points could damage the vehi-
cle or cause injury.

1. Securely apply the parking brake. Apply chocks

to the front and back (as seen from the side of
the vehicle) of the wheel diagonally opposite the
one that is to be jacked up.
2. Position the jack under the jacking point of the
vehicle and raise the vehicle to a point at which
the tyre is still touching the ground.

CAUTION
After raising the vehicle slightly confirm that
the jack is securely in position.
12-78 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
If the jack slips out of position with the vehi-
cle fully raised the vehicle could fall and
cause serious injury.

3. Using socket wrench and wrench handle

included in the onboard tool set, slightly loosen
the wheel nuts by turning them in the illustrated
direction. Do not remove the nuts.
For right-hand wheel
For left-hand wheel
NOTE:
• The wheel nuts on the right-side wheels have
right-hand threads (marked “R”, or do not have
any mark). Those on the left-side wheels have
Z13308 left-hand threads (marked “L” or “LH”).
• If you wish to remove only the outer wheel of
double-nut-type double wheels, you do not need
to loosen the inner wheel nuts.

WARNING
• Insert the wrench handle into the socket
wrench until it protrudes slightly.
Also push the socket wrench fully onto
the wheel nut. If you do not push the
socket wrench all the way onto the wheel
nut the socket wrench and wrench handle
may come off and cause an injury when
you apply force.
• Do not loosen the wheel nuts too much or
you could damage the threads.

4. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is just clear of

the ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then the tyre.
• Single wheel (single-nut type)
Remove all of the wheel nuts, then remove
the wheel.
• Double wheels (single-nut type)
Remove all of the wheel nuts, then remove
the inner and outer wheels at the same time.
• Double wheels (double-nut type)
First loosen the outer wheel nuts and remove
outer tyre ; then lower the jack, loosen inner
wheel nuts by using the square socket end of
the wheel nut wrench, and jack up the vehicle
again to remove inner tyre .

NOTE:
With a vehicle that has dual rear wheels on which
there are single nuts like those on the front wheels,
removal of the single nuts enables both the inner
and outer wheels to be removed.
Z09307
 12-79

WARNING
• Do not rotate the jacked-up wheel if the
vehicle is equipped with a limited-slip dif-
ferential. Power would be transmitted to
the wheel in contact with the ground and
the vehicle could move as a result.
• When removing wheels be careful not to
damage the wheel bolts and the threads of
the inner wheel nuts.

CAUTION
Z09031
When jacking up the vehicle be sure to place
the jack only in the specified locations as
applying the jack to any point other than the
jacking-up points could damage the vehicle or
cause injury.

5 Mounting the tyre

<In case of front single tyre>
1. Clean the following sections before mounting
the wheel. If they are dirty, the wheel nuts could
become loose during driving.
Threads on wheel bolts and nuts
Seating surface or spherical surface of
wheel nuts
Disc wheel mounting surface
Disc wheel and wheel cover mating surface
Wheel nut contact surface on disc wheel
Z22340
and wheel cover
Disc wheel inside surface
Guide sections on hub
-RGEWISJVIEVHSYFPIX]VI"

>
12-80 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
• If the above items are dirty the nuts will
become loose during vehicle operation. If
the bolt or nut threads are damaged or the
disc wheel is cracked or otherwise dam-
aged replace the wheel with a new genu-
ine part. A damaged wheel could work
loose and cause a serious accident while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not paint disc wheel mounting surfaces
dual wheel mating surfaces wheel
nut seating surfaces and wheel hub as
resulting thicker paint film could cause the
wheel nuts to loosen up.

Z09308

2. Mount the wheel so that the wheel bolts line up

*)% *)& with the bolt holes in the disc wheel. Then,
tighten the wheel nuts to hold the disc wheel in
position. With a front wheel, retain the wheel
cover together with the disc wheel using the
wheel nuts. Direct the flanged end or spheri-
cal end of the wheel nuts toward the disc
wheel.

WARNING
3L L *)% *)& When installing the wheel take care not to
damage the threads on the wheel bolts and
inner wheel nuts.

NOTE:
The wheel bolts and nuts on the right-hand wheels
have right-hand threads, and those on the left-hand
wheels have left-hand threads.
You can identify the nuts and bolts for right-side
wheels and those for left-side wheels by checking
the part of each bolt or nut. The nuts and bolts for
right-side wheels have an “R” stamp mark, or do not
have any mark in this part. The nuts and bolts for
left-side wheels have an “L” or “LH” stamp mark.

3. Lower the vehicle gently until the tyre makes

contact with the ground.
 12-81

4. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order shown in the

4 illustration, repeating the tightening cycle 2 to 3
3 times. Finally, tighten the nuts to the specified
5 1 torque.
2 1

WARNING
2 6 • Insert the wrench handle into the socket
5 3 wrench until it protrudes slightly.
4 Also push the socket wrench fully onto
Z09311 the wheel nut. If you do not push the
socket wrench all the way onto the wheel
nut the socket wrench and wrench handle
may come off and cause an injury when
you apply force.
• Do not jump or jerk on the wrench handle
when tightening the nut by using your own
weight. Doing so can overtighten the nut.
Over tightening the nuts could overstrain
the bolts or deform the disc wheel’s sur-
face.
• The wheel nuts must be tightened to the
specified torque. If the nuts are tightened
loosely or too tight parts may be damaged
and wheels may come off. Such status
may lead to impossibility of driving and
result in damage of the vehicle and physi-
cal injury.

CAUTION
Wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque
wrench using a socket wrench and wrench han-
dle should be done in emergencies only. Use a
torque wrench to check the torque as soon as
possible after using a socket wrench and
wrench handle to tighten the wheel nuts.

Tightening Tightening
Model torque method
Apply a 600 N
(60 kgf) force
to the
FEA0 and 170 to 230 N·m
FEB0 models (17 to 23 kgf·m) “WEIGHT”
mark point on
the wrench
handle.
Apply a 800 N
Other than (80 kgf) force
450 to 550 N·m
FEA0 and (45 to 55 kgf·m) to the end of
FEB0 models the wrench
handle.
12-82 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
Never use a grease that contains molybde-
num disulfide. Using a grease of this type
may result in an excessive tightening torque
of the wheel nuts and eventually in broken
hub bolts or deformation of the nut seating
areas on the disc wheel. This could even
cause a wheel to come off while driving.

5. Mount rear dual-wheels as described below.

4 3
5 1 WARNING
2 1
When replacing an outer wheel on a vehicle
whose rear dual-wheels are secured by dou-
ble wheel nuts be sure to retighten the inner
2 6 wheel nuts before tightening the outer wheel
5 3 nuts.
4
Z09311
NOTE:
• When installing dual wheels, make sure the air
valve of the inner wheel and the air valve of the
outer wheel are opposite each other. If the air
valve of the inner wheel is in position 1 in the
illustration, for example, make sure the air valve
of the outer wheel is in position 2.
• Be sure to install the extension valve on the
inner tyre of dual wheels.

• Wheels secured by double-nuts

Mount the inner wheel, then jack up the vehicle
again. Set the outer wheel such that the wheel
bolts are located in the centres of the disc
wheel’s bolt holes, then tighten the wheel nuts
just enough to eliminate looseness.
Lower the vehicle, then tighten the wheel nuts in
the illustrated sequence. Work through the
 sequence two or three times, finally tightening
each wheel nut to the specified torque.
• Wheels secured by single nuts
Set the inner and outer wheels such that the
wheel bolts are located in the centres of the disc
wheels’ bolt holes, then tighten the wheel nuts
just enough to eliminate looseness.
Lower the vehicle, then tighten the wheel nuts in
the illustrated sequence. Work through the
sequence two or three times, finally tightening
each wheel nut to the specified torque.

6. If only the outer wheel of the double-nut secured

dual wheels is replaced, retighten the inner
wheel nuts to the specified torque before mount-
ing the outer wheel.
 12-83

WARNING
• When replacing the wheel take care not to
damage the threads on the wheel bolts
and inner wheel nuts.
• As the vehicle is driven after a wheel has
been replaced the wheel nuts loosen up
somewhat during the early stages of driv-
ing due to “wear-in.” Therefore it is neces-
sary to retighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque after driving 50 to 100 km
(30 to 60 miles). Thereafter retighten the
nuts at regular intervals.

<When the tyres with the same tread pattern

are used on the front and rear wheels> Tyre rotation

The amount of wear on a tyre depends on its posi-

tion on the vehicle. To equalize wear and extend life
as much as possible, rotate the tyres at regular
intervals. Depending on the road and driving condi-
tions, it may be necessary for the tyre rotation inter-
vals to be shortened.
Z09318

• Use a tyre of the same type on a single axle. If

<When the tyres with different tread patterns different type tyres are mounted on an axle, the
are used on the front and rear wheels> vehicle tends to pull to one side during braking,
and could cause you to lose directional control
of the vehicle.
• Use the following tyres.

Model Tyre size

FEA0, FEB0 195/75R16C 107/105R
Z13460
FEA5 205/75R16C 113/111Q
205/75R16C 113/111R
FEB7, FEC and FG 205/75R17.5 124/122M
12-84 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
As the vehicle is driven after a wheel has
been replaced the wheel nuts loosen up
somewhat during the early stages of driving
due to “wear-in”. Therefore it is necessary to
retighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque after driving 50 to 100 km (30 to 60
miles). Thereafter retighten the nuts at regu-
lar intervals.

CAUTION
• Break in new tyres by driving 200 km (125
miles) or longer at 60 km/h (37 MPH) or
slower. After the break-in driving period
check the tyre pressure of each of the new
tyres.
• If using different tread patterns on the front
and rear wheels select tyres with a ribbed
tread for the front wheels and tyres with a
traction-type tread for the rear wheels.

NOTE:
• When tyres are new, they tend to generate heat
and wear more quickly.
• Be sure to install the extension valve on the
inner tyre of dual wheels.

Z13306
 12-85

Spare tyre

<Vehicles with a spare tyre>

Over time, the spare tyre leaks air little by little. There-
fore, the tyre pressure should be kept slightly high.

NOTE:
Some vehicles are not equipped with a spare tyre.

1 Inspection of spare tyre

• Kick the spare tyre lightly to check whether it is
securely retained. If it moves, raise it to hold it in
place.
• Inspect the stubs of the hanger plate and the
spare tyre hanger to assure there is about 10
mm clearance between them. If you cannot see to
confirm the clearance, make sure that the hanger
plate is positioned parallel with the spare tire
hanger. If the clearance is too small or the hanger
> plate is not parallel, lower the spare tyre at first.
Adjust the orientation of the hanger plate and then
crank the spare tyre up again and fix it securely. If
there was interference or there is a problem in the
orientation of the hanger plate, inspect the stubs of
the hanger plate for damage.

CAUTION
If the spare tyre cannot be mounted firmly or if
the stubs of the hanger plate are damaged the
spare tyre may fall off. Instead of trying to
mount the spare tyre remove it and place it on
the cargo deck etc. then have your nearest
authorised dealer check the spare tyre carrier.

2 To use
1. On the vehicle with a spare tyre lock; remove
both nuts from the spare tyre lock.

Z22309

Z22310
12-86 Simple inspection and service

2. Insert spare tyre handle into spare tyre carrier

and turn it counterclockwise to lower spare
tyre .
When using the multi-part spare tyre handle ,
fit the longer pin of the attachment onto the
spare tyre handle.

Z22311

3 To stow
1. Face up the outer side of the disc wheel and
position hanger plate as illustrated.
2. Align the orientation of the hanger plate and the
spare tyre hanger so that they are almost par-
allel, and turn the spare tyre handle clockwise to
raise the spare tyre.

CAUTION
Z09322 • When raising the spare tyre make sure that
the chain is not twisted and that the hanger
plate is in the correct position. After raising
 the spare tyre check that there is clearance
between the spare tyre and nearby parts. A

twisted chain improperly positioned hanger
plate interference between the spare tyre and

nearby parts and insufficient clearance
between stubs of the hanger plate and the
spare tyre hanger could cause the spare
tyre to fall off while the vehicle is moving
which may result in an accident.
• When raising the spare tyre position the tyre
>
valve so that it does not touch the hanger.
Interference between the spare tyre hanger
and the tyre valve will damage the valve.

3. After the spare tyre has been raised completely,

tighten the spare tyre handle with a force of
about 295 N (30 kgf); then, remove it taking care
not to turn it counterclockwise.

CAUTION
If the spare tyre carrier has not been tightened
sufficiently the spare tyre may fall off during
driving causing an accident.
4. Press the spare tyre with your foot to make sure
that it is secure. If it is loose, make sure that the
hanger plate and disc wheel are free from any
abnormalities, then tighten them again. If the
spare tyre is still loose after taking these precau-
tions, there is the risk that it might fall off. Remove
the spare tyre and place it on a cargo deck, etc.,
and have your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer check it.
5. On the vehicle with the spare tyre lock; install
and tighten both the spare tyre lock nuts.
 12-87

Wiper blade – replacement

1 Replacing wiper blade

1. Raise wiper arm , and then push clip spring
in the direction of the arrow (see figure).

Z15848

2. With the clip spring kept in the pushed position,

press wiper toward the wiper arm.

Z15849

3. The wiper blade will come off the wiper arm.

Install a new blade in the reverse order of
removal.
Use a MITSUBISHI genuine replacement part.

CAUTION
Do not bring the wiper arms back into position
or operate the wipers without wiper blades as
this could scratch the windshield.
Z15850

2 Replacing blade rubber only

1. Raise the wiper arm.
Pinch both sides (indicated by arrows) of blade
rubber with your fingers and then pull the
blade rubber so that claws are unhooked from
grooves in the blade rubber.
2. Slide out the blade rubber.
3. Replace the old blade rubber with a new
MITSUBISHI genuine wiper blade rubber.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make
Z09332 sure that the claws fit into the grooves in blade
rubber.
12-88 Simple inspection and service

0,(" Windshield washer – fluid level

check and refilling

1 Fluid level check

1. Open the assistant driver’s door.
2. Check the washer fluid level through level check
window .
When the level has dropped to the lower part of
the window or is not visible at all, refill the tank
with washer fluid.
6,("
2 Refilling
1. Open the assistant driver’s door.
2. Open windshield washer tank cap and pour in
a mixture of windshield washer fluid and tap
water up to the top end of the fluid level inspec-
tion window .
3. Close the cap tightly after refilling.

Windshield washer fluid

> quantity Approx. 2.9 litres

CAUTION
• Substituting soapy water for washer fluid
could result in clogged washer nozzles or
spots on painted surfaces.
• Operating the washer continuously for more
than 20 seconds or when there is no fluid in
the reservoir could burn out the washer
motor.

3 In cold weather
Replace the windshield washer fluid with one for
cold weather to prevent freezing. Follow the fluid
manufacturer’s instructions when adjusting the con-
centration.

CAUTION
Never use engine coolant or anti-freeze fluid as
window washer fluid. It would damage the body
paintwork.
 12-89

Battery – check

WARNING
The battery generates flammable hydrogen
gas and should be kept away from open
flame and spark.

1 Removal and installation of battery

cover
<Vehicles with one battery>
<Vehicle with one battery>
1. Push the part marked with an arrow to remove
the cover from the stopper .
2. Pull the cover toward you to remove it from the
stoppers .
3. To fit the cover, follow the removal steps in
reverse. After fitting the cover, make sure it is
securely retained.

<Vehicles with two batteries> <Vehicle with two batteries>

1. Remove the two wing bolts . Pull the cover
toward you to remove it from the stoppers .
2. To fit the cover, follow the removal steps in
reverse. After fitting the cover, make sure it is
securely retained.

Z21120

2 Inspecting the battery fluid level

Inspection At the time of pre-operational

intervals check

2.1 Battery with battery fluid level indicator

The battery fluid level is indicated by the colour of
the indicator on the top surface.
The battery fluid level is sufficient when the indica-
tor is black. If the indicator is white, the fluid level is
Z20089 too low and the battery cannot be used any further.
Replace the battery with a new one.
NOTE:
The above instructions may not apply to your partic-
ular battery; you must inspect the battery fluid level
according to the instructions of your battery’s manu-
facturer.
12-90 Simple inspection and service

WARNING
Do not use the battery if the indicator is
white. The battery will deteriorate rapidly and
could overheat or explode.

2.2 Battery without battery fluid level indicator

• The battery fluid level should be between the
“UPPER” and “LOWER” level lines marked
on the battery case. If the battery fluid level is
low, add electrolyte or distilled water to the
“UPPER” level line.
• If your battery has no level line markers, the fluid
should be 10 to 15 mm above the tops of the
electrode plates.

Z13231

• If the side of the battery case is not in your direct

view due to equipment or other things on the
vehicle body, do the following:
• Remove the battery’s cap .
• Check the battery fluid level using an appro-
priate mirror like a hand mirror .
• Check whether the battery fluid comes up
to the bottom of the sleeve of each filler
hole.

Z21897

DANGER
BATTERY FLUID IS DILUTE SULFURIC ACID
AND CAN HARM MOST THINGS IT
TOUCHES INCLUDING HUMAN SKIN AND
CLOTHING. IF YOU GET IT ON YOUR SKIN
OR CLOTHING FLUSH IT OFF WITH SOAP
AND WATER. IF YOU ACCIDENTALLY GET
BATTERY FLUID IN YOUR EYES WASH
YOUR EYES WITH LOTS OF CLEAN WATER
THEN PROMPTLY SEE AN EYE DOCTOR
FOR TREATMENT. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY
SPECTACLES AND RUBBER GLOVES WHEN
HANDLING BATTERIES.

WARNING
Do not use the battery with the fluid below
the “LOWER” level line. The battery will dete-
riorate rapidly and it could overheat or
explode.
 12-91

CAUTION
• Whenever battery fluid has been added
either charge the battery or run the vehicle
for a while. It is especially important in cold
weather as the battery can freeze up and be
damaged.
• Do not add so much fluid that the fluid in the
battery rises above the “UPPER” level line.
With the fluid above the “UPPER” level fluid
could leak out and corrode the battery termi-
nals.

3 Connected condition of terminals

<Vehicles with one battery>
• Make sure the battery cables are securely
attached to the battery terminals.
• Clean the battery terminals if they become dirty
or corroded.

Z22335

<Vehicles with two batteries>

Z22336
12-92 Simple inspection and service

4 Cleaning the terminals

Use warm water to wash and wipe off any white
powder caused by corrosion.
If a terminal is seriously corroded, remove the bat-
tery cable and clean the terminal with a wire brush
or sandpaper.
After cleaning, apply a thin coat of grease to the ter-
minals.

CAUTION
Z12974
• Install the battery securely in position. If it is
left loose shocks and vibrations from road
surface could damage the battery case and
electrode plates shortening battery life.
• If the battery needs to be charged remove it
from the vehicle and remove the caps where
possible before starting the procedure. If it is
charged in the vehicle owing to unavoidable
circumstances be sure to disconnect the
negative (–) battery cable.
NOTE:
Follow the correct procedure when jump starting a
vehicle with a dead battery by connecting it to a live
battery using a booster cable. P. 13-34

5 Battery removal and installation

<Vehicles with one battery>
WARNING
• When disconnecting the battery cables
disconnect the (–) cable first. When con-
necting the battery cables connect the (–)
cable last. If you were to accidentally
touch the (+) terminal and the vehicle body
with a tool with the (–) cable connected to
the battery a dangerous short circuit
Z22335 could occur.
• Store any used battery in a place where
children cannot touch it. Leaking fluid
<Vehicles with two batteries> could otherwise cause burns and blind-
ness.
• Store any used battery with its terminals
uppermost. Placing a battery on its side
could cause fluid leakage and fire.

CAUTION
The urea dosing system continues to operate
Z22336 for about 2 minutes after the starter switch has
been put in the “LOCK” position. Wait for at
least 2 minutes before disconnecting the bat-
tery.

Type 1 <vehicles without a battery equaliser>

1. Disconnect the battery cables (each indicated
by an arrow in the illustration) from the bat-
tery terminals.
 12-93

2. Remove the battery support mounting nuts

<Vehicles with one battery> (each indicated by an arrow in the illustra-
tion).
3. Remove the battery support , then remove the
battery.
4. Install the battery by performing these steps in
reverse. After installing the battery, make sure it
is securely retained.

Z22337

<Vehicles with two batteries>

Z22338

Type 2 <vehicle with battery equaliser>

WARNING
When only the (–) terminal of the main battery
is disconnected in a vehicle that has a bat-
tery equaliser there may still be voltage at
the (–) terminal of the body-connected 24V
battery. If a spanner or other metallic object
touches the (–) terminal of the body-con-
nected 24V battery and the load bed or frame
a short circuit may occur.

CAUTION
When removing or installing the battery do not
disconnect the terminals of the battery equal-
iser beside the battery box. If the terminals get
disconnected contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.
NOTE:
The battery equaliser controls the electrical balance
Z22230 between the main battery and the body-connected
24V battery so as to protect the main battery.
12-94 Simple inspection and service

• Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables (each indicated
by an arrow in the illustration) from the battery
terminals in the following order.
• Disconnect the (–) terminal of the main
battery .
• Disconnect the (–) terminal of the body-
connected 24V battery .
• Disconnect the (+) terminal of the main
battery.
• Disconnect the (+) terminal of the body-
connected 24V battery.
Z22231

2. Remove the mounting nuts (each indicated by

an arrow in the illustration) from the battery sup-
port .
3. Remove the battery support, then remove the
battery.

CAUTION
Do not remove the connectors and cables
Z22232 from the battery. Also do not disconnect the
terminals of the battery equaliser beside the
battery box. Incorrect wiring could result in a
fire or an electrical system failure.

• Installation
Install the battery by following the removal steps in
reverse. After installing the battery, make sure it is
securely retained and that the battery support and
terminals are not touching each other.
 12-95

Lamps – check

>

REF.
NO. Lamp

Headlamp
Position lamp
Front and side turn signal lamp
Front fog lamp
Daytime running lamp
Rear turn signal lamp
Stop lamp
Tail lamp
Backup lamp
Rear fog lamp
License lamp
End out-line marker lamp
<FEB, FEC, FG>

1 Inspection

Inspection intervals
At the time of pre-operational check

• Operate each of the lamp-related switches in

front of the driver’s seat and check whether the
corresponding lamp lights/flashes properly.
• Press the brake pedal and check that the stop
lamps light.
12-96 Simple inspection and service

• With the gearshift lever in the reverse position,

check that the backup lamps come on.
• Check the condition of the lens of each lamp,
such as contamination, damage and discoloura-
tion.
• If any lamp fails to light or flash, a bulb or fuse
may have blown. Check the related bulb and
fuse, and replace either or both of them as nec-
essary. P. 13-9, P. 13-16
• If the lamp still fails to light or flash even after
replacing the bulb and/or fuse, have your vehi-
cle inspected by your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

Air filters – cleaning

Remove and clean the air filters (heater or air condi-

tioner filters) with water or compressed air to elimi-
nate dust and dirt at regular intervals (6 months or
so).
Clogged filters may cause inefficient heating or air-
conditioning, and even malfunction of the blower
motor.

WARNING
When cleaning the air filters wear a dust
mask to avoid inhaling dust. Dust inhalation
can have adverse health effects.

CAUTION
Clean the air filters at shorter intervals if your
vehicle is used frequently in dusty areas.

1 Outside air filter

Disassembly is necessary before the outside air fil-
ter can be cleaned. Have an authorised MITSUBI-
SHI FUSO distributor or dealer do the job.
 12-97

2 Dashboard air filter

<LHD>
1. Remove the lower panel in front of the assis-
tant driver’s seat.
2. Pull out the air filter while pushing inward both
the tabs on the filter.
3. Reinstall the lower panel by first aligning the
claws with the corresponding slots and then
pushing the panel forward.

Z21417

<RHD>

Z22026
12-98 Simple inspection and service

Cleaning your vehicle

1 Washing
Be sure to wash the vehicle whenever it
• has been driven in a coastal area;
• has been driven on a road covered with an anti-
icing agent;
• has coal tar, soot, oil, grease, powder dust,
metal particles, coal dust, tree sap, or bird drop-
pings on it; or
• has dust or mud on it.

WARNING
When washing the underside of the vehicle
be careful not to hurt yourself on the edges
of panels and other parts.

CAUTION
• Do not use an organic solvent such as thin-
ner or gasoline for cleaning as these will
damage painted surfaces and cause disco-
louration and cracks in plastic components.
• When washing the vehicle pay particular
attention to the wheel housings and the
underside of the chassis if the vehicle has
been driven in a coastal area or on a road
covered with an anti-icing agent. Also pay
particular attention to the wheel housings
and the underside of the chassis if the vehi-
cle is often used to carry marine products or
coal and is thus prone to the effects of sea-
water or to serious paint damage. If anti-
icing agent is left on the vehicle it will stick
to the vehicle and become impossible to
remove with normal washing. Carefully wash
the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner. Any
salt or large amounts of anti-icing agent left
on the vehicle will cause premature rust.
• When stepping onto the bumper to clean the
windshield do not hold the wiper arms.
Doing so could cause a wiper malfunction.
• Do not use a vehicle-cleaning brush to clean
the plastic lenses of the turn-signal lamps. A
brush could scratch the lenses. Wash the
lenses with water then wipe them with a soft
cloth.
• When the vehicle is washed braking perfor-
mance can be reduced by water adhering on
brake drums or the working areas of the
brake discs. In this event drive slowly with
light pressure on the brake pedal to dry out
the brakes. Pay attention to nearby vehicles
while doing so.
• When washing the vehicle be careful not to
allow water to get into the muffler. If water
gets into the muffler sensors could be dam-
aged.
 12-99

NOTE:
• In cold weather, the key holes and rubber parts
of the door sometimes freeze, making it hard to
open the door. After washing, remove moisture
on and around the doors. Applying silicone with
antifreeze capabilities is one solution to this
problem.
• Aluminum wheels may become whitish as oxide
film forms on their surface over time. For vehi-
cles with a BlueTec® system, the colour on the
wheel near the exhaust pipe end may become
yellowish. Regardless of the colour, you can
remove the oxide film by using a commercially
available polish when washing the wheel.
• When washing the vehicle in cold weather, be
careful not to directly spray water over the key
slot in the fuel tank cap. If the key slot is wet with
water, the fuel tank cap may become impossible
to open. It is also important to thoroughly wipe
off water around the fuel tank cap after washing
the vehicle.

1. Wash dirt off the vehicle by spraying water on

the vehicle with a hose. Pay attention not only to
the cab but also to the wheel housings and the
underside of the chassis.
2. Remove any stubborn dirt using car shampoo.
Wash the dirt and car shampoo off thoroughly
with water.
3. Wipe water off the vehicle so spots do not
remain.

Z16079

2 Precautions when using a high-pres-

sure cleaner
When cleaning the engine compartment or under-
carriage of the vehicle using a high-pressure
cleaner, be careful not to point the jet of water at the
areas listed below.
NOTE:
Avoid exposing the components and wiring to high-
pressure water or cleaner steam as the system
could be damaged and not operate properly.

• The air intake port or the area where it connects

to the engine
• The starter, alternator, connectors, and other
electrical parts
• High-current fuse box
• The engine compartment
• Lamps
• Around the wheels
Steering shaft universal joint, steering system
dust covers, front axle dust covers, and ABS
units.
12-100 Simple inspection and service

Z22209

Steering system dust covers

Front axle dust covers
<Independent suspension models> <Independent suspension models>

<Rigid suspension models> <Rigid suspension models>

Z22263

• Outside air intake port

>
 12-101

3 Waxing
We recommend waxing your vehicle about once
every month. The best timing for waxing is just after
washing the vehicle when the paint surface temper-
ature is lower than your body temperature. Avoid
waxing under direct sunlight.

4 Inspecting the vehicle for rust and cor-

rosion
• Rust or corrosion on the underside or chassis of
the vehicle could cause an accident or break-
down. After washing the vehicle, check for rust
and for rust perforation. Remove any rust using
a wire brush, then perform paint repair and/or
apply rust inhibitor. If you find rust perforation,
have corrective work performed promptly by
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO
distributor or dealer.
• To be able to use the vehicle with peace of mind
for as long as possible, you must give the vehi-
cle a thorough inspection for rust and corrosion
at least once a year, performing paint repair and/
or applying rust inhibitor as necessary.

5 Interior care

CAUTION
• Do not use any organic solvent (for example
thinner or gasoline) or any acidic or alkaline
solvent. It could cause discolouration and/or
stains.
• Do not wash the floor mats with water with-
out removing them from the vehicle. The
floor could rust and water could splash on
the relays switches electronic control units
and accelerator pedal causing a malfunc-
tion. Remove the floor mats from the vehicle
before washing them. Thoroughly dry the
backing felt before putting the floor mats
back in the vehicle. Make sure the floor mats
do not obstruct the accelerator pedal or any
other moving part.
• Do not directly spray or splash water (using
a hose for example) on internal parts of the
vehicle to wash them. The floor could rust
and electrical items such as relays and elec-
tronic control units could malfunction. If
water collects inside the vehicle either
remove the drain plug and allow the water to
run out or wipe up all of the water with a
cloth.

Remove dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe dirt away using a soft cloth soaked in a
water-diluted neutral detergent.
Soak a cloth in clean water, wring it thoroughly,
and use it to wipe up any remaining detergent.
Dry the floor mats in a shaded, well-ventilated
place.
12-102 Simple inspection and service

5.1 Removing floor mat for cleaning

<LHD> 1. Remove the accelerator stopper by removing
its screws .
2. Install the accelerator stopper being careful not
to let the cut edge of the floor mat become
caught under the stopper.

CAUTION
When fitting the floor mat back in the vehicle
Z21746 make sure it does not interfere with the acceler-
ator pedal and other moving parts. If the floor
mat is interfering with the accelerator pedal the
<RHD> pedal cannot return to the fully free position
even when it is released which could lead to an
accident.

NOTE:
If you cannot, have screws of accelerator stopper
removed by an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO dis-
tributor or dealer.

Z21583

Intercooler and radiator – cleaning

If the front of the intercooler and the radiator is

heavily clogged with dust or mud, the engine perfor-
mance may be affected. Clean it from time to time
by using a soft brush or something also appropriate.

Z21121 CAUTION
The intercooler and the radiator could be dam-
aged if a bristle brush or an object with a sharp
point is used for its cleaning.
 13-1

13. Useful advice for emergencies

Possible failures, causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Stopping your vehicle in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
When a fuse has blown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
When a lamp has burned out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
When braking is sluggish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
If a tyre goes flat while the vehicle is in motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
When the battery has run down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
If fuel tank becomes empty (Bleeding the fuel system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
If the urea tank becomes empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
13-2 Useful advice for emergencies

Possible failures causes

and remedies

Performing daily checks and good maintenance are

keys to preventing mechanical failures and resulting
accidents. Be sure to check and service your vehi-
cle regularly.
Should your vehicle suffer a mechanical failure or
malfunction, the measures needed to correct the
problem can be found using the following chart.
If you are unable to correct the problem yourself or
the problem persists after you have attempted to
repair it, contact your nearest authorised MITSUBI-
SHI FUSO distributor or dealer for technical assis-
tance.
The engine does not start.
The starter does not turn over or turns over too slowly.
Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The starter switch fuse or high-current fuse is Replace the blown fuse or high-current fuse 13-9
blown. with a new one of the specified amperage.
Battery has run down. Charge or replace the battery. 13-34
Battery cable is disconnected, loose or cor- Remove corrosion and connect the cable 12-89
roded. correctly.
Connection to earth terminal is open. Connect securely. –
Engine oil viscosity is too high. Replace the oil with an oil of proper viscosity. 12-22
The starter is faulty. Contact your nearest authorised –
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
Communication with the engine immobiliser Check whether anything metallic or another 3-3
starter key is failed. key is touching the starter key.
The engine immobiliser system is faulty. Contact your nearest authorised –
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

The starter turns over normally.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Fuel has run out. Refuel and bleed the system. 13-37
Air is present in the fuel system. Bleed the system. 13-37
The fuel filter is clogged. Replace the filter element. 12-41
Fuel is frozen. Heat the fuel pipe with hot water (60 C or –
less).
The air cleaner is clogged. Clean or replace the element. 12-46
The engine preheating time is insufficient. Follow the preheating instructions. 5-6
The engine preheating circuit fuse is blown. Replace the fuse. 13-9
The fuel injection system is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
 13-3

The engine starts but stalls immediately.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Idling speed setting is too low. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
The fuel filter is clogged. Replace the filter element. 12-41
The air cleaner is clogged. Clean or replace the filter element. 12-46
The DPF is clogged. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The engine fails to stop.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The fuel injection system is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
The starter switch is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

Black smoke is emitted in exhaust.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The DPF system is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The engine overheats.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The front of the radiator is plugged with dust Clean the radiator with a soft brush. 12-61,
and dirt. 12-102
The coolant level is too low. Add coolant. 12-54
The engine pressure cap is not closed com- Fit the cap firmly. –
pletely.
The fan belt is loose. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
The coolant is contaminated. Flush the cooling system and replace the 12-54
coolant.

Engine oil pressure does not build up.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Insufficient quantity of engine oil. Add engine oil. 12-22
Engine oil viscosity is not adequate. Replace the engine oil with one of a proper 12-22
viscosity.
13-4 Useful advice for emergencies

Fuel consumption is excessive.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
There is a fuel leak. Check the fuel system and retighten connec- –
tions as necessary.
The air cleaner is clogged. Clean or replace the air cleaner element. 12-46
Tyre pressure is too low. Adjust to the adequate inflation pressure. 12-69
The clutch is slipping. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

Engine oil consumption is excessive.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The wrong oil is being used. Replace the engine oil with a proper one. 12-22
There is too much oil. Adjust the quantity to the proper level. 12-22
There is an oil leak. Check the oil circuit and retighten connec- –
tions as necessary.
Engine oil replacement intervals are too long. Change the engine oil at prescribed intervals. 12-22
The oil filter is clogged. Replace the filter element. 12-36

Drive power is insufficient.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The parking brake is activated. Release the parking brake completely. 5-44
The air cleaner is clogged. Clean or replace the air cleaner element. 12-46
The fuel filter is clogged. Replace the filter element. 12-41
Air is present in the fuel system. Bleed the fuel system. 13-37
Clutch is slipping. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
The DPF is clogged. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
Crystallized AdBlue® blocks the Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
muffler. <Vehicles with BlueTec® system> authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The clutch disengages incompletely. <Manual transmission vehicles>

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Clutch fluid is insufficient. Add clutch fluid (brake fluid). 12-33
Clutch pedal play is excessive. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
 13-5

The idling stop & start (ISS) system does not work.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page

The coolant temperature indicator shows the Drive the vehicle as it is. Wait for the coolant 5-14
4th graduation or lower immediately after temperature to increase.
engine startup.
The engine has overheated. The coolant tem- Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Keep the 13-8
perature indicator shows the 9th graduation or engine running slightly faster than idle speed.
higher. Wait for the coolant temperature to decrease.
The indicator lamp is flashing. Perform the parked DPF regeneration. 5-58, 5-66
DPF regeneration is taking place. Wait for DPF regeneration to finish. 5-58, 5-66

Braking is sluggish.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page

Vacuum is insufficient. Increase the engine speed to boost vacuum. –
Brake fluid is insufficient. Add brake fluid. 12-33
There is vacuum leak. Check the vacuum circuit and retighten con- –
nections as necessary.
The disc brake pads or drum brake linings are Have the disc brake pads or brake linings –
worn. replaced by your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
There is air in the brake fluid. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The vehicle pulls to one side during braking.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Tyres are not uniformly inflated. Inflate tyres properly. 12-69
Tyres wear unevenly. Change the tyres. 12-71
Cargo is heavier on one side than the other. Load cargo evenly. 7-13

Steering is difficult.
Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Cargo is over-loaded on the front side. Load cargo evenly. 7-13
Power steering fluid is insufficient. Add power steering fluid. 12-35
Front tyre pressure is insufficient. Inflate tyres to recommended pressures. 12-69
13-6 Useful advice for emergencies

The steering wheel vibrates.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Wheel nuts are loose. Tighten the wheel nuts to specification. 12-79
Tyres are not uniformly inflated. Inflate tyres properly. 12-69
Tyres wear unevenly. Replace tyres. 12-71
Tyres are damaged. Replace tyres. 12-71
Wheels are not balanced properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
Brakes are not balanced properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The steering wheel does not return to the straight ahead position smoothly.
Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
Parts are insufficiently greased. Grease parts. 12-19

The lamp does not light up.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The bulb is out. Replace the bulb. 13-16
There is an open circuit or defective earth. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.

The battery frequently runs down.

Possible cause Remedy Ref. page
The battery terminals are loose or corroded. Scrape off corrosion and tighten down termi- 12-89
nals.
The fan belt is loose. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
The battery is short of electrolyte. Add battery electrolyte. 12-89
The life of the battery has expired. Replace the battery. –
Idling speed setting is too low. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
Vehicle is used only at night-time. Charge the battery. –
Switches are left on. Be sure to turn off the switches. –
Faulty alternator. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest –
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer.
 13-7

Stopping your vehicle in an

emergency

Should a mechanical failure occur, do not panic.

Simply slow your vehicle while paying attention to
the vehicles behind you, and pull off the road at a
place where you do not hinder the flow of traffic.

WARNING
• Stopping your vehicle in a tunnel could be
dangerous. Wherever possible drive out
of the tunnel before stopping the vehicle.
• Be sure to block the wheels with chocks
after stopping the vehicle as mechanical
failure may render the parking brake inop-
erative.

1 Marking your vehicle

After you have pulled off the road, alert other drivers
as follows, so that they do not collide with your vehi-
cle.
• Flash the hazard warning lamps.
• Put up a red flag or attach a white cloth to your
vehicle where it can easily be seen.
• Place a warning triangle behind the vehicle.

Z17816

2 Repair
Check the mechanical failure and if you judge it
readily repairable, fix it while paying attention to the
traffic. If you are unable to repair it, call your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer
for help.

WARNING
Never attempt to perform repairs on an
expressway or in a tunnel as doing so is
very dangerous.
13-8 Useful advice for emergencies

If the engine overheats

WARNING
Never remove the pressure cap while the
coolant is still hot. Carelessly removing it is
dangerous since boiling coolant and hot
Z21396 steam will gush out and could scald you.
Only after the coolant has cooled down suffi-
ciently remove the pressure cap by gripping
it in a folded piece of thick cloth and opening
it slowly.

CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine only after letting it
run at a speed slightly above the idling RPM
until the coolant cools down. Turning off the
engine immediately after stopping will cause
the coolant temperature to rise quickly and
may cause the engine to seize up.
• Suddenly pouring cold water into the radia-
tor could make the engine crack. Supply
cold water a little at a time.

If the warning lamp comes on, the multi-informa-

tion display shows (red) , and the buzzer is
sounding, the engine has overheated.
When the coolant temperature indicator bar graph
retracts to 8 segments or less and the multi-infor-
mation display shows (green), stop the engine
and perform the following inspections and correc-
tive steps:
1. Tilt the cab. P. 12-8
If the vehicle is a Crew-cab model vehicle,
uncover the engine access opening and the
Z24995
opening for inspecting the power steering oil
and engine coolant. P. 12-6
2. Check that coolant is not leaking from the radia-
tor hoses or from other parts.
3. Check that the fan belt is not broken and that its
tension is normal. P. 12-62
4. Check the coolant level. If the level is too low,
add coolant. Refer to Page 12-54 for the recom-
mended coolant for refilling.
• Turn the pressure cap counterclockwise
to remove it, and fill coolant up to the pres-
sure cap opening. Following this, fit the pres-
sure cap tightly by turning it clockwise.
• Take the cap off the reservoir tank and add
coolant until it reaches the “FULL” line. Refit
the cap tightly.
5. Check that there is no dirt stuck to the front of
Z21125 the radiator. Remove any dirt from the front of
the radiator.
6. Lower the cab if it has been lifted. On a Crew-
cab model vehicle, uncover the engine access
opening and the opening for inspecting the
power steering oil and engine coolant.
 13-9

7. If coolant leaks or the engine repeatedly over-

heats, the cooling system is faulty. Have the
vehicle inspected by your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

When a fuse has blown

This vehicle is equipped with a 12-volt power circuit.

Vehicles with a battery equaliser are equipped
both 12-volt and 24-volt power circuits. A different
fuse is used for each voltage circuit.
The vehicle has blade-type fuses and high-current
fuses. The blade-type fuses are in the fuse box
located inside the cab and in the high-current fuse
box located outside the cab. The high-current fuse
box also contains the high-current fuses.

Z22469
WARNING
• Be sure to set the starter switch to “LOCK”
and turn off all other electric switches
whenever replacing fuses or high-current
fuses. Replacing any fuses or high-current
fuses while electric circuits are still live
could damage related electric equipment.
• Be sure to use MITSUBISHI genuine fuses
of the specified amperages. A fire could
result if a fuse of incorrect amperage is
used. If a fuse is blown have the vehicle
inspected and the blown fuse replaced by
an authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.
• Do not add wiring or modify equipment
yourself. Doing so may result in faulty
operation of the equipment and could
cause the vehicle to catch fire due to over-
heated wiring. Always contact an autho-
rised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer if you intend to install additional
electric equipment and it becomes neces-
sary to modify the existing equipment or
add new wiring.

CAUTION
• The urea dosing system continues to oper-
ate for about 2 minutes after the starter
switch has been put in the “LOCK” position.
If you need to remove a fuse do so after
waiting for at least 2 minutes.
• Use care not to splash water on or around
the fuse box cover. Should water be
splashed over the fuse box cover check the
inside of the fuse box for water.
Any drops of water left inside the compart-
ment could cause an electrical fault or fire.
13-10 Useful advice for emergencies

1 Blade-type fuses
1.1 Removal and installation of lower panel in
front of assistant driver’s seat
1. Remove the lower panel in front of the assis-
tant driver’s seat.
2. Reinstall the lower panel by first aligning the
claws with the corresponding slots and then
pushing the panel forward.

Z21420

1.2 Removal and installation of high-current

fuse box cover
1. Pry and release the two locks and remove the
cover.
2. To install the cover, push in the cover until the
two locks click.

Z21421
 13-11

1.3 Inspection and replacement

1. Place the starter switch in the “LOCK” position

and turn all other switches OFF.
2. To remove the fuse that is to be replaced, grip it
using the fuse puller in the fuse box . The
amperage and protected circuit of each fuse are
shown on the inside of the lower panel.

Z21422

3. If a fuse is blown, be sure to select a spare fuse

of the specified amperage for replacement.

Z11217

1.4 How to remove the spare fuse

Insert the puller into the gap on the outer side of
the fuse holder wall to remove the spare fuse .

Z21577

CAUTION
Do not force the puller into the gap on the inner
side of the fuse holder wall. Doing so will break
the equipment and cause malfunctions or a fire.

Z21578
13-12 Useful advice for emergencies

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

F06

F07

F08

F09

F10

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17
F11
F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

F30

F31

F32

F33

F34
Z22030

Fuse Amper- Protected circuit

No. age
F01 10A Starter
F02 10A –
F03 10A SRS airbag ECU
F04* 10A Accessory power supply (IGN)
F05 30A Power window (driver’s)
F06 10A Trailer tail lamp LH
Power window
F07 30A
(assistant driver’s)

F08 20A Trailer lamp (Rear fog lamp,

Back lamp)
Meter cluster, diagnostic
F09 10A
connector
F10 30A ISS (ECU)
F11 30A Air conditioner blower fan

Z21128 F12 15A Audio system, interior lamp

F13 10A Starter switch, ISS (ECU)
F14 10A Horn
F15 10A Audio system
F16 20A Cigarette lighter
F17 20A Fuel heater
F18 10A ABS ECU
F19 15A Engine ECU
F20 10A ECU (IGN, ISS)
 13-13

Fuse Amper-
Protected circuit
No. age
F21 10A –

F22 15A Meter cluster, air conditioner,

rear air conditioner relay
F23 10A Trailer tail lamp RH
F24 10A DUONIC® ECU
F25* 10A Accessory power supply (ACC)
F26* 10A Accessory power supply (BAT)
Engine cooler fan magnet
F27 20A
clutch
F28 15A Engine ECU
F29 20A SCR
F30 20A SCR
F31 20A Engine ECU
F32 10A Air conditioner compressor
F33 – –
F34 15A Fuel pump
F35 – –
F36 20A DUONIC® ECU
F37 10A Rear blower fan
F38 15A Rear condenser fan
F39 20A Engine ECU
F40 20A Condenser fan
F41 30A Hydraulic unit

F42* 10A Alternator (only vehicles with

battery equaliser)
F43* – –
10A
15A
Spare fuse
20A
30A
*: On vehicles with battery equaliser, the voltage of
this circuit is 24 V.
13-14 Useful advice for emergencies

2 High-current fuse
The high-current fuses, which protect circuits in the
same way as regular fuses, are fitted in a box next
to the battery. If a high-current fuse is blown, most
of the vehicle’s electrical circuits become inopera-
tive.

2.1 Inspection
1. Place the starter switch in the “LOCK” position
and turn all other switches OFF.
2. Pry and release the two locks of the cover
with your fingers and remove the cover. To
install the cover, push in the cover until the two
locks click.

Z21129

3. Check for a blown high-current fuse by looking

inside through inspection window .
If it is blown, immediately call your nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer and have them check your vehicle.

Z21426

NOTE:
The high-current fuses may be hard to check
depending on the position of a box.
If you are difficult to inspect, look into the inside
through inspection window by tilting up the cab or
using an appropriate mirror like a hand mirror.
 13-15

High-current fuses
Amperage Protected circuit
No.
(casing colour)
HF01 140A (russet) SAM
HF02 – –
HF03 80A (black) SAM
HF04 – –
HF05 60A (yellow) Glow ECU
HF06 40A (green) Starter relay
HF07 – –
HF08 50A (red) Hydraulic unit
HF21* – –
HF22* 40A (green) SAM

*: On vehicles with battery equaliser, the voltage of

this circuit is 24 V.
Z21131
CAUTION
Close the cover completely to prevent rain
water from entering the fuse box.
13-16 Useful advice for emergencies

When a lamp has burned out

Whenever replacing a lamp, be sure to place the

starter switch in the “LOCK” position and all other
switches in the “OFF” position.

WARNING
• Use a lamp of the specified voltage and
wattage shown in the following table. If a
wrong lamp is used an excessive current
flowing through the wiring impairs the
control functions of the electric equipment
in the cab and of the rear body installa-
tions and eventually could cause a fire.
• Do not replace any lamp bulb immediately
after it has gone out. The bulb is very hot
then and could burn you. Be sure to wait
long enough for the bulb to cool down
before replacing it.
• Do not drop a lamp bulb. Flying fragments
of glass could hurt you. Be especially
careful when handling a halogen lamp
bulb as its high inner pressure increases
chance of injury.

CAUTION
The turn signal lamps have plastic lenses. Do
not clean these lenses with alcohol or thinner.
Also be careful not to splash brake fluid on
them when adding it to the braking system.
Contact with such a substance could discolour
or crack the lenses. If such a substance gets on
a plastic lens immediately wipe it off or rinse it
off with water.
NOTE:
In rainy weather and when the vehicle is washed,
condensation can form on the inside surfaces of the
headlamp lenses. Just as the windows mist up in
rainy weather, the condensation forms owing to a
temperature difference between the inside and out-
side. This phenomenon does not affect the head-
lamps’ functionality. It disappears naturally.
 13-17

>

Ref. Bulb wattage

Lamp Q’ty
No. (bulb type)
Headlamp 12V-60/55W (H4) 2
Position lamp 12V-5W (W5W) 2
Front and side turn signal lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
Front fog lamp 12V-55W (H3) 2
Daytime running lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
Stop lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
Tail lamp 12V-10W (R10W) 2
Rear turn signal lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
Backup lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
Rear fog lamp 12V-21W (P21W) 2
License plate lamp 12V-5W (C5W) 2
Step lamp 12V-5W (W5W) 2
End out-line marker lamp <FEB, FEC, FG> 12V-5W (R5W) 2
Interior lamp 12V-10W 1
Interior lamp with spot lamp <vehicles with spot lamp> 12V-8W 2
Interior lamp <rear seats of Crew-cab models> 12V-10W 1
13-18 Useful advice for emergencies

1 Headlamp bulb replacement

For safety and simplicity, bulb replacement is per-
formed with the headlamp removed. The radiator
grill and the front and side turn signal lamp must be
removed before the headlamp can be removed.

1.1 Headlamp removal and installation

• Removing the radiator grille

Z21749

1. Remove the screw of the radiator grille.

2. Remove the radiator grille by pulling outward on
<FEA> the clipped points in the order of the letters in
the illustration.
c d e d c
NOTE:
Pull the grille straight forward and horizontally.

b
a
Z21596

• Installing the radiator grille

1. Follow the removal procedure in reverse.
When installing the front grille, make sure the
rubber packing at each side of the grille does
not protrude from the clearance between the
grille and lamp.
2. Finally install the screw.

NOTE:
After installing the front grille, check whether the
rubber packing at each side of the grille is not pro-
Z21597
truding between the grille and lamp.
If the packing is protruding, push it in so it can’t be
seen on the surface. Be careful not to damage the
front grille or the lamps.
 13-19

• Headlamp removal
1. For removal of the headlamp , first remove the
screw and rivet , then move the lamp rub-
ber under the headlamp toward the centreline
of the vehicle and release it from the tabs .

CAUTION
When removing the lamp rubber do not pull it
with excessive force or the tabs could break.
Z21428

2. Open the door, then loosen the screws

behind the front and side turn signal lamp
until they spin freely.

NOTE:
The screws are designed not to come out.

Z21429

3. Pull out screw toward you.

CAUTION
Unless the screw is pulled out the front and
side turn signal lamp will catch on it and you
will not be able to remove it.

Z11266
4. Close the door.
5. Remove the front and side turn signal lamp
toward the outside of the vehicle, then remove
the socket .

Z21430

CAUTION
• When removing the front and side turn sig-
nal lamp do not pull it forward (toward the
front of the vehicle) or else its tabs could
break.
• Do not open the door with the front and side
turn signal lamp moved outward (but not
completely removed) or else the door could
hit and damage it.
13-20 Useful advice for emergencies

6. Remove the screws of the garnish , then

remove the garnish toward the outside of the
vehicle.

Z21431

NOTE:
Do not remove the end rubber piece from the
garnish.

Z22067

7. Remove the headlamp’s bolts .

Z21750

8. Raise the headlamp slightly to remove the tabs

from the holes , pull it out toward you.

Z22088

9. Remove the connectors from the headlamp

thus pulled out.

CAUTION
Do not turn the beam adjusting gear . Turning
the beam adjusting gear would change the
beam setting thus creating a nuisance for driv-
ers of other vehicles. If you accidentally turn the
beam adjusting gear have it inspected by your
> nearest authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distribu-
tor or dealer.
 13-21

• Headlamp installation
1. Install the connectors on the headlamp.

>

2. Connect the headlamp connector to the back of

the headlamp. Insert the tabs on the head-
lamp into the holes , and fit the headlamp in
place.

Z22089

3. Fit the headlamp’s bolts .

Z21750

4. Insert the pin into the hole , fit the garnish

in place, and tighten the screws .

CAUTION
Do not tighten the screw too tightly or the
mounting could get damaged.

Z21433

5. Install the socket on the front and side turn

signal lamp .
6. Pull out screws .
7. Align the tabs with the holes , then press
the lamp in toward the centreline of the vehicle.

Z21434
13-22 Useful advice for emergencies

8. Open the door, then tighten the screws

behind the front and side turn signal lamp .

>

CAUTION
• Press the front and side turn signal lamp
fully in toward the centreline of the vehicle. If
the lamp is not pressed fully into place and
you open the door the door could hit the
lamp and damage it.
• Do not tighten the screws too tightly or else
mounting could get damaged.

9. Fit the lamp rubber under the headlamp

onto the tabs by moving it toward the outside
of the vehicle.
10. Fit the rivet , then press in the screw .

Z21436

1.2 Headlamp bulb replacement

CAUTION
• Do not directly touch the glass part of a halo-
gen bulb with your fingers. Any oil and other
substances contaminating the glass surface
could shorten the bulb’s service life.
• Do not clean lamps with alcohol and thinner
because their lenses are made of plastic.
• Do not attach any sticker or tape on the
headlamp lens. Doing so may result in defor-
mation of the lens by heat since the lens is
made of plastic.

• Removal
1. Hold the tab of the cover toward you to
remove it.
2. Remove the spring that retains the bulb .
3. Remove the bulb.

• Installation
1. Align the tabs on the bulb with the grooves ,
fit the bulb in place, and retain the bulb with the
spring.
2. If the cover is dirty, clean it.
>
 13-23

3. Install the cover by pushing it until the bulb

end is exposed a little. Push the shaded area
when installing the cover.

>

1.3 Position lamp bulb replacement

1. Turn the socket in the direction of the arrow
to remove it.
2. Remove the bulb .
3. Perform installation by following the removal
steps in reverse.
4. If the packing is dirty, clean it.

>

2 Front and side turn signal lamp bulb

replacement
1. Open the door.
2. Turn the socket in the direction of arrow to
remove it.
3. Press the bulb and turn it in the direction of
arrow to remove it.
4. Perform installation by following the removal
steps in reverse.
5. If the packing is dirty, clean it.
>

3 Replacing end out-line marker lamp

bulb <FEB FEC FG>
• Removal
1. Remove the screw securing the lens .
2. Slightly raise the screw-mounted side of the lens
and slide it in the direction shown by the arrow in
the drawing. Release the claws from the
grooves and remove the lens.
3. To remove the bulb , push it sideways and turn
it in the direction shown by the arrow in the
Z13384 drawing.

• Installation
1. Push the new bulb into the socket and turn it in
the direction shown by the arrow in the draw-
ing until the stubs on the bulb engages with
the grooves in the socket.
2. If the packing is dirty, clean.
3. With its claws aligned with the grooves ,
push the lens straightly downward.
4. Tighten the screw to the specified torque.

Tightening torque 1.0 to 1.2 N·m

Z13385 (0.10 to 0.12 kgf·m)
13-24 Useful advice for emergencies

4 Replacing the fog lamp bulb

• Removal
1. Tilt up the cab if it has a tilting mechanism.
2. Remove the cover after turning it counter-
clockwise to a stop.
3. Disconnect the bulb connector .
4. Disconnect the connector from the lamp unit.
5. Unhook the spring , then pull out the bulb .

Z21141

• Installation
1. Hold the bulb with the square groove at the
bottom (with the circular groove at the top),
then align the bulb with the lugs on the fog
lamp unit, install it and fix it with the spring .
2. Reconnect the connector of the bulb.
3. Reconnect the connector to the fog lamp unit.
4. Clean the packing if necessary. Also
straighten the packing if it is twisted.
5. Install the cover on the lamp unit and turn it
clockwise.
Z21437 6. Lower the cab if it was tilted up.

5 Replacing the daytime running bulb

1. Raise the cab if the vehicle is equipped with a
cab tilt mechanism.
2. Turn the socket in the direction of the arrow
to remove it.
3. While pressing the bulb turn it in the direction
of the arrow to remove it.
4. Perform installation by following the removal
steps in reverse.
5. If the packing is dirty, clean it.
>

6 Interior lamp bulb replacement

6.1 Interior lamp
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver between the
lens and the interior lamp and use it to
release the tabs on the bottom of the lens.
Remove the lens.
2. Push the bulb retainer rightward and remove
the bulb .
3. To install the lens, insert the tabs on the top of
the lens and press the bottom of the lens into
place.
Z09125
 13-25

6.2 Interior lamp with built-in spot lamps

<Vehicles with interior lamp with built-in
spot lamps>
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the notches
and use it to release the tabs on the top
end of the lens . Remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclock-
wise while pushing inward.
3. Install the lens by inserting the tabs at the bot-
tom end of the lens into the slots and pushing
the lens while aligning the tabs on the top end
Z09127
with the notches.

7 Step lamp
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the tab
locations at the bottom end of the lens and
remove the lens by pulling it toward you while
raising it.
2. Pull out the bulb .
3. Install the lens by inserting the tabs at the bot-
tom end into the slots and then pushing the
locations of the tabs at the top end of the
lens.
Z09128

8 Replacing other lamps

1. Loosen the screw that secures the lens, then
remove the lens.
2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise while pressing it
and remove it.
3. Insert a new bulb and turn it clockwise.
4. Fit the lens, ensuring that the packing is cor-
rectly positioned. If the packing is incorrectly
installed or twisted, water can enter the lamp
and shorten its life. If the packing is dirty, clean
it.
5. Uniformly tighten the screws that retain the lens.
13-26 Useful advice for emergencies

When braking is sluggish

WARNING
• Never use the parking brake during driving
except in an emergency. Pulling the park-
ing brake lever with full force while driving
could cause the vehicle to topple over.
• Never continue driving with the brake sys-
tem malfunctioning or leaking fluid.

Press the brake pedal harder than usual, downshift

to use engine braking and activate exhaust braking
to stop the vehicle. Apply the parking brake when
necessary. After the vehicle has been brought into a
stop, check parts, then call your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.

If the engine stalls while the vehicle

is in motion

The vehicle will be set into the following very dan-

gerous conditions. Immediately pull up the vehicle
and try to start the engine.
• The braking force is extremely reduced. You
must exert additional force on the brake pedal to
apply the brakes.
• The power steering system becomes inopera-
tive, making steering extremely difficult.
Additional force must be used when turning the
steering wheel.

If a tyre goes flat while the vehicle is

in motion

Avoid sudden braking. Hold the steering wheel

firmly, and gradually slow down before pulling up at
a safe place.
To replace the tyre, select a flat surface where your
vehicle will not hinder traffic. P. 12-71

If the vehicle has a tyre repair kit, make an emer-

gency repair as follows:

1 Tyre repair kit

<Vehicles with a tyre repair kit>
This kit is intended for emergency repairs of non-
severe punctures caused by nails or screws in tyre
treads.
 13-27

WARNING
• The emergency repair sealant is harmful to
health if swallowed. If you accidentally
swallow it drink as much water as possi-
ble and immediately see a doctor.
• If the emergency repair sealant gets in
your eyes or on your skin thoroughly
rinse it away with water. If you still do not
feel normal see a doctor.
• Do not allow children to touch the emer-
gency repair sealant.
• Before making a repair with the emergency
repair sealant stop the vehicle in a safe
place on a flat surface firmly apply the
parking brake and place the gearshift
lever in the neutral position on a manual
transmission vehicle or in the “P” position
on a vehicle with a DUONIC® system.

CAUTION
• It is not possible to make a repair using the
emergency repair sealant in any of the situa-
tions listed below. Contact the nearest
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer instead.
• The emergency sealant has passed its
use-by date (written on the bottle).
• Two or more tyres are punctured.
• The cut or pierced hole in the tyre has a
size of 10mm or bigger.
• The puncture was caused by damage to
the sidewall (not the tread) of the tyre.
• The vehicle was driven after most of the
air escaped from the tyre.
• The tyre has come off the wheel.
• The wheel is damaged.
• If the emergency repair sealant gets on
clothing it may not come off.

1.1 Preparations
• Stop the vehicle on a flat surface in a safe place
where it will not obstruct traffic, firmly apply the
parking brake, and place the gearshift lever in
the neutral position (on a manual transmission
vehicle) or in the “P” position (on a vehicle with a
DUONIC® system).
• Stop the engine.
• Turn on the hazard warning lamps.
• Place a warning triangle behind the vehicle.
• If possible, remove the foreign object that is
stuck in the tyre.
• If possible, turn the wheel until the punctured
part of the tyre is touching the ground.
13-28 Useful advice for emergencies

1.2 Front wheel tyre or rear inner wheel tyre

1. Take out the tyre repair kit . For Crew-cab
model vehicles, take out the tyre repair kit from
the compartment under the rear seat.
2. If a front tyre is punctured, jack up the affected
front wheel. P. 12-72

>

3. Give the emergency repair sealant bottle a

thorough shake.

NOTE:
At low temperatures (0 C or lower), the emergency
repair sealant thickens and cannot easily be
sprayed into tyres. Warm the bottle in the cab
before shaking it.

Z19543

4. If a rear inner wheel tyre is punctured, remove

the extension valve .

Z13306

5. Remove the tyre valve cap , then securely

screw the valve core remover (long type) onto
the valve stem by turning the remover clock-
wise.

Z19545

6. Fit the connector of the emergency repair

sealant bottle on the valve core remover. Push
down the knob on the connector to lock the
connector in position.

Z19546
 13-29

7. Turn the knob in the valve core remover

counterclockwise while gently pushing it inward
until the slit at the other end of the valve core
remover is aligned with the valve core .

Z19547

8. Turn the knob counterclockwise until the valve

core is detached from the valve stem.

Z19548

9. Pull the knob in the valve core remover until the

valve core comes higher than the filler hose con-
nection on the emergency repair sealant bottle.
If the valve core is not visible in the clear plastic
part of the valve core remover, repeat the proce-
dure beginning with step 7.

CAUTION
Be sure to pull the knob in the valve core
Z19549 remover until the valve core is higher than the
filler hose connection on the emergency repair
sealant bottle. If the valve core is lower than the
filler hose connection on the emergency repair
sealant bottle part of the emergency repair seal-
ant will clog the filler hose and prevent the
remaining part of the sealant from going
smoothly into the tyre.

10. Press the button on the top of the aerosol bot-

tle to spray the emergency repair sealant into
the tyre.

Z19550
13-30 Useful advice for emergencies

11. If the emergency sealant bottle is empty, per-

form steps 12 through 16 immediately.
12. Turn the knob in the valve core remover clock-
wise until the valve core is fully screwed back
into the valve stem.
13. Remove the valve core remover from the valve
stem.

Z19551

14. When the tyre being repaired is a rear inner

wheel tyre, fit the extension valve onto the valve
stem.

Z19552

15. Securely connect the air hose of the second

aerosol bottle to the valve stem (to the exten-
sion valve for a rear inner wheel tyre). Do this by
turning the nut at the end of the air hose
clockwise.
16. Press the button on the top of the second
aerosol bottle to supply air to the tyre.

CAUTION
Z19553 The tyre air pressure at this time must be 140
kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2) or higher. Do not try to use
more than two aerosol bottles even if the pres-
sure is insufficient.

NOTE:
The aerosol bottle will put enough air pressure in
the tyre for the vehicle to be drivable.

17. Fit the tyre valve cap.

18. Stow the tyre repair kit and warning triangle in
the vehicle, then promptly start driving the vehi-
cle at speeds no higher than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
Drive carefully, observing posted speed limits
and avoiding hard braking, hard steering, and
sudden acceleration.

WARNING
It is possible for the tyre pressure to drop
before an emergency repair process is com-
plete making the vehicle unsafe to drive. If
you sense any abnormality while driving
stop the vehicle and contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
 13-31

CAUTION
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 MPH).

19. After driving about 5 km (3 miles), stop in a safe

place and check the tyre pressure. P. 12-69
If the tyre pressure has not dropped, the emer-
gency repair is complete. Immediately start driv-
ing carefully to an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer within 200 km (125
miles) to have the tyre repaired or replaced.
If the tyre pressure has dropped, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer. Do not drive the vehicle any further.

CAUTION
When making a full repair on a tubeless tyre
whose puncture was temporarily repaired using
the tyre repair kit the temporary repair sealant
on the tyre surface must be washed away and
the tyre must be dried thoroughly before per-
forming the repair.

NOTE:
Replace the used temporary repair sealant and
aerosol bottles in the repair kit with new ones.

1.3 Rear outer wheel tyre

1. Take out the tyre repair kit . For Crew-cab
model vehicles, take out the tyre repair kit from
the compartment under the rear seat.

>

2. Give the emergency repair sealant bottle a

thorough shake.

NOTE:
At low temperatures (0 C or lower), the emergency
repair sealant thickens and cannot easily be
sprayed into tyres. Warm the bottle in the cab
before shaking it.

Z19543
13-32 Useful advice for emergencies

3. Remove the tyre valve cap . Press the valve

core remover (short type) against the valve
stem and turn the valve core remover clock-
wise or counterclockwise until the slit in the
valve core remover is aligned with the valve
core .

Z19554

4. Turn the valve core remover counterclockwise

to remove the valve core from the valve stem.
Put the valve core in a clean place so it does not
get dirty.

CAUTION
Make sure no air remains in the tyre before
removing the valve core. If there is still air in the
tyre the valve core could fly out and cause an
injury.
Z19555

5. Fit the connector of the emergency repair

sealant bottle on the valve stem. Push down the
knob on the connector to lock the connector
in position.

Z19556

6. Press the button on the top of the aerosol bot-

tle to spray the emergency repair sealant into
the tyre.
7. When the emergency repair sealant bottle is
empty, remove its connector from the valve
stem.

Z19557

8. Turn the valve core remover clockwise until the

valve core is securely screwed back into the
valve stem.

Z19558
 13-33

9. Securely connect the air hose of the second

aerosol bottle to the valve stem. Do this by
turning the nut at the end of the air hose
clockwise.
10. Press the button on the top of the second
aerosol bottle to supply air to the tyre.

CAUTION
The tyre air pressure at this time must be 140
Z19559 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2) or higher. Do not try to use
more than two aerosol bottles even if the pres-
sure is insufficient.
NOTE:
The aerosol bottle will put enough air pressure in
the tyre for the vehicle to be drivable.

11. Fit the tyre valve cap.

12. Stow the tyre repair kit and warning triangle in
the vehicle, then promptly start driving the vehi-
cle at speeds no higher than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
Drive carefully, observing posted speed limits
and avoiding hard braking, hard steering, and
sudden acceleration.

WARNING
It is possible for the tyre pressure to drop
before an emergency repair process is com-
plete making the vehicle unsafe to drive. If
you sense any abnormality while driving
stop the vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer.

CAUTION
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 MPH).

13. After driving about 5 km (3 miles), stop in a safe

place and check the tyre pressure. P. 12-69
If the tyre pressure has not dropped, the emer-
gency repair is complete. Immediately start driv-
ing carefully to an authorised MITSUBISHI
FUSO distributor or dealer within 200 km (125
miles) to have the tyre repaired or replaced.
If the tyre pressure has dropped, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or
dealer. Do not drive the vehicle any further.

CAUTION
When making a full repair on a tubeless tyre
whose puncture was temporarily repaired using
the tyre repair kit the temporary repair sealant
on the tyre surface must be washed away and
the tyre must be dried thoroughly before per-
forming the repair.
NOTE:
Replace the used temporary repair sealant and
aerosol bottles in the repair kit with new ones.
13-34 Useful advice for emergencies

When the battery has run down

Perform the following procedure to start your engine

by connecting your battery to the well charged bat-
tery of another vehicle with booster cables.

WARNING
• If your battery has a fluid level indicator at
the top do not charge it when the indica-
tor is white. If your battery has no indica-
tor avoid charging it unless the fluid level
is above the “LOWER” line. Otherwise the
battery will deteriorate rapidly and could
overheat or explode. If your battery is of a
type that allows fluid replenishment add
fluid before charging it. Replace the bat-
tery if fluid cannot be added.
• Be careful not to connect the booster
cables in the wrong sequence. Sparks are
often produced when you connect the
booster cable to the vehicle’s frame.
Therefore if the cable is connected to a
section of the frame near the battery the
spark could set off the hydrogen given off
by the battery to cause an explosion. Be
sure to connect the cable end to a point as
far away as possible from the battery.
Also keep cigarettes and open flames well
away from the battery.
• Never start the engine by towing or push-
ing the vehicle. Doing so is dangerous
because the brakes work poorly and the
steering wheel becomes abnormally hard
to turn.

CAUTION
• Use booster cables able to handle large cur-
rents.
• Use the vehicle with the same voltage (12V)
as your vehicle to connect your battery. Do
not use a vehicle with a 24V system.
• Remove the battery from the vehicle for
charging.

NOTE:
Your vehicle’s electrical system operates on a 12V
power supply.
Vehicles with battery equaliser have 12V circuits
and 24V circuits. P. 1-15
 13-35

:ILMGPIW[MXLSRIFEXXIV]"
'SRRIGXMSR" (MWGSRRIGXMSR"
(IEH
FEXXIV]

*VEQI
IEVXL

&SSWXIV
FEXXIV]
:

>

<Vehicles with two batteries>

<Connection> <Disconnection>

Dead
battery

Frame
(earth)

Booster
battery
(12V)

Z22221
13-36 Useful advice for emergencies

:ILMGPIW[MXLFEXXIV]IUYEPMWIV"
'SRRIGXMSR" (MWGSRRIGXMSR"
(IEH
FEXXIV]

*VEQI
IEVXL

&SSWXIV
FEXXIV]
:

>

1. Stop the engine of the vehicle giving the boost.

2. Remove the battery cover. P. 12-89
3. Connect one end of the red booster cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Con-
nect the other end of the red booster cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster bat-
tery.
4. Connect one end of the black booster cable to
the negative (–) terminal of the booster bat-
tery and connect (earth) the other end of the
black booster cable to a section of frame on
the vehicle with the dead battery at a point as far
away as possible from the battery.
5. After the above connections have been com-
pleted, start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at an RPM slightly
higher than idling speed. Then, attempt to start
the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.
If the engine starts with difficulty because of cold
weather or a dead battery, let it draw a charge
for several minutes from the vehicle from which
you are receiving the boost before attempting to
turn over the engine.
6. After the engine of the vehicle with the dead bat-
tery has been started, disconnect the booster
cables by reversing the order of connection.
 13-37

If fuel tank becomes empty

(Bleeding the fuel system)

When the vehicle runs out of fuel and the engine

stalls, also when the fuel filter has been replaced, or
if water has been drained from the fuel filter, air that
has entered the fuel system prevents the engine
from being started even if the engine has been refu-
eled after running dry.
In these cases, bleed the fuel system by performing
the following steps.

WARNING
When the fuel filter has been replaced make
sure fuel does not leak from the filter or from
related parts. Any fuel leakage could cause a
fire.

1. Supply fuel to the fuel system to bleed air out of

the fuel system as follows: Hold the starter
switch in the “ON” position for 30 seconds and
then set it to the “ACC” position.
2. When the fuel filter has been replaced, start the
engine and check that there is no fuel leakage.

If the urea tank becomes empty

If the urea tank becomes completely empty, a warn-

ing is issued as follows:
• The urea level warning lamp is on.
• All segments from F to E of the urea level indica-
tor flash quickly.
• The warning lamp flashes.
• The indication (red) is displayed.
Afterwards, a driving restriction engages, so the
vehicle can be driven only slowly. In the event of a
driving restriction, replenish AdBlue® immediately
and then disengage the restriction.
>
P. 1-9
13-38 Useful advice for emergencies

Towing

WARNING
• If the engine of the defective vehicle does
not run use a special towing vehicle.
• Check that the braking system is function-
> ing normally.

Observe the following precautions when towing a

broken down vehicle.
• The tow rope must be sufficiently strong and
attached securely to the tow hook on the vehi-
cle’s frame.
: Front hook

• Position the tow rope on the same side of both

vehicles.

Z17831

• For the sake of safety, the angle formed by the

tow rope when hooked up should be limited to
the range indicated in the illustration. Do not tow
15 a vehicle under conditions which could impose
sudden undue stress on the hooks (for instance,
15 towing a vehicle out of a ditch) as doing so could
break the hooks. Also, never attempt to tow a
15 vehicle that is heavier than your own vehicle.
15 NOTE:
The load limit of the towing hook is 14,700 N (1,500
Z18432 kgf) in the pulling direction.

• The cargo on the disabled vehicle should be

completely unloaded.
• Limit the maximum speed to 30 km/h (19 mph)
unless the vehicle is towed with a special towing
vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts and keep the tow rope taut.

• The broken down vehicle should be prepared for

towing as follows:
1. In a manual transmission vehicle, put the gear
shift lever in the neutral position. In a vehicle
with DUONIC ® system, put the gearshift lever in
the “N” position.
 13-39

2. Keep the engine running.

Stopping the engine while the vehicle is moving
is extremely dangerous because it drastically
reduces braking performance and makes the
steering action extremely heavy.

CAUTION
• If the transmission transfer <FG models> or
differential is defective do not tow the vehi-
cle. Instead call your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI FUSO distributor or dealer.
• Before towing FG models vehicle raise the
front wheels and disconnect the propeller
shaft at the rear.
• If it becomes necessary to tow a vehicle with
DUONIC® system disconnect the propeller
shaft or lift the rear wheels off the ground
using a specially equipped tow truck. Doing
otherwise would damage the transmission.
• With the propeller shaft disconnected
engine braking and the exhaust braking will
not be available.

NOTE:
The exhaust emissions may be extremely hot. If the
tow rope sags excessively, the exhaust emissions
may discolour it. When you stop the vehicle, make
sure the tow rope does not sag too much.
 14-1

14. Service data

Recommended lubricants/hydraulic fluids and quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Service data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14-2 Service data

Recommended lubricants/hydraulic fluids and quantities

1 Quantities of lubricants/hydraulic fluids

litres
Item Quantity
Replacing oil Approx. 5.5 liters
Engine Replace the oil and
the filter at the same Approx. 6.0 liters
time
Clutch control fluid <Vehicles with the DUONIC® system> Approx. 2.0
Vehicles without PTO Approx. 3.5
Transmission (including DUONIC® system)
Vehicles with PTO Approx. 3.7
Transfer <FG models> Approx. 3.1
FEA0, FEB0 Approx. 2.2
FEA5 Approx. 2.7
Differential FEB7, FEC Approx. 4.5
Front Approx. 2.2
FG
Rear Approx. 4.5
Power steering As required
Brake fluid As required

CAUTION
The indicated oil and fluid quantities should be used only as a guide at the time of replacement. To
ensure correct oil and fluid levels use the oil level gauge inspection plug holes and level lines as
appropriate.
 14-3

2 Recommended lubricants/hydraulic fluids

Be sure to use the specified lubricants.
Viscosity
Parts Category Classification Atmospheric SAE viscosity Remarks
temperature number
Engine Engine oil ACEA C2 – 0W-30, 5W–30 –
General 80
API GL-3 Warm or tropical –
Transmission 90
(including region
Gear oil
DUONIC ® system) General 80
Transfer <FG>
API GL-4 Warm or tropical MIL-L-2105
90
region
Clutch Automatic
<Vehicles with transmission FUSO ATF SPIII – – –
DUONIC ® system> fluid

Below 40 C 90
Differential gear *1 Gear oil –
Above 40 C 140
Limited slip differen- API GL-5
tial <vehicles with Gear oil for FUSO LSD
limited-slip – 90
multiplate type lim- differential GEAR OIL
ited slip differential>
Automatic
DEXRON II,
Power steering transmission DEXRON III type – – –
fluid
SAE J1703,
Brake Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116 – – –
(Type DOT4)
Chassis grease
nipples
Anchor hooks and Chassis NLGI Consistency
No. 1 – – 310 to 340
door hinges grease (Li soap) (at 25 C)
<Not applicable to
Crew-cab models>
Wheel hub bearing
Propeller shaft
(universal joint, slip Wheel bearing
joint, double cardan NLGI Consistency
joint *2) grease No. 2 – – 265 to 295
(Multipurpose
Birfield joint *2 type grease) (Li soap) (at 25 C)
Kingpin bearing *2
Steering knuckle *2
<*2: FG models>

*1: At ambient temperatures higher than 10 C, use an oil conforming to SAE140 if the vehicle is used under such heavy
load conditions as continuous upgrade climbing.
14-4 Service data

Service data

Description Standard value

Engine idling speed 650 rpm
FEA Approx. 13.0 litres
Without rear air
Approx. 13.7 liters
Coolant quantity Other than conditioner
FEA With rear air condi- Approx. 14.8 liters
tioner
Clutch pedal play 0.2 to 4 mm
Brake pedal play 0.1 to 3 mm
Fully pressed brake pedal to floor clearance 10 mm or more
Parking brake lever stroke (when pulled with a force of 294 N {30 kgf}) 7 to 9 notches
Front independent
When 20 mm or less
suspension models
Steering wheel play (as measured on the engine is
periphery of steering wheel) turned off Front rigid leaf sus- 10 to 20 mm
pension models
When engine is idling 5 to 50 mm
Tyre tread groove depth 1.6 mm or more
170 to 230 N·m
FEA0, FEB0 models
(17 to 23 kgf·m)
Wheel nut tightening torque
450 to 550 N·m
Other than FEA0, FEB0 models
(45 to 55 kgf·m)
 15-1

15. Alphabetical index

15-2 Alphabetical index

4WD system – FG models ................................ 8-5 Fuel tank cap .................................................... 1-5
Accelerator pedal ............................................ 5-18 Fuels ....................................................... 1-4, 11-2
®
AdBlue ............................................................ 1-6 Fully automatic air conditioner ........................ 9-13
Air cleaner ..................................................... 12-46 Fuse ................................................................ 13-9
Air filters ........................................................ 12-96 Gearshift lever ................................................ 5-20
Antilock braking system (ABS) ........................ 8-23 Greasing ....................................................... 12-19
Ashtrays .......................................................... 10-3 Handling of vehicles equipped with 12-volt and
24-volt power circuits ...................................... 1-15
Assistant driver’s seat ....................................... 4-5
Handling the new vehicle ................................ 1-11
Battery .............................................. 12-89, 13-34
Handling vehicles with a BlueTec® system ...... 1-6
BlueTec® system ............................................ 5-62
Hazard warning lamp switch ........................... 5-49
Brake fluid ..................................................... 12-33
Headlamp leveling switch ............................... 5-51
Brake pedal ..................................................... 5-18
Heater ............................................................... 9-4
Brakes ........................................................... 12-65
Horn switch ..................................................... 5-53
Braking .................................................. 7-7, 13-26
Hydraulic jack ............................................... 12-73
Cigarette lighter .............................................. 10-2
Idling stop and start (ISS) system ................... 5-13
Cleaning your vehicle .................................... 12-98
Indicator lamp ................................................. 6-26
Clutch ............................................................ 12-68
Inside rearview mirror ..................................... 10-6
Clutch pedal .................................................... 5-19
Interior lamp .................................................... 10-4
Coat hooks ...................................................... 10-4
Jacking points ............................................... 12-75
Combination switch ......................................... 5-45
Keyless entry system ........................................ 3-7
Coolant ............................................... 11-2, 12-54
Lamp ............................................................. 13-16
Cruise control .................................................. 5-38
Lane changer .................................................. 5-46
Cup holder ...................................................... 10-8
Lane departure warning system ..................... 8-17
Daytime running lamp ..................................... 5-46
Lighting switch ................................................ 5-45
Differential gear oil ........................................ 12-31
Limited slip differential .................................... 8-21
Dimmer switch ................................................ 5-46
Loading cargo ................................................. 7-13
Door window glass .......................................... 3-13
Manual air conditioner ...................................... 9-8
Doors ................................................................ 3-5
Mirror heater switch ........................................ 5-53
Draining water from fuel filter ........................ 12-52
Oil filter ......................................................... 12-36
Driver’s seat ...................................................... 4-3
On rough roads and in bad weather ................. 7-9
Driving in foreign countries ............................. 1-16
On uphill and downhill roads ............................. 7-8
DUONIC® ........................................................ 5-21
Onboard tools ................................................. 12-4
Engine immobiliser ............................................ 3-3
Parking ........................................................... 7-11
Engine number ................................................. 1-2
Parking brake ............................................... 12-67
Engine oil ............................................ 11-2, 12-22
Parking brake lever ......................................... 5-44
Engine overheats ............................................ 13-8
Passing signal ................................................ 5-46
Entering and leaving the vehicle ..................... 3-11
Periodic inspection ............................................ 1-4
Environmental protection ................................ 1-16
Possible failures, causes and remedies ......... 13-2
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) system ... 8-12
Power steering fluid ...................................... 12-35
Exhaust brake switch ...................................... 5-47
Power window switches .................................. 3-13
Front air outlets ................................................. 9-2
Precautions for driving ...................................... 7-3
Front drive switch .............................................. 8-6
Precautions when setting the vehicle
Front fog lamp switch ...................................... 5-50 in motion ........................................................... 7-2
Fuel filter ....................................................... 12-41 Pre-operational check ........................... 1-3, 12-13
Fuel gauge ........................................................ 6-4 Preventing problems and accidents ................ 1-11
 Alphabetical index 15-3

Reaching the access opening ......................... 12-6 When parking the vehicle after replenishing
the AdBlue® .................................................... 11-3
Rear air outlets .................................................. 9-3
Windshield washer ........................................ 12-88
Rear fog lamp switch ...................................... 5-50
Wiper blade ................................................... 12-87
Rear seat .......................................................... 4-5
Wiper switch ................................................... 5-47
Recommended lubricants ............................... 14-2
Regeneration controlling DPF system ............. 5-54
Seat belts .......................................................... 4-6
Seats ................................................................. 4-2
Service data .................................................... 14-4
Small article compartments ............................. 10-7
Spare tyre ..................................................... 12-85
Speed limitation devices ................................. 5-54
Speedometer .................................................... 6-2
Starter key ......................................................... 3-2
Starter switch .................................................... 5-3
Starting the engine ............................................ 5-5
Steering wheel .................................... 4-18, 12-64
Stopping the engine ........................................ 5-11
Stopping your vehicle in an emergency .......... 13-7
Sun visors ....................................................... 10-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) – air bag
and seat belt pre-tensioner system ................. 4-10
Tachograph ..................................................... 6-34
Tachometer ....................................................... 6-3
Tilting the cab .................................................. 12-8
Tips for improving fuel economy ....................... 7-6
Towing .......................................................... 13-38
Trailer coupling and trailer socket ................... 8-25
Transfer gear oil ............................................ 12-30
Transmission gear oil .................................... 12-28
Transmission PTO ............................................ 8-2
Turn signal lamp switch .................................. 5-46
Tyre chains ..................................................... 11-5
Tyre repair kit ................................................ 13-26
Tyre rotation .................................................. 12-83
Tyres ................................................. 12-69, 12-71
Urea level indicator ........................................... 6-5
Using the radio .............................................. 10-10
V-belts ........................................................... 12-62
Vehicle identification number ............................ 1-2
Warming up the engine ..................................... 5-9
Warning labels .................................................. 2-1
Warning lamp .................................................. 6-26
Washer switch ................................................. 5-47
Water temperature gauge ................................. 6-3
Ad Blue®: Registered trademark of the Verband der Automobilindu strie e.V. (VOA)
DUONIC® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG
BlueTee®: A brand of Daimler AG

Owner's Handbook
JANUARY 2015

MITSUBISHI FUSO TRUCK & BUS CORPORATION

Pub. No.

MITSUBISHI FUSO TRUCK & BUS CORPORATION

English